Graco Inc. 246468 Paint Sprayer User Manual

Add to my manuals
361 Pages

advertisement

Graco Inc. 246468 Paint Sprayer User Manual | Manualzz

IBM 3745 Communication Controller

Models 130 to 17A

IBM

Maintenance Information Procedures

SY33-2070-09

IBM 3745 Communication Controller

Models 130 to 17A

IBM

Maintenance Information Procedures

SY33-2070-09

Note!

Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information under “Notices” on page xv.

Tenth Edition (June 1997)

The information contained in this manual is subject to change from time to time. Any such changes will be reported in subsequent revisions.

Changes have been made throughout this edition, and this manual should be read in its entirety.

Order publications through your IBM representative or the IBM branch office serving your locality. Publications are not stocked at the address given below.

A form for readers' comments appears at the back of this publication. If the form has been removed, address your comments to:

IBM France

Centre d'Etudes et de Recherches

Service 0798 - BP 79

06610 La Gaude

France

Ÿ FAX: 33 4 93 24 77 97

Ÿ E-mail: FRIBMQF5 at IBMMAIL

Ÿ

IBM Internal Use: LGERCF at LGEPROFS

Ÿ

Internet: [email protected]

When you send information to IBM, you grant IBM a non-exclusive right to use or distribute the information in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.

Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1989, 1997. All rights reserved.

Note to U.S. Government Users — Documentation related to restricted rights — Use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.

Contents

Figures

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ix

Tables

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xiii

Notices

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xv

European Union (EU) Statement

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xv

Electronic Emission Notices

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xv

Trademarks and Service Marks

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xvi

Product Safety Information

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xvii

General Safety

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xvii

Service Inspection Safety Procedures

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xvii

Service Inspection Safety Procedures for the 3745, 3746-900, and Controller

Expansion

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xviii

Introduction

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xviii

Control Panel LED Status Versus 3746-900 States

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xxx

3745/3746-900 Power Supply CP/CB and Fuse Reference

. . . . . . . . . .

xxx

Controller Expansion Fuse Reference

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xxx

Sicherheitsüberprüfungen für IBM 3745, 3746-900 und die Erweiterung der

Steuereinheit

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xxxi

Einführung

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xxxi

Bedeutung der LEDs am Bedienungsfeld der 3746-900

. . . . . . . . . . . .

xlii

Stromversorgung der 3745/3746-900, Sicherungsautomaten (CB),

Überstromschutzschalter (CP) und Sicherungen (F)

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

xliii

Sicherungen der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xliii

Safety Label Locations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lvii

Safety Labels on the 3745

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lvii

Safety Label on the 3746-900

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lix

Safety Label on LCB

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lix

3745/3746-900 Safety Label Identifications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lx

LCB Safety Label

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lxii

Controller Expansion Label Location

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lxii

Safety Label Part Numbers by Country

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lxiii

Preface

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lxv

About this Manual

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lxv

Who Should Read this Manual

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lxv

How this Manual Is Organized

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lxv

Summary of Changes

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lxvii

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1

Console Use for Maintenance

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1

Service Processor Window Overview

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3

Selection Table

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-4

3745 Maintenance Actions

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-6

Problems During Machine, EC, or MES Installation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-7

Selection Table

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-7

Symptom Index

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-8

General Verbal Symptoms

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-8

Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997

iii

3745 Console Symptoms

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-10

3745 Control Panel Symptoms

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-11

3745 Power Symptoms

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-12

Miscellaneous Information

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-13

Using Reference Codes

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-14

3745 Control Panel Codes

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-15

Using the MIP FRU Group Table

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-48

3745 FRU Group Table

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-49

3745 Cable Location

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-52

3745 FRU List

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-53

3745 and Service Processor Maintenance Using a CPN

. . . . . . . . . .

1-55

Service Processor Maintenance Using an SRC Sequence Number

. . . .

1-57

Engineering Data Transfer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-58

Overview

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-58

Transferring Engineering Data from the Local Service Processor

. . . . .

1-58

Transferring 3745 Engineering Data to MOSS-E

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-58

Logon on the Remote Service Processor

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-58

Transferring Engineering Data to the Remote Service Processor

. . . . .

1-59

3745 Diagnostic Requirement

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-60

Disabling Procedure 0110: Preparing a CA for Maintenance

. . . . . . . .

1-61

Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance 1-62

Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the

MOSS for Maintenance

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-65

Disabling Procedure 0140: Preparing a TRSS for Maintenance

. . . . . .

1-66

Disabling Procedure 0150: Preparing LIC Type 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 for

Maintenance

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-69

LIC/Line Address Table

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-73

3745 Control Panel Use

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-78

Purpose of the Control Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-78

Uses of the Control Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-78

Explanation of 3745 Panel Keys, LEDs, and Switches

. . . . . . . . . . . .

1-79

Power On Indicator

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-79

Control Panel Display Description

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-79

How to Perform 3745 Control Panel Operations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-82

Power On Reset

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-82

General IPL

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-82

MOSS IML

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-82

MOSS Dump

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-82

Request Local Console

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-83

Force Local Console

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-83

Panel Test and Console Link Tests

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-83

Load from Diskette

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-83

Loop on MOSS Diagnostics

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-83

Display Stacked Errors

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-83

Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1

IOC Bus MAPs

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1

MAP 0100: IOC Bus Trouble Shooting

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1

3745 MOSS MAPs

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-3

MAP 3200: MOSS Control Panel Code 001

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-3

MAP 3210: MOSS Control Panel Code 059

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-4

MAP 3220: Undefined Panel Message

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-5

MAP 3230: Console Link Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-6

3745 Line Adapter MAPs

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-7

iv

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

MAP 3500: Activate/Deactivate Line Problem or Line Errors on the TSS

. .

2-7

MAP 3520: Activate/Deactivate Ring Problems or Ring Errors on the TRSS 2-8

MAP 3530: Activate/Deactivate Line Problems or Line Errors on the

HPTSS/ESS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-9

3745 Channel MAPs

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-10

MAP 3700: CA Isolation Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-10

3745 Power MAPs

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-12

MAP 3900: Overcurrent on Power Supply 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-12

MAP 3905: Power ON Problem in Host Mode or Host Power Sequence

Problem

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-16

MAP 3910: Overcurrent on Power Supply 2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-18

Power MAP 3920: Air Flow Detector Fault

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-19

Power MAP 3925: Scheduled Power on Problems

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-20

Power MAP 3930: Power Control Subsystem Problems

. . . . . . . . . .

2-21

Power MAP 3935: Power OFF not Possible in Host Mode

. . . . . . . . .

2-25

Power MAP 3945: Power OFF not Possible in Local Mode

. . . . . . . .

2-26

Power MAP 3950: PCC-Detected Error on MOSS Reset

. . . . . . . . . .

2-27

Power MAP 3960: Power OFF not Possible in Network Mode

. . . . . . .

2-28

Power MAP 3970: PCC-Detected Error on CCU Reset or on Remote

Power OFF

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-30

3745 LAN MAP

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-31

MAP 4500: 3745 Models 17A Permanent Console Link Problem

. . . . .

2-31

3745 Control Panel Code

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-32

3745 RSF MAP

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-33

MAP 4510: 3745 Model 17A Manual Call

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-33

3745/3746-900/Service Processor MAPs

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-37

MAP 5200: 3745/3746-900/Service Processor/Network Node Processor

Icon Color Symptoms

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-37

MAP 5205: LAN Checking

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-41

Service Processor MAPs

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-42

MAP 5600: LAN Problem on the LAN Attached to the Service Processor 2-42

Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1

Diagnostic Description

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2

3745 Diagnostics

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2

Errors During Diagnostics

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2

Diagnostic Monitoring

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2

Checkout Diagnostics

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2

CBA Diagnostic

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-3

How to Run MOSS Diagnostics

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4

How to Loop MOSS Diagnostics

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-5

How to Run the Console Link Test for 3745 Models 130, 150, 160, and 170

.

3-6

Local/Remote or Alternate/RSF Link Tests

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-6

How to Run the Control Panel Test

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-8

How to Run Internal Function Tests

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-9

How to Run the LIC Wrap Test with IFTs

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-13

How to Run the Wrap Test (WTT) for TSS, HPTSS, or 3746-900

. . . . . . .

3-15

Wrap Test Initial Selection for TSS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-16

Wrap Test Initial Selection for HPTSS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-18

Wrap Test Initial Selection for 3746-900

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-19

Available Wrap Options

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-20

How to Run the Channel Wrap Test

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-25

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-1

Contents

v

Exchange Precautions

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-1

List of 3745 FRUs

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-2

FRU Physical Locations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-3

3745 Frame

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-3

Basic Board, Cards, Connectors, and Crossovers

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-5

MOSS Board, Cards, and Connectors

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-11

LIC Board Type 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-13

LIC Board Type 2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-13

LIC Board Type 3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-14

DMUX and SMUX Packaging

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-14

LIC Board Type 1 Packaging for LICs Type 1 to 4

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-15

LIC Board Type 2 Packaging for LIC Type 5

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-18

LIC Board Type 2 Packaging for LIC Type 6 (Low Speed)

. . . . . . . . .

4-19

LIC Board Type 2 Packaging for LIC Type 6 (High Speed)

. . . . . . . . .

4-20

LIC Board Type 3 Packaging for LIC Types 1 to 4

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-21

Ethernet Lines Tailgate

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-22

High Speed Lines Tailgate

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-23

Token-Ring Tailgate

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-24

Channel Tailgate

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-25

Console Operator Tailgate For 3745 Models 1X0

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-26

Console Operator Tailgate for 3745 Model 17A

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-26

EPO Tailgate

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-26

3745 Control Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-28

Flexible Diskette Drive

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-29

Hard Disk Drive

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-29

Primary Power Box

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-30

Power Supply 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-31

3745 Power Supply Cross Reference

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-31

Power Supply 2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-32

Fan 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-33

Fan 2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-33

3745 FRU Exchange Procedures

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-34

Card Exchange Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-34

DCREG Exchange Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-38

DMUX Exchange Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-39

SMUXA/B Exchange Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-41

LIC Exchange Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-44

Control Panel Exchange Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-46

Battery Exchange Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-48

Fan 1 Exchange Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-50

Fan 2 Exchange Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-51

FDD Exchange Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-52

HDD Exchange Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-56

TERMC/TERMR Exchange Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-61

TERMD/TERMI Exchange Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-62

ESS Tailgate Exchange Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-64

PS1 Exchange Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-67

PS2 and Primary Power Box Exchange Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-69

EPO Exchange Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-73

Basic Board Exchange Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-77

LIC Board Type 1 and 3 Exchange Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-84

LIC Board Type 2 Exchange Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-88

MOSS Board Exchange Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-92

Channel Tailgate Exchange Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-96

vi

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange

. . . . . . . . . .

4-99

Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-99

CE Leaving Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-102

Appendix A. Maintenance Aids

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-1

Contacting Support

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-1

Control Program Maintenance Aids

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-1

MOSS Microcode Maintenance Aids

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-2

Scanner Microcode Maintenance Aids

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-2

Special Tools

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-3

General Purpose Tools

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-3

ESD Kit

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-3

Shipping Group Tools

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-4

PKD (Portable Keypad Display) Maintenance Aids for LIC 5 and 6

. . . . . .

A-5

Appendix B. 3745 Bibliography

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-1

Service Personnel Definitions

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-1

Customer Documentation for the 3745 (Models 130, 150, 160, 170, and 17A) and 3746 (Model 900)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-2

Service Documentation for the 3745 (Models 130, 150, 160, 170, and 17A) and 3746 (Model 900)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-6

Related Signal Converter Product Information

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-9

Related NCP Service Information

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-10

World Wide Web

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-10

List of Abbreviations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X-1

Glossary

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X-7

Contents

vii

viii

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Figures

0-1.

3745/3746-900 Power Control Cable Routing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xx

0-2.

Ground Wire Connection on Controller Expansion

. . . . . . . . . . .

xxi

0-3.

Ground Wire Connection Between Attached Controller Expansions

.

xxii

0-4.

Ground Wire Connection Between Controller Expansions at Less than Six Meters

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xxiii

0-5.

Ground Wire Connection Between Controller Expansions at More than Six Meters

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xxiv

0-6.

Ground Pin on Mainline ac/dc Power Cable

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xxv

0-7.

Ground Pin of the Controller Expansion ac Outlet Distribution Box

. .

xxv

0-8.

LCB Grounding Via Screws

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xxvi

0-9.

LCB Grounding Via Ground Wire

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xxvi

0-10.

Ground Wire Connection

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xxvii

0-11.

Führung des Stromversorgungskabels bei der 3745/3746-900

. . .

xxxiii

0-12.

Schutzleiteranschluß an der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit

. . . . .

xxxiv

0-13.

Schutzleiteranschluß zwischen angeschlossenen Erweiterungen der

Steuereinheit.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xxxv

0-14.

Schutzleiteranschluß bei einem Abstand von weniger als 6 Meter zwischen den Erweiterungen der Steuereinheit

. . . . . . . . . . . .

xxxvi

0-15.

Schutzleiteranschluß bei einem Abstand über 6 Meter zwischen den

Erweiterungen der Steuereinheit

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xxxvii

0-16.

Schutzleiterkontakt am Hauptstromversorgungskabel

. . . . . . . .

xxxviii

0-17.

Schutzleiterkontakt des Wechselstromverteilerkastens der

Erweiterung der Steuereinheit

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xxxviii

0-18.

Erdung des Verteilerkastens über Schrauben

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

xxxix

0-19.

Erdung des Verteilerkastens über Schutzleiter

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

xxxix

0-20.

Schutzleiteranschluß

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xl

0-21.

3745 Label and Power Rating Plate Locations (Back)

. . . . . . . . .

lvii

0-22.

3745 Label and Power Rating Plate Locations (Front)

. . . . . . . . .

lviii

0-23.

3746 Model 900 (Frame 07) Label Locations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lix

0-24.

LCB Safety Label Location

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lix

0-25.

3745/3746-900 Safety Labels

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lx

0-26.

3745/3746-900 Safety Labels

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lxi

0-27.

LCB Safety Label (PN 80G3928)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lxii

0-28.

Controller Expansion Power Rating Plate Location

. . . . . . . . . . .

lxii

1-1.

Reference Code Screen

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-14

1-2.

TSS Service Screen

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-63

1-3.

Select/Release Screen

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-63

1-4.

Mode Control Screen

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-64

1-5.

TSS/HPTSS/ESS Diagnostic Selection Screen

. . . . . . . . . . . .

1-64

1-6.

TRSS Service Screen

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-67

1-7.

Select Screen

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-67

1-8.

Connect/Disconnect Screen

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-68

1-9.

TRSS Diagnostic Selection Screen

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-68

1-10.

TSS/HPTSS Diagnostic Selection Screen

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-72

1-11.

TSS Service Screen

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-74

1-12.

Select/Release Screen

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-74

1-13.

Mode Control Screen

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-75

1-14.

LIC Types 1 and 4 Wrap Plug (PN 65X8927)

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-75

1-15.

LIC Type 3 Wrap Cable (PN 65X8928)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-75

1-16.

LIC Types 5 and 6 Wrap Plug (PN 11F4815)

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-76

Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997

ix

1-17.

LIC Types 1, 3, and 4

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-76

1-18.

LIC Types 5 and 6

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-77

1-19.

3745 Control Panel Layout

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-80

2-1.

Console Outputs

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-6

2-2.

EPO Location 01S

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-16

2-3.

UEPO Switch

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-21

2-4.

EPO Location 01S

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-25

2-5.

LAN Attached to the Service Processor

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-42

3-1.

CBA Diagnostic Coverage

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-3

3-2.

Console Output

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-6

3-3.

Cable Configurations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-7

3-4.

Maintenance Functions Menu

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-9

3-5.

How to Select Diagnostics

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-10

3-6.

How to Enter Options

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-11

3-7.

Error Menu

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-12

3-8.

LICs Type 1 and 4 (Wrap Plug PN 65X8927)

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-23

3-9.

LIC Type 3 (Wrap Cable PN 65X8928)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-23

3-10.

LIC Types 1, 3, and 4

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-23

3-11.

LICs Type 5 and 6 (Wrap Plug PN 11F4815)

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-24

3-12.

LIC Types 5 and 6

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-24

4-1.

3745 Frame (Front)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-3

4-2.

3745 Frame (Back)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-4

4-3.

Card Locations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-5

4-4.

3745 Model 17X Basic Board (without TPS, HPTSS, or ESS)

. . . . .

4-6

4-5.

3745 Model 17X (Basic Board with TPS and HPTSS or ESS)

. . . .

4-7

4-6.

3745 Model 130 (Basic Board with TPS)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-8

4-7.

3745 Model 150 (Basic Board)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-9

4-8.

3745 Model 160 (Basic Board)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-10

4-9.

3745 Models 130, 150, 160, and 170 (MOSS Board, Cards, and

Connectors)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-11

4-10.

3745 Model 17A (MOSS Board, Cards, and Connectors)

. . . . . .

4-12

4-11.

3745 LIC Unit Type 1 Board and Connectors (for LIC Types 1,3, and

4 in Models 150, 160, and 170)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-13

4-12.

3745 LIC Unit Type 2 Board and Connectors (for LIC Types 5 and 6 in Models 150 and 170)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-13

4-13.

3745 LIC Unit Type 3 Board and Connectors (for LIC Types 1,3, and

4 in Model 150)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-14

4-14.

3745 LIC Board 01M-A2 Packaging

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-15

4-15.

3745 LIC Board 01M-A1 Packaging

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-16

4-16.

3745 LIC Board 01L-A2 Packaging

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-17

4-17.

3745 LIC Board 01L-A2 Packaging (LICs Type 5)

. . . . . . . . . .

4-18

4-18.

3745 LIC Board 01L-A1 Packaging (LIC type 5)

. . . . . . . . . . . .

4-18

4-19.

3745 LIC Board 01L-A2 Packaging (LICs Type 6 Low Speed)

. . .

4-19

4-20.

3745 LIC Board 01L-A1 Packaging (LICs Type 6 Low Speed)

. . .

4-19

4-21.

3745 LIC Board 01L-A2 Packaging (LIC Type 6 High Speed)

. . . .

4-20

4-22.

3745 LIC Board 01L-A1 Packaging (LIC Type 6 High Speed)

. . . .

4-20

4-23.

3745 LIC Board 01M-A2 Packaging

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-21

4-24.

3745 Ethernet Lines Tailgate

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-22

4-25.

3745 High-Speed Lines Tailgate

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-23

4-26.

3745 Token-Ring Tailgate

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-24

4-27.

3745 Channel Tailgate

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-25

4-28.

3745 Channel Tailgate Details. For more details see YZ052 Sheet

2.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-25

4-29.

3745 Models 1X0 Console Operator Tailgate

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-26

x

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

4-30.

3745 Models 17A Console Operator Tailgate

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-26

4-31.

3745 EPO

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-27

4-32.

3745 Control Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-28

4-33.

3745 Flexible Diskette Drive

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-29

4-34.

3745 Hard Disk Drive

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-29

4-35.

3745 Primary Power Box Components

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-30

4-36.

3745 Power Supply 1 Components

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-31

4-37.

3745 Power Supply 2 Components

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-32

4-38.

3745 Fan 1 Components

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-33

4-39.

3745 Fan 2 Components

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-33

4-40.

CB1 Location.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-34

4-41.

Covers

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-35

4-42.

Shipping Springs

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-35

4-43.

Channel Tailgate Location

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-36

4-44.

Select Out Switch

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-36

4-45.

Basic Board and CB1 Locations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-38

4-46.

Location of the LIC Boards

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-39

4-47.

DMUX Cover

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-39

4-48.

DMUX Location

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-40

4-49.

DMUX

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-40

4-50.

Location of the LIC Boards Type 2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-41

4-51.

SMUX Cover

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-41

4-52.

SMUX Location

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-42

4-53.

SMUX Link and Cable

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-42

4-54.

Location of the LIC Boards

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-44

4-55.

LIC 6

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-44

4-56.

LIC Board Type 1 and 2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-45

4-57.

LIC Board Type 3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-45

4-58.

Panel, MOSS, and CB1 Locations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-46

4-59.

MOSS Right Cover

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-46

4-60.

Panel Cable Location on MOSS Board

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-47

4-61.

Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-47

4-62.

Panel Location

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-48

4-63.

Battery Location

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-48

4-64.

Power Services Screen

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-49

4-65.

Acknowledge Screen

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-49

4-66.

Fan 1 and CB1 Locations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-50

4-67.

Fan 1 Air Flow Detector and Power Cables

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-50

4-68.

Fan 2 and CB1 Locations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-51

4-69.

Fan 2 Air Flow Detector and Power Cables

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-51

4-70.

FDD and CB1 Location

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-52

4-71.

PS1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-53

4-72.

MOSS Covers

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-54

4-73.

FDD Removal

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-54

4-74.

FDD Connectors

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-55

4-75.

HDD and CB1 Locations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-56

4-76.

HDD Removal

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-57

4-77.

New Type of HDD

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-58

4-78.

HDD Installation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-58

4-79.

HDD Connectors and Jumpers

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-60

4-80.

HDD Connectors and Jumpers

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-60

4-81.

Basic Board and CB1 Locations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-61

4-82.

CB1 Location

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-62

4-83.

Basic Board Grid

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-62

Figures

xi

4-84.

Terminator Card Locations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-62

4-85.

CB1 Location

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-64

4-86.

ESS Tailgate Location

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-64

4-87.

ESS Tailgate and Basic board

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-65

4-88.

ESS Cables

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-65

4-89.

EAC Card

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-65

4-90.

Power Supply 1 (PS1) and CB1 Locations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-67

4-91.

Power Supply 1 (PS1) Cover

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-67

4-92.

Primary Power Box

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-68

4-93.

Power Supply 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-68

4-94.

Primary Power Box, Power Supply 2, and CB1 Locations

. . . . . .

4-69

4-95.

Cable Locations on Primary Power Box

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-70

4-96.

PS2 in Primary Power Box

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-70

4-97.

PS2 and Primary Power Box Assembly

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-71

4-98.

Primary Power Box and CB1 Locations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-73

4-99.

EPO Location

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-73

4-100.

Cables on Primary Power Box

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-74

4-101.

Primary Power Box and PS2 Cover Removal

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-74

4-102.

EPO Assembly

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-75

4-103.

Basic Board, MOSS Board, and CB1 Locations

. . . . . . . . . . . .

4-77

4-104.

Basic Board and MOSS Covers

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-78

4-105.

Basic Board Grid

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-78

4-106.

FDS and Multivoltage Cable Locations on the PS1

. . . . . . . . . .

4-78

4-107.

Fan2 Air Flow Detector and Power Connectors

. . . . . . . . . . . .

4-79

4-108.

MOSS to Basic Cable Locations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-79

4-109.

Basic Board Enclosure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-79

4-110.

Basic Board Cables

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-80

4-111.

Basic Assembly 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-81

4-112.

Basic Assembly 2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-82

4-113.

Y and Z Rows

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-83

4-114.

CB1 Location

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-84

4-115.

LIC Board Type 1 Locations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-84

4-116.

DMUX Cover

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-85

4-117.

LIC Locations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-86

4-118.

LIC Board Assembly

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-87

4-119.

CB1 Location

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-88

4-120.

SMUX Cover

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-88

4-121.

LIC Board Type 2 Locations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-89

4-122.

SMUX Link and Cable

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-89

4-123.

LIC Locations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-90

4-124.

LIC Board Assembly

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-90

4-125.

MOSS Board and CB1 Locations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-92

4-126.

MOSS Board Covers

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-92

4-127.

MOSS Board Cards and Cables

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-93

4-128.

MOSS Board Enclosure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-94

4-129.

CB1 Location

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-96

4-130.

Select Out Switch

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-96

4-131.

Channel Tailgate and Basic Board Grid

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-97

4-132.

Channel Tailgate, Cables, and Basic Board

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-97

xii

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Tables

0-1.

Part Numbers

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xxviii

0-2.

ac Input Adjustment

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xxviii

0-3.

LED Status Versus 3746-900 States

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xxx

0-4.

3745 Power Supply CP/CB and Fuse Reference

. . . . . . . . . . . .

xxx

0-5.

Teilenummern

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xli

0-6.

Einstellung der Spannung des Wechselstromeingangs

. . . . . . . . .

xli

0-7.

Bedeutung der LEDs am Bedienungsfeld der 3746-900

. . . . . . . .

xlii

0-8.

Stromversorgung der 3745, Sicherungsautomaten (CB),

Überstromschutzschalter (CP) und Sicherungen (F)

. . . . . . . . . .

xliii

0-9.

Safety Label Numbers by Country

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lxiii

1-1.

General Symptoms

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-8

1-2.

3745 Console Symptoms

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-10

1-3.

Control Panel Symptoms

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-11

1-4.

Power Symptoms

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-12

1-5.

Panel Codes

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-15

1-6.

3745 FRU Table

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-49

1-7.

3745 Cable Location

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-52

1-8.

3745 Diagnostic Requirements

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-60

1-9.

Diagnostic Selection

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-65

1-10.

Panel Display Values

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-81

2-1.

Wrap plug PN

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-6

2-2.

3745 Control Panel Code

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-32

2-3.

Icons Color Selection Table

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-38

3-1.

Wrap Plugs for Testing ARC Assembly A and ARC Assembly B (with

Cable)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-22

3-2.

Wrap Plugs for LIC Testing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-22

3-3.

Wrap Plugs for Testing ARC Assembly B (without Cable)

. . . . . .

3-22

4-1.

TIC Position and Ring Address

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-5

4-2.

Basic Board Configurations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-6

4-3.

DMUX Packaging

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-14

4-4.

SMUX Packaging

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-14

4-5.

3745 Ethernet Line Locations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-22

4-6.

3745 High-Speed Line Locations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-23

4-7.

3745 Token-ring Line Locations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-24

4-8.

Channel Interface

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-25

4-9.

3745 Power Supply Cross Reference

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-31

4-10.

Select Out Switches According to CADR Cards

. . . . . . . . . . . .

4-36

4-11.

Voltage Test Points

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-53

B-1.

Customer Documentation for the 3745 Models 130 to 17A and 3746

Model 900

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-2

B-2.

Service Documentation for the 3745 Models 1x0 and 17A, and 3746

Model 900

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-6

Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997

xiii

xiv

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Notices

References in this publication to IBM products, programs, or services do not imply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM operates.

Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only IBM's product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any of IBM's intellectual property rights may be used instead of the IBM product, program, or service.

Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, except those expressly designated by IBM, is the user's responsibility.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to the IBM Director of

Licensing, IBM Corporation, 500 Columbus Avenue, Thornwood, New York 10594,

U.S.A.

European Union (EU) Statement

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. IBM can not accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification of the product, including the fitting of non-IBM option cards.

Electronic Emission Notices

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a

Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997

xv

Industry Canada Compliance Statement

This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations.

Avis de conformité aux normes d'Industrie Canada

Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.

Japanese Voluntary Control Council For Interference (VCCI) Statement

This equipment is in the 1st Class category (information equipment to be used in commercial and/or industrial areas) and conforms to the standards set by the Voluntary Control Council for Interference by Information Technology Equipment aimed at preventing radio interference in commercial and industrial areas.

Consequently, when used in a residential area or in an adjacent area thereto, radio interference may be caused to radios and TV receivers, and so on.

Read the instructions for correct handling.

Korean Communications Statement

Please note that this device has been approved for business purpose with regard to electromagnetic interference. If you find this is not suitable for your use, you may exchange it for a non-business one.

New Zealand Radiocommunications (Radio) Regulations

Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

Trademarks and Service Marks

The following terms, denoted by an asterisk (*), used in this publication, are trademarks or service marks of IBM Corporation in the United States or other countries:

ESCON

NetView

IBM

RETAIN

OS/2

The following terms, denoted by a double asterisk (**), used in this publication, are trademarks of other companies:

Hayes

Tektronix

Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.

Tektronix, Incorporated.

xvi

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Product Safety Information

General Safety

Safety

This product meets IBM safety standards.

For more information, see the following manual:

IBM 3745 Communication Controller All Models

IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Models 900 and 950

Safety Information, GA33-0400.

Service Inspection Safety Procedures

Service Inspection Safety Procedures for the 3745, 3746-900, and Controller Expansion -

English

Sicherheitsüberprüfungen für IBM 3745, 3746-900 und die Erweiterung der Steuereinheit -

Deutsch xviii xxxi xliii

Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997

xvii

Safety

Service Inspection Safety Procedures for the 3745, 3746-900, and

Controller Expansion

Important

This procedure addresses the 3745, 3746-900, and the controller expansion. If one of these machines is not present, ignore the statement concerning this machine in the following procedure.

Introduction

A safety inspection procedure for the 3745, 3746-900, and controller expansion should be performed:

Ÿ When it is inspected for an IBM agreement

Ÿ When IBM service is requested and no service has recently been performed by IBM

Ÿ When an alterations and attachments review is performed

Ÿ When changes have been made to the equipment that might affect its safety.

If the inspection indicates unacceptable safety conditions, the conditions must be corrected before IBM services the machine.

Note: The correction of any unsafe condition is the responsibility of the owner of the equipment.

The 3745, 3746-900, and controller expansion areas and functions checked through these procedures are:

1. External covers

2. Safety labels

3. Safety covers and shields

4. Grounding (earthing)

5. Circuit breaker and protector rating

6. Input power voltage

7. Power control switch

8. Power ON indicator.

Note: The 3746-900 is powered ON and OFF through the basic 3745 frame, from a host, locally, or from the service processor.

Hazardous voltages are still present in some areas of the 3745 and the 3746-900 when power is

OFF.

Steps 1 through 6 must be performed after power OFF as follows:

Ÿ CB1s are switched OFF on the 3745 and 3746-900.

Ÿ All equipment installed in the controller expansion (if present) is powered OFF.

Ÿ

Power supplies for the 3745, 3746-900, and controller expansion at customer's premises are switched OFF.

Do not remove the power cord and ground strap

.A/

of the controller expansion in order to maintain the ground protection (see Figure 0-2 on page xxi, Figure 0-3 on page xxii, Figure 0-4 on page xxiii, or Figure 0-5 on page xxiv).

1

External Covers

Check that:

Ÿ They are all present on the 3745, 3746-900, and controller expansion.

Ÿ They are locked with two kinds of locks: flat blade screw for the IBM access area and hex head for the customer access area (refer to the IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models 130 to

17A, Parts Catalog, S135-2012).

Ÿ They can be fully opened.

xviii

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Safety

Ÿ Appropriate service clearance and access are provided around the frames with external covers opened.

Leave all external covers opened to allow further safety inspection steps.

2

Safety Labels

Check that:

Ÿ

All the safety labels are at the places indicated by letters in “Safety Label Locations” on page lvii.

Ÿ Each label is of the model corresponding to the letter as shown in “3745/3746-900 Safety Label

Identifications” on page lx.

3

Safety Covers and Shields

Referring to the FRU location (Chapter 4), check that:

Ÿ

All the safety covers are present and secured with screws.

Ÿ

All the voltage terminal boards (TBs) are protected by a plastic shield screwed on top of the TB.

4

Grounding (Earthing)

Note

In this book, "ground" means that the equipment must be connected to the earth.

a

Grounding on the 3745

Refer to YZ110 for grounding jumper/contact locations.

.

Check that:

Ÿ

Electrical continuity is assured between the frame ground and the terminals indicated on the ground distribution diagrams.

Ÿ Electrical continuity is assured between the 3745, frame grounds, and to the premises grounding system, through the 3745 power cord.

b

Grounding on the 3746-900 and Controller Expansion to the Premises Grounding

System

Ÿ Electrical continuity is assured between their frame ground and premises grounding system through their power cords.

Ÿ The 3746-900 is grounded to the 3745 via the power control cable (see Figure 0-1 on page xx).

Ÿ For the controller expansion, an additional ground wire

.A/

is also used (see Figure 0-2 on page xxi, Figure 0-3 on page xxii, Figure 0-4 on page xxiii, or Figure 0-5 on page xxiv).

1

3745/3746-900 Power Control Cable

Check that the power ground cable is correctly connected in the 3745

.D/

and in the

3746-900

.C/

.

Safety

xix

Safety

Figure 0-1. 3745/3746-900 Power Control Cable Routing

Notes:

a)

.D/

Lock washer (PN 17G5853) and nut (PN 1622404).

b)

.C/

Screw (PN 61F4511), star washer (PN 17G5852), and lock washer

(PN 1622318).

2

Controller Expansion Ground Wire Cable

Ÿ If you have only one controller expansion installed, check that the ground wire

.A/

is installed (see Figure 0-2 on page xxi).

Ÿ If you have several controller expansions installed, check that the ground wires

.A/ are installed according to your configuration (see Figure 0-3 on page xxii,

Figure 0-4 on page xxiii, or Figure 0-5 on page xxiv).

xx

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Safety

Figure 0-2. Ground Wire Connection on Controller Expansion

Safety

xxi

Safety

Controller

Expansion

Detail

B

Screw M5

Lock Washer

Star Washer

A

B

B

B

A

A

To Permanent Connection of Building Ground

(Protective Earthing)

Figure 0-3. Ground Wire Connection Between Attached Controller Expansions

xxii

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Safety

Figure 0-4. Ground Wire Connection Between Controller Expansions at Less than Six Meters

Safety

xxiii

Safety

Figure 0-5. Ground Wire Connection Between Controller Expansions at More than Six Meters

Notes:

a)

.A/

Ground wire (PN 58G5691) b)

.B/

Screw (PN 61F4513), star washer (PN 1622347) or (PN 17G5853), and lock washer (PN 1622319).

3

ac/dc Power Cable Ground Wire

Ÿ Check the mainline ac/dc power cable for damaged or burned pins and broken insulation.

Ÿ Measure the resistance of the disconnected mainline ac/dc power cable from ground pin on one end to the ground pin on the other end.

The measurement should be 0.1 ohm or less.

xxiv

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Safety

Ground Pin

Figure 0-6. Ground Pin on Mainline ac/dc Power Cable

c

Internal Grounding in the 3746-900 and Controller Expansion

On the 3746-900

Ÿ Check that electrical continuity is assured between the LCB housing and 3746-900 frame, if LCBs are present. This operation must be performed before any network connection.

On the Controller Expansion

Ÿ Check that electrical continuity is assured between each machine installed in the controller expansion (service processor, network node processor, modem, optical disk drive, and so on) and the ground pin of the ac outlet distribution box (see Figure 0-7).

Ÿ Check that electrical continuity is assured between the ground pin of the ac outlet distribution box and the controller expansion mount frame.

Ground Pin

Figure 0-7. Ground Pin of the Controller Expansion ac Outlet Distribution Box

Ÿ Check that electrical continuity is assured between the LCB housing and the controller expansion frame, if LCBs are present. This operation must be performed before any network connection (see Figure 0-8 on page xxvi).

Note: All the previous measurements should indicate 0.1 ohm or less.

d

Grounding of Line Connection Boxes (LCBs) not Installed in the 3746-900 or Controller

Expansion

Check that electrical continuity is assured between the LCB housing and the premises grounding system.

There are two ways to ensure proper grounding of the LCB depending on where it is installed:

1) Grounding is ensured by the four screws which secure the LCB on the rack if the frame of the rack is connected to the premises ground system.

Safety

xxv

Safety

Screws for

Grounding

Front View

Figure 0-8. LCB Grounding Via Screws

2) Grounding is ensured by a wire connected from the LCB to the premises ground system.

Bottom View Ground

Wire

To Premises

Grounding

System

Figure 0-9. LCB Grounding Via Ground Wire

IBM does not provide this wire. In order to ensure correct grounding, this ground wire must be made using a wire AWG 12 (minimum 2.5 square millimeters).

Screw: 5 mm in diameter, length from 6 to 10 mm (refer to Figure 0-10 on page xxvii).

Connection of Ground Wire to LCB

xxvi

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Safety

Figure 0-10. Ground Wire Connection

This operation must be performed before any network connection.

Note: All the previous measurements should indicate 0.1 ohm or less.

e

Building Grounding

Ÿ

Check that there is less than 1 V ac between the metal housings of plugs, connectors, receptacles, and so on., and any grounded point in the building. This can be any grounded metal structure, such as the stanchions of a raised floor (if they are electrically connected to building ground), a metal water pipe, building steel, and so

on.

Notes:

1) When probing a painted metal part, ensure that the meter probe tip penetrates the paint.

2) Also check plugs of incoming cables.

5

Circuit Breaker and Protector Rating

Refer to Table 0-4 on page xxx for CB and CP locations.

Check that:

Ÿ All CBs and CPs in the 3745 and 3746-900 are rated at the indicated value in Table 0-4 on page xxx. If the rating is not indicated, check the part number against one of the following:

– IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models 130 to 17A, Parts Catalog, S135-2012

– IBM 3746 Expansion Unit Model 900, Parts Catalog, S135-2013

– IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Models 900 and 950, Parts Catalog, S135-2015.

Ÿ

The fuses in the controller expansion ac outlet distribution box must be 7 A, 250 V slow

(PN 58G5782).

6

Input Power Voltage

The power rating plate indicates the voltage range available (200/220/240) and the frequency

(50/60 Hz).

3745 Input Power voltage

The voltage label (label J) indicates the input voltage for which the 3745 is wired. This information must be in accordance with Switch 1 on PS2.

Performing a power conversion Inspection.

Ÿ A power conversion inspection must be performed on any 3745 Communication Controller that has been converted from 50 Hz to 60 Hz, or from 60 Hz to 50 Hz.

Ÿ The following is used only for the primary power box. Refer to Figure 4-1 on page 4-3 for location.

Ÿ

Check Table 0-1 on page xxviii for the correct part numbers for the specified 50 Hz or 60 Hz use. In case of discrepancy, contact your support structure.

Safety

xxvii

Safety

Table 0-1. Part Numbers

Frequencies

50 Hz

60 Hz

Part Numbers

PN 03F4745

PN 03F4569

Refer to Figure 0-21 on page lvii for voltage label and power rating plate location, and to page

YZ060, sheet 1 for the PS2 box voltage adjustment by SW1.

Check that:

Ÿ

The power rating plate and the voltage label of the 3745 are consistent with the frequency and the voltage measured at the customer's power supply. If they are inconsistent, inform your branch office.

3746-900 Input Power voltage

The power rating plate indicates the voltage range available (200/220/240) and the frequency

(50/60&rlb.Hz).

The 3746-900 voltage range is 200/220/240.

Check that:

Ÿ The power rating plate of the 3746-900 is consistent with the frequency and the voltage measured at the customer's power supply. If they are inconsistent inform your branch office. Refer to

“3745/3746-900 Safety Label Identifications” on page lx for the power rating plate location.

dc Input Voltage

For dc input, the customer's voltage must be within -40.0 V to -60.0 V. There is no adjustment for the optional dc input.

ac Input Voltage

For ac input, the customer's voltage must be within 180 V to 260 V.

Adjustment of the input voltage can be done according to the customer voltage on TB1 of the transformers located at the rear of the 3746-900.

Table 0-2. ac Input Adjustment

Voltage

Measured

From 180 to 210 Volts

From 210 to 230 Volts

From 230 to 260 Volts

Wire

Position

TB1-2

TB1-3

TB1-4

Nominal

Voltage

200/208 Volts

220 Volts

240 Volts

Important Note:

Since the 3745 can be remotely powered ON, all the following procedures must be performed with the power control function on the 3745 and the 3746-900 control panel set to local mode.

Controller Expansion Input Power Voltage

The power rating plate indicates the voltage range available (200/240) and the frequency (50/60 Hz).

Check that the power rating plate of the controller expansion is consistent with the frequency and the voltage measured at the customer's power supply. If they are inconsistent inform your branch office.

Refer to “Controller Expansion Label Location” on page lxii for power rating plate location.

7

Test of the Emergency Power OFF

xxviii

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Safety

a. Ask the customer to connect the power cord to the customer's mains supply.

b. Put CB1 ON.

c. Power ON the 3745 and the 3746-900 (power control function to Local on the control panel).

d. Operate the EMERGENCY switch to POWER OFF (O) and check that:

1) The 3745 and the 3746-900 are powered OFF.

Note

In the 3746-900, the primary powers (ACDC) or filters section (DCDC) stay energized.

For total disconnection:

1. Turn the CBs OFF.

2. Remove all the power plugs from supply outlets or shutdown the installation.

2) The diskette and disk drives are stopped.

3) All the fans are stopped.

e. Relatch the EMERGENCY switch, then power ON the controller.

8

Power ON Indicator

Once the controller is powered ON, check that: a. The Power ON indicator on the 3745 control panel is lit.

b. The Ready LED and the Standby LED (on the 3746-900 control panel) are lit according to the table shown in “Control Panel LED Status Versus 3746-900 States” on page xxx.

Safety

xxix

Safety

Control Panel LED Status Versus 3746-900 States

Table 0-3. LED Status Versus 3746-900 States

Standby

LED

Ready LED 3746-900

State

Blinking OFF AC ON

Comment

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

Blinking

ON

Standby

Power ON

Ready

Initialization of the CBSP hardware, and the 3746-900 waits for first recognition by the MOSS-E on LAN connection.

The 3746-900, initially recognized by the MOSS-E, waits for a power ON condition (only the CBSP EEPROM code is running).

IML loading in all 3746-900 processors.

The 3746-900 is now available.

3745/3746-900 Power Supply CP/CB and Fuse Reference

Table 0-4. 3745 Power Supply CP/CB and Fuse Reference

Frame CB/CP/F Location

Frame 1 CB1 01H-A1

CP2

CP3

F1

01H-A1

01H-B1

01H-B1

Frame 7:

3746-900

CB1 AC

CB1 DC

CP1

CP2

CP3

CP4

CP5

07K-A1/07J-A1

07J-A1

07K-A1/07J-A1

07H-A1

07H-A1

07H-A1

07H-A1

Rating

10 A

1,5 A

2 A

0.2 A

15 A/220 V

50 A

5 A

12 A

12 A

12 A

12 A

PS

ALL

PS2

Fans

PS2

ac Power

dc Power

dc Power

dc Power

dc Power

dc Power

dc Power

Controller Expansion Fuse Reference

The ac outlet distribution box of the controller expansion contains two fuses: 7 A 250 V slow.

xxx

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Safety

Sicherheitsüberprüfungen für IBM 3745, 3746-900 und die Erweiterung der Steuereinheit

Wichtige Informationen

Dieses Verfahren bezieht sich auf IBM 3745, 3746-900 und die Erweiterung der Steuereinheit. Sollte eine dieser Maschinen nicht vorhanden sein, die diesbezügliche Anweisung im folgenden Verfahren ignorieren.

Einführung

Sicherheitsprüfungen für 3745, 3746-900 und die Erweiterung der Steuereinheit sind in folgenden

Fällen erforderlich:

Ÿ Bei einer Prüfung nach Absprache mit IBM

Ÿ Wenn eine IBM Wartungsleistung angefordert wird und in der letzten Zeit keine Wartung durch IBM durchgeführt worden war.

Ÿ Wenn Änderungen am Gerät oder Anschlüsse überprüft werden.

Ÿ Wenn Änderungen am Gerät vorgenommen worden sind, die möglicherweise die Sicherheit beeinträchtigen.

Wenn bei der Überprüfung ein unzureichender Sicherheitszustand festgestellt wird, müssen die Mängel behoben werden, bevor IBM das Gerät wartet.

Anmerkung: Für die Behebung von Sicherheitsmängeln ist der Besitzer des Geräts verantwortlich.

Folgende Bereiche und Funktionen der 3745, 3746-900 und der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit werden geprüft:

1. Äußere Abdeckungen

2. Sicherheitsaufkleber

3. Sicherheitsabdeckungen

4. Erdung

5. Sicherungsautomat und Überstromschutzschalter

6. Netzeingangsspannung

7. Netzkontrollschalter

8. Betriebsanzeige

Anmerkung: Die IBM 3746-900 wird über den Grundrahmen der IBM 3745, von einem Host, lokal oder vom Serviceprozessor aus ein- und ausgeschaltet.

Auch nach dem Ausschalten liegt in einigen Bereichen der 3745 und 3746-900 eine gefährliche

Spannung an.

Vor der Ausführung der Schritte 1-6 muß die Stromzufuhr wie folgt unterbrochen werden:

Ÿ Die Sicherungsautomaten (CB1) der 3745 und 3746-900 ausschalten (Stellung: OFF).

Ÿ Alle Geräte in der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit (wenn vorhanden) ausschalten.

Ÿ

Stromversorgungen der 3745, 3746-900 und der controller expansion beim Kunden ausschalten

Netzkabel und Schutzleiter

.A/

der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit nicht entfernen, damit die Erdung gewährleistet ist (siehe Figure 0-12 on page xxxiv, Figure 0-13 on page xxxv, Figure 0-14 on page xxxvi bzw. Figure 0-15 on page xxxvii).

1

Äußere Abdeckungen

Prüfen, ob

Safety

xxxi

Safety

Ÿ alle äußeren Abdeckungen an der 3745, 3746-900 und an der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit angebracht sind.

Ÿ die äußeren Abdeckungen auf zwei Arten verschlossen sind: mit Schlitzschrauben im IBM

Zugriffsbereich und mit Sechskantschrauben im Zugriffsbereich des Kunden (siehe IBM 3745

Communication Controller Models 130 to 17A, Parts Catalog, S135-2012).

Ÿ die Abdeckungen vollständig geöffnet werden können.

Ÿ um die Rahmen genügend Raum und Zugänge für Wartungsarbeiten sind, wenn die äußeren

Abdeckungen geöffnet sind.

Alle äußeren Abdeckungen für weitere Überprüfungen offen lassen.

2

Sicherheitsaufkleber

Prüfen, ob

Ÿ sich alle Sicherheitsaufkleber an den mit Buchstaben gekennzeichneten Stellen befinden, wie unter “Safety Label Locations” on page lvii beschrieben.

Ÿ die Aufkleber dem jeweiligen Buchstaben gemäß “3745/3746-900 Safety Label Identifications” on page lx entsprechen.

3

Sicherheitsabdeckungen

Bezüglich des Standorts der durch den Kundendienst austauschbaren Funktionseinheit (Kapitel 4) prüfen, ob

Ÿ alle Sicherheitsabdeckungen vorhanden und mit Schrauben gesichert sind.

Ÿ alle Spannungsklemmleisten durch eine Plastikabdeckung an der Oberseite der Klemmleiste geschützt sind.

4

Erdung

Hinweis

Im vorliegenden Handbuch bedeutet "erden", daß das Gerät mit der Schutzerdung verbunden werden muß.

a

Erdung der 3745

Positionen der Erdungsbrücken/Kontakte siehe YZ110.

.

Prüfen, ob

Ÿ

der elektrische Durchgang zwischen der Rahmenerdung und den Anschlüssen, die

auf den Schemazeichnungen für Erdung eingezeichnet sind, sichergestellt ist .

Ÿ der elektrische Durchgang zwischen 3745, den Rahmenerdungen und dem Erdungssystem des Gebäudes durch das Netzkabel der 3745 sichergestellt wird.

b

Schutzleiterverbindung der 3746-900 und der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit an das

Erdungssystem des Gebäudes

Ÿ Der elektrische Durchgang zwischen der Rahmenerdung und dem Erdungssystem des

Gebäudes wird über die Netzkabel sichergestellt.

Ÿ Die 3746-900 wird über das Stromversorgungskabel an der 3745 geerdet (siehe

Figure 0-11 on page xxxiii).

Ÿ Bei der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit wird zusätzlich ein Schutzleiter

.A/

verwendet (siehe

Figure 0-12 on page xxxiv, Figure 0-13 on page xxxv, Figure 0-14 on page xxxvi bzw.

Figure 0-15 on page xxxvii).

1

Stromversorgungskabel für 3745/3746-900

Prüfen, ob der Schutzleiter des Stromversorgungskabels ordnungsgemäß an die 3745

(

.D/

) und die 3746-900 (

.C/

) angeschlossen ist.

xxxii

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Safety

D

3746

3745

Hinteransicht

3745

C

Vorderansicht

3746

Figure 0-11. Führung des Stromversorgungskabels bei der 3745/3746-900

Anmerkungen:

a)

.D/

Sicherungsring (Teilenummer 17G5853) und Mutter (Teilenummer 1622404).

b)

.C/

Schraube (Teilenummer 61F4511), Zahnscheibe (Teilenummer 17G5852) und

Sicherungsring (Teilenummer 1622318)

2

Schutzleiter für die Erweiterung der Steuereinheit

Ÿ Wenn nur eine Erweiterung der Steuereinheit installiert ist, prüfen, ob der

Schutzleiter

.A/

angeschlossen ist (siehe Figure 0-12 on page xxxiv).

Ÿ Wenn mehrere Erweiterungen der Steuereinheit installiert sind, prüfen, ob die

Schutzleiter

.A/

gemäß Konfiguration angebracht wurden (siehe Figure 0-13 on page xxxv, Figure 0-14 on page xxxvi bzw. Figure 0-15 on page xxxvii).

Safety

xxxiii

Safety

Figure 0-12. Schutzleiteranschluß an der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit

xxxiv

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Safety

Figure 0-13. Schutzleiteranschluß zwischen angeschlossenen Erweiterungen der Steuereinheit.

Safety

xxxv

Safety

Figure 0-14. Schutzleiteranschluß bei einem Abstand von weniger als 6 Meter zwischen den Erweiterungen der

Steuereinheit

xxxvi

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Safety

Figure 0-15. Schutzleiteranschluß bei einem Abstand über 6 Meter zwischen den Erweiterungen der Steuereinheit

Anmerkungen:

a)

.A/

Schutzleiter (Teilenummer 58G5691) b)

.B/

Schraube (Teilenummer 61F4513), Zahnscheibe (Teilenummer 1622347) oder

(Teilenummer 17G5853) und Sicherungsring (Teilenummer 1622319).

3

Schutzleiter des AC/DC Stromversorgungskabels

Ÿ Hauptstromversorgungskabel auf beschädigte oder verbrannte Kontakte und beschädigte Isolierung prüfen.

Ÿ Den Widerstand des nicht angeschlossenen Hauptstromversorgungskabels zwischen dem Schutzleiterkontakt am einen und dem Schutzleiterkontakt am anderen Ende messen.

Der Widerstand darf maximal 0,1 Ohm betragen.

Safety

xxxvii

Safety

Figure 0-16. Schutzleiterkontakt am Hauptstromversorgungskabel

c

Interne Erdung in der 3746-900 und der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit

An der 3746-900

Ÿ

Prüfen, ob der elektrische Durchgang zwischen dem Gehäuse des Verteilerkastens und dem Rahmen der 3746-900 gewährleistet ist, sofern Verteilerkästen vorhanden sind.

Dieser Schritt muß vor dem Anschluß von Signalkabeln erfolgen.

An der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit

Ÿ Prüfen, ob der elektrische Durchgang zwischen allen in der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit installierten Einheiten (Serviceprozessor, Netzknotenprozessor, Modem, optisches

Plattenlaufwerk usw.) und dem Schutzleiterkontakt des Wechselstromverteilerkastens gewährleistet ist (siehe Figure 0-17).

Ÿ Prüfen, ob der elektrische Durchgang zwischen dem Schutzleiterkontakt des

Wechselstromverteilerkastens und dem Montagerahmen der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit gewährleistet ist.

Figure 0-17. Schutzleiterkontakt des Wechselstromverteilerkastens der Erweiterung der

Steuereinheit

Ÿ Prüfen, ob der elektrische Durchgang zwischen dem Gehäuse des Verteilerkastens und dem Rahmen der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit gewährleistet ist, sofern Verteilerkästen vorhanden sind. Dieser Schritt muß vor dem Anschluß von Signalkabeln erfolgen (siehe

Figure 0-18 on page xxxix).

Anmerkung: Bei allen vorherigen Prüfungen sollten maximal 0,1 Ohm gemessen werden.

d

Erdung der nicht in der 3746-900 oder in der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit installierten

Verteilerkästen

Prüfen, ob der elektrische Durchgang zwischen dem Gehäuse des Verteilerkastens und dem

Erdungssystem des Gebäudes gewährleistet ist.

Je nach Installationsort kann der Verteilerkasten auf zweierlei Arten geerdet werden:

1) Erdung über die vier Schrauben, mit denen der Verteilerkasten am Gehäuse befestigt ist, falls der Gehäuserahmen mit dem Erdungssystem des Gebäudes verbunden ist.

xxxviii

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Safety

Figure 0-18. Erdung des Verteilerkastens über Schrauben

2) Erdung über einen Schutzleiter, der den Verteilerkasten mit dem Erdungssystem des

Gebäudes verbindet.

Figure 0-19. Erdung des Verteilerkastens über Schutzleiter

IBM liefert diesen Schutzleiter nicht mit. Der Schutzleiter muß aus einem

AWG12-Leiter (mind. 2,5 mm2) bestehen, damit eine korrekte Erdung gewährleistet ist.

Schraube: Durchmesser 5 mm, Länge 6 bis 10 mm (siehe Figure 0-20 on page xl).

Verbindung des Schutzleiters mit dem Verteilerkasten

Safety

xxxix

Safety

Figure 0-20. Schutzleiteranschluß

Dieser Schritt muß vor dem Anschluß von Signalkabeln erfolgen.

Anmerkung: Bei allen vorherigen Prüfungen sollten maximal 0,1 Ohm gemessen werden.

e

Gebäudeerdung

Ÿ

Sicherstellen, daß zwischen den Metallgehäusen von Steckern, Buchsen usw. und jeder geerdeten Stelle im Gebäude eine Wechselspannung von weniger als 1 V anliegt. Dies kann jedes geerdete Metallteil sein, wie z.B. die Stützen eines

Doppelbodens (wenn sie mit dem Gebäudeerder verbunden sind), ein metallisches

Wasserrohr, Baustahl usw..

Anmerkungen:

1) Beim Prüfen an einem lackierten Metallteil sicherstellen, daß die Prüfspitze die Farbe durchbohrt.

2) Stecker der anzuschließenden Kabel ebenfalls prüfen.

5

Sicherungsautomat und Überstromschutzschalter

Positionen der Sicherungsautomaten (CB) und Überstromschutzschalter (CP) siehe Table 0-8 on page xliii.

Prüfen, ob

Ÿ alle Sicherungsautomaten und Überstromschutzschalter in der 3745 und 3746-900 die unter

Table 0-8 on page xliii angegebene Leistung haben. Wenn die Leistung nicht aufgeführt ist, die

Teilenummer in einem der folgenden Kataloge prüfen:

– IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models 130 to 17A, Parts Catalog, S135-2012

– IBM 3746 Expansion Unit Model 900, Parts Catalog, S135-2013

– IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Models 900 and 950, Parts Catalog, S135-2015.

Ÿ Bei den Sicherungen im Wechselstromverteilerkasten der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit muß es sich um träge Sicherungen mit 7 A, 250 V handeln (Teilenummer 58G5782).

6

Eingangsspannung

Der zulässige Spannungsbereich (200/220/240V) und die Frequenz (50/60 Hz) sind dem

Typenschild zu entnehmen.

Eingangsspannung an der 3745

Der Aufkleber für die Versorgungsspannungen (Aufkleber J) gibt die Eingangsspannung für die 3745 an. Die Angaben müssen Schalter 1 an PS2 entsprechen.

Stromumwandlung prüfen

Ÿ Die Stromumwandlung muß bei jeder DFV-Steuereinheit IBM 3745 geprüft werden, die von 50

Hz auf 60 Hz oder von 60 Hz auf 50 Hz umgerichtet wurde.

Ÿ Folgendes bezieht sich ausschließlich auf das Netzspannungsgehäuse. Die Position kann

Figure 4-1 on page 4-3 entnommen werden.

Ÿ Die entsprechenden Teilenummern für die Verwendung bei 50 oder 60 Hz sind Table 0-5 on page xli zu entnehmen. Bei Unstimmigkeiten das KD-Unterstützungspersonal benachrichtigen.

xl

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Safety

Table 0-5. Teilenummern

Frequenzen

50 Hz

60 Hz

Teilenummern

03F4745

03F4569

Die Positionen des Auflebers für die Versorungsspannungen und des Typenschildes sind

Figure 0-21 on page lvii zu entnehmen. Informationen zur Spannung?? im Netzteil PS-2 durch

SW1 siehe Seite YZ060, Blatt 1.

Prüfen, ob

Ÿ die Angaben auf dem Typenschild und dem Spannungsaufkleber der 3745 mit der an der

Netzstromversorgung des Kunden gemessenen Frequenz und Spannung übereinstimmen.

Wenn dies nicht der Fall ist, zuständige Geschäftsstelle informieren.

Eingangsspannung an der 3746-900

Der zulässige Spannungsbereich (200/220/240V) und die Frequenz (50/60 Hz) sind dem

Typenschild zu entnehmen.

Der Spannungsbereich für die 3746-900 liegt bei 200/220/240V.

Prüfen, ob

Ÿ die Angaben auf dem Typenschild an der 3746-900 mit der am Netzteil des Kunden gemessenen Spannung und Frequenz übereinstimmen. Wenn dies nicht der Fall ist, zuständige

Geschäftsstelle informieren. Die Position des Typenschildes ist “3745/3746-900 Safety Label

Identifications” on page lx zu entnehmen.

Spannung am Gleichstromeingang

Am Gleichstromeingang muß die Spannung beim Kunden zwischen -40,0 V und -60,0 V liegen.

Der optionale Gleichstromeingang kann nicht eingestellt werden.

Spannung am Wechselstromeingang

Am Wechselstromeingang muß die Spannung beim Kunden zwischen 180 V und 260 V liegen.

Die Einstellung der Eingangsspannung gemäß der Spannung beim Kunden kann an der

Klemmleiste 1 der Transformatoren an der Rückseite der 3746-900 erfolgen.

Table 0-6. Einstellung der Spannung des Wechselstromeingangs

Gemessene

Spannung

Position des

Leiters

180 bis 210 Volt

Klemmleiste TB 1-2

Klemmleiste TB 1-3 210 bis 230 Volt

230 bis 260 Volt

Klemmleiste TB 1-4

Nenn-

Spannung

200/208 Volt

220 Volt

240 Volt

Wichtiger Hinweis:

Die 3745 kann über Fernsteuerung eingeschaltet werden. Deshalb muß bei Ausführung der folgenden

Verfahren die Stromsteuerfunktion am Bedienungsfeld der 3745 und 3746-900 auf Lokal eingestellt sein.

Eingangsspannung der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit

Der zulässige Spannungsbereich (200/240 V) und die Frequenz (50/60 Hz) sind dem Typenschild zu entnehmen.

Prüfen, ob die Angaben auf dem Typenschild an der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit mit der an der

Netzstromversorgung des Kunden gemessenen Spannung und Frequenz übereinstimmen. Wenn dies

Safety

xli

Safety

nicht der Fall ist, zuständige Geschäftsstelle informieren. Die Position des Typenschildes ist “Controller

Expansion Label Location” on page lxii zu entnehmen.

7

Prüfung des Notaus-Schalters

a. Den Kunden bitten, das Netzkabel an die Netzstromversorgung anzuschließen.

b. Sicherungsautomat (CB1) einschalten.

c. Die 3745 und 3746-900 einschalten (Stromsteuerfunktion am Bedienungsfeld muß auf Lokal eingestellt sein).

d. Den NOTSCHALTER ausschalten (O) und prüfen, ob:

1) die 3745 und die 3746-900 ausgeschaltet sind.

Hinweis

In der 3746-900 stehen die primären Versorgungs- (ACDC) oder die Filterbereiche

(DCDC) weiterhin unter Spannung.

Komplettes Abschalten:

1. Die Sicherungsautomaten (CBs) ausschalten.

2. Alle Netzstecker aus den Steckdosen ziehen oder die Netzstromversorgung abschalten.

2) die Disketten- und Plattenlaufwerke angehalten sind.

3) die Lüfter abgeschaltet sind.

e. Notschalter entriegeln und Steuereinheit einschalten.

8

Betriebsanzeige

Nach Einschalten der Steuereinheit prüfen, ob a. die Betriebsanzeige am Bedienungsfeld der 3745 leuchtet.

b. die Betriebs-LED und die Bereitschafts-LED (am Bedienungsfeld des 3746-900) gemäß den

Angaben der Tabelle “Bedeutung der LEDs am Bedienungsfeld der 3746-900” leuchten.

Bedeutung der LEDs am Bedienungsfeld der 3746-900

Table 0-7. Bedeutung der LEDs am Bedienungsfeld der 3746-900

LED

Bereitschaft

LED

Betrieb

Status

3746-900

Kommentar

Blinken AUS

EIN AUS

Wechselstrom

EIN

Bereitschaft

Initialisierung der CBSP-Hardware. Die 3746-900 wartet auf erste Erkennung durch den MOSS-E beim LAN-Anschluß.

Die eingangs vom MOSS-E erkannte 3746-900 wartet auf das

Einschalten (nur das CBSP EEPROM-Programm ist aktiv).

AUS

AUS

Blinken

EIN

Einschalten

Betrieb

Alle 3746-900-Prozessoren werden hochgefahren (IML).

Die 3746-900 ist nun betriebsbereit.

xlii

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Safety

Stromversorgung der 3745/3746-900, Sicherungsautomaten (CB),

Überstromschutzschalter (CP) und Sicherungen (F)

Table 0-8. Stromversorgung der 3745, Sicherungsautomaten (CB), Überstromschutzschalter (CP) und

Sicherungen (F)

Rahmen

Rahmen 1

CB/CP/F

CB1

Position

01H-A1

Nennwerte

10 A

PS (Stromvers.)

ALLE

CP2

CP3

F1

01H-A1

01H-B1

01H-B1

1,5 A

2 A

0,2 A

PS2

Ventilatoren

PS2

Rahmen 7:

3746-900

CB1 AC

CB1 DC

CP1

CP2

CP3

CP4

CP5

07K-A1/07J-A1

07J-A1

07K-A1/07J-A1

07H-A1

07H-A1

07H-A1

07H-A1

15 A/220 V

50 A

5 A

12 A

12 A

12 A

12 A

Wechselstrom

Gleichstrom

Gleichstrom

Gleichstrom

Gleichstrom

Gleichstrom

Gleichstrom

Sicherungen der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit

Der Wechselstromverteilerkasten der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit enthält zwei Sicherungen: 7 A 250 V träge.

Safety

xliii

Safety xliv

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Safety

Safety

xlv

Safety xlvi

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Safety

Safety

xlvii

Safety xlviii

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Safety

Safety

xlix

Safety l

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Safety

Safety

li

Safety lii

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Safety

Safety

liii

Safety liv

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Safety

Safety

lv

Safety lvi

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Safety

Safety Label Locations

Safety Labels on the 3745

On the following figures, labels are designated by letters. A particular wording corresponds to each letter

(see “3745/3746-900 Safety Label Identifications” on page lx).

Figure 0-21. 3745 Label and Power Rating Plate Locations (Back)

Safety

lvii

Safety

Figure 0-22. 3745 Label and Power Rating Plate Locations (Front)

lviii

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Safety

Safety Label on the 3746-900

On the following figures, labels are designated by letters. A particular wording corresponds to each letter

(see “3745/3746-900 Safety Label Identifications” on page lx).

Power Rat i ng Pl at e

(Under t he cover)

Fr ont Vi ew

Figure 0-23. 3746 Model 900 (Frame 07) Label Locations

Rear View

(Under t he cover)

Safety Label on LCB

Figure 0-24. LCB Safety Label Location

S

Safety

lix

Safety

3745/3746-900 Safety Label Identifications

The safety labels shown in Figure 0-25 on page lx and in Figure 0-26 on page lxi are in the English language. They are also available in other languages. See “Safety Label Part Numbers by Country” on page lxiii for ordering.

LABEL A LABEL C

CAUTION

DUE TO CONNECTED EQUIPMENT

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES

MAY BE PRESENT AT ANY TIME

(Same as label A but in local language)

LABEL B

HAZARDOUS AREA

TRAINED SERVICE

PERSONNEL ONLY

LABEL E

LABEL D

(Same as label B but in local language)

LABEL F

LABEL G

> 18 Kg

LABEL H

DO NOT OPEN

NE PAS OUVRIR

NICHT ÖFFNEN

NIET OPENEN

NON APRIRE

NO ABRIR

~

NAO ABRIR

Figure 0-25. 3745/3746-900 Safety Labels

lx

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

L A B E L K 1

HAS AR DOU S AR E A

T R A I N E D S E R V I C E

P E RS ONNE L ONLY

S WI T CH " OF F " CB 1

AT 0 7 K - A1 F OR T HI S

S I D E T R A N S F O R ME R

BE F ORE REMOVI NG T HE COVE R

L A B E L K 2

HAS AR DOU S AR E A

T R A I N E D S E R V I C E

P E RS ONNE L ONLY

S WI CT H " OF F " CB 1

AT 07 J - A1 F OR T HI S

S I D E T R A N S F O R ME R

BE F ORE REMOVI NG T HE COVE R

L A B E L L

LI NE VOLTAGE

P R E S E N T W I T H

MACHI NE POWER OF F

L A B E L M

CAUTI ON

H A Z A R D OU S E N E R GY

I S P R E S E N T W H E R E

T H E C A S S E T E I S

PLUGGED I N

CAUTI ON

R E MOV E P R I MA RY

POWER CORD B EF ORE

REMOVI NG COVER

L A B E L D

L A B E L A

L A B E L N 1

L A B E L N 2

> 18 Kg

> 32 Kg

L A B E L P

CAUTI ON

1 - S WI T CH OF F T HE DC B OX CB 1

2 - S WI T CH OF F T H E CU S T OME R CI R C U I T B R E A K E R

3 - AT TACH A WARNI NG L AB E L DI RE CT LY T O T HE

CI R CU I T B R E AK E R I NDI CAT I NG T HAT

" P OWE R MU S T N OT B E AP P L I E D"

4 - DI S CONNE CT T H E S U P P LY CAB L E F R OM T HE

CUS T OMER J UNCT I ON BOX

5 - L AS T, DI S CONN E CT S U P P LY CAB L E F R OM T H E

DC POWER BOX

Figure 0-26. 3745/3746-900 Safety Labels

L A B E L Q

<

>

60 VDC

240 VA

Safety

Safety

lxi

Safety

LCB Safety Label

LABEL S

HIGH LEAKAGE CURRENT

Permanent ground connection is mandatory before network connections.

Figure 0-27. LCB Safety Label (PN 80G3928)

Controller Expansion Label Location

K M

8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

AC Outlet

Distribution Box

Power Rating

Plate

Figure 0-28. Controller Expansion Power Rating Plate Location

lxii

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Safety

Safety Label Part Numbers by Country

The following table gives the label group part number according to the language(s) of the country in which the 3745 is installed.

Table 0-9. Safety Label Numbers by Country

Language 3745

Frame 1

Part

Number

Canadian French

Danish

Dutch

03F4861

03F4869

03F4872

English

Finnish

French

03F4860

03F4870

03F4862

French/Dutch

German

Italian

Japanese

Norwegian

Portuguese

Spanish

Swedish

03F4871

03F4863

03F4864

03F4867

03F4868

03F4865

03F4866

03F4873

3746-900

Part

Number

72F0673

72F0676

72F0664

72F0674

72F0665

72F0666

72F0667

72F0670

72F0671

72F0668

72F0669

72F0677

3746-900

Label Q

17G5876

17G5876

17G5876

17G5876

17G5876

17G5876

17G5876

17G5876

17G5876

17G5876

17G5876

17G5876

17G5876

17G5876

LCB

Label S

80G3928

80G3928

80G3928

80G3928

80G3928

80G3928

80G3928

80G3928

80G3928

80G3928

80G3928

80G3928

80G3928

80G3928

Safety

lxiii

Safety lxiv

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Preface

Preface

About this Manual

This MIP is a guide for fault isolation and repair of the 3745 Communication Controller. It is expected that the customer has used the .

Problem Determination Guide, SA33-0096 or the 3745 Models A, Problem

Analysis Guide (online document) prior to calling IBM for service. The MIP does not duplicate the tasks done by the

Problem Determination Guide.

The MIP gives the service representative information needed to:

Ÿ Analyze problems or symptoms reported by the system user.

Ÿ Restore normal 3745 operation.

Who Should Read this Manual

The person using this manual should be:

Ÿ Trained to service the 3745 and 3746-900.

Ÿ Familiar with the configuration of the system to which the 3745 is connected.

Ÿ Familiar with the operation of the 3745, as described in the

IBM 3745 Hardware Maintenance

Reference, SY33-2066 and IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service Function, SY33-2069, which are part of this Maintenance Library.

The intended audience for this manual are Product-Trained Customer Engineers (PT CE). The Product

Support-Trained Customer Engineer (PST CE) is also expected to refer to this manual when he is required to perform the same tasks as the PT CE.

How this Manual Is Organized

This manual is organized as follows:

Ÿ

Safety information is at the start of the manual.

Ÿ

From Chapter 1 through Chapter 4, this manual is designed so that the information is presented to the user in the same order as he will require it during the majority of service calls. The user is told where to go next for each path through this part of the manual.

Ÿ

At the back of the manual are:

– Appendix A, Maintenance Aids

– Appendix B, Bibliography

– Appendix X: Abbreviation list and glossary.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997

lxv

Preface lxvi

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Amendments

Summary of Changes

All MAPs, exchange procedures, and so on, referring to the 3746-900, have been removed in this edition except for the "Service Inspection Safety Procedures".

For information concerning the 3746 Model 900 refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller

Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.

Corrections and improvements relating to the previous edition have also been inserted.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997

lxvii

Amendments lxviii

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

START

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

Important

Ÿ Your personal safety can never be over-emphasized.

Ÿ You have been taught safety procedures since the earliest phase of your IBM training.

Ÿ

Your safety is part of every maintenance call.

Ÿ

You are the only one who can make a maintenance call safe.

Ÿ Specific information can be found in “Product Safety Information” on page xvii and “Safety Label

Locations” on page lvii.

Start here when you use this manual to repair a 3745/3746 hardware failure.

Ÿ

Remember that the 3745/3746 are machines which are designed to be repaired while the customer is still using the operational areas. This is called Concurrent Maintenance. Before changing FRUs, you will be directed to ensure that you have the correct area of the machine ready for maintenance.

Ÿ

When a power supply is shared between adapters, the disabling procedures apply to both 'suspected' and 'associated' adapters.

Ÿ

During a call for service, it will normally be necessary to use the 3745 console. To log ON at a

3745 console, proceed as directed in “Console Use for Maintenance.”

Console Use for Maintenance

001

Is the 3745 a Model 17A?

Yes No

002

The 3745 is a Model 130, 150, 160, or 170.

The 3745 has password protection for functions controlled via a console. Several types of password exist for different activities. They are described in the

IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide,

SA33-0097.

Obtain the maintenance password from the customer so that you can log on at the 3745 console

(local, remote, or alternate). This password will give you access to Menu 3 Maintenance Func-

tions, in addition to Menu 1 and Menu 2.

If the 3745 failure prevents correct operation of the 3745 console, continue at “Selection Table” on

page 1-4 .

Log ON at the 3745 console as follows:

1. Ensure that the customer is not using the console and that he has logged OFF. The channel enable/disable screen is displayed.

2. Press F4: MOSS FUNCTIONS.

3. The password screen is displayed.

4. Enter the maintenance password.

Note: Remember to log OFF the console and to re-IML the MOSS at the end of the service call.

See “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102 for more information.

Continue with “Selection Table” on page 1-4.

003

The 3745 is a Model 17A.

(Step 003 continues)

Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997

1-1

START

003 (continued)

Is the service processor operational?

Yes No

004

Continue with “Selection Table” on page 1-4.

005

Obtain the service processor maintenance password from the customer so that you can log ON at the service processor console.

To log ON:

1. On the MOSS-E View window, click on Program (in the action bar).

2. Click on Log On MOSS-E.

3. Enter the password.

Are you here to investigate a RSF problem?

If you do not know, continue with Step 006.

Yes No

006

1. On the MOSS-E View window, double-click on the service processor icon.

2. The Service Processor Menu window is displayed.

3. Click on the Configuration Management option.

4. Double-click on the Manage Remote Operations option.

5. On the Remote Operation Management window, select the Remote operations authorization option and click on OK.

6. On the Remote Support Facility window, select the following two options:

Ÿ

Disable Remote Support Facility

Ÿ

Do not generate alerts

7. Click on OK.

8. Continue with Step 007.

007

Continue with “Selection Table” on page 1-4 .

See “Service Processor Window Overview” on page 1-3 for the main panels used to perform the procedures documented in this manual.

1-2

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Service Processor Window Overview

MOSS-E View

Controller

3745 3746

Service Processor

3745 Menu

Function Options Help

MOSS Console

Problem Management

Operation Management

Service Processor Menu

Function Options Help

Configuration Management

Problem Management

Operation Management

Change Management

Manage Ethernet Bridge

Configuration Management

Communications Manager/2

FFST/2

LAPS

Manage Remote Operation

Set Time and Date

Customize DCAF Target Settings

Manage 3745/3746-9x0 Installation/Removal

Start/Configure TCP/IP

Problem Management

Display Alarms

Manage Alarms/Errors/Events (SRCs)

Transfer NCP Dump

Connect/Disconnect 3746-9x0 from MOSS-E

Operation Management

Manage Disk and Data Base

Manage Passwords

Display Files

Retrieve Engineering Data

Delete Engineering Data

Capture and Save Screens

START

3746-9x0 Menu

Function Options Help

Configuration Management

Problem Management

Network Node Processor (NNP) Management

Multiaccess Enclosure (MAE) Management

Operations Mangement

Change Management

Performance Management

Functions to Use Under PE Guidance

(For a detailed menu, see the 3746-900

Service Guide)

Problem Management

Display Alarms

Manage Alarms/Errors/Events (SRCs)

Report Problem Using Remote Support Facility

Operation Management

Set 3745/MOSS-E Connection Mode

Locate Bypass Card Position

Change Management

Manage Microcode Changes

Change Active Code

Manage Microcode Fixes

Set Automatic Microcode Download Option

Manage Ethernet Bridge

Configure Ethernet Bridge

Configure SNMP

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-3

START

Selection Table

Going from top to bottom in the table, select the first entry point which fits your situation.

If You Have a:

General Verbal Symptoms

Color symptom for 3745/3746-900 icons on MOSS-E View window.

Customer problem number (CPN)

Maintenance actions

Problem during installation

Problem while installing an EC or MES

3745/3746-900 power symptoms

3745 reference code

3745 FRU group number to exchange

3745 FRU list to exchange

3745 control panel code reported

3745 control panel symptoms

3745 service processor link symptom

3745 IOC bus symptoms

3745 console symptoms

3745 'Disk not ready' message on the 3745 console

or 'Disk error' message

or 'Diskette error' message

3745 console message displayed

Then Go to:

The “General Verbal Symptoms” on page 1-8.

“MAP 5200: 3745/3746-900/Service Processor/Network

Node Processor Icon Color Symptoms” on page 2-37

The “3745 and Service Processor Maintenance Using a

CPN” on page 1-55

The “3745 Maintenance Actions” on page 1-6.

The “Problems During Machine, EC, or MES Installation” on page 1-7.

The “Problems During Machine, EC, or MES Installation” on page 1-7.

The “3745 Power Symptoms” on page 1-12.

“Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.

“Using the MIP FRU Group Table” on page 1-48.

The “3745 FRU List” on page 1-53.

The “3745 Control Panel Codes” on page 1-15.

The “3745 Control Panel Symptoms” on page 1-11.

“MAP 5600: LAN Problem on the LAN Attached to the

Service Processor” on page 2-42

“MAP 0100: IOC Bus Trouble Shooting” on page 2-1.

The “3745 Console Symptoms” on page 1-10.

“How to Perform 3745 Control Panel Operations” on page 1-82. Perform a MOSS IML, and restart, using the control panel code reported.

Alarm reported on the 3745 Model 17A

3745-XXA apply a microcode fix

3745-XXA RSF link down

Service processor symptom

Network node processor symptom

Service processor system reference code sequence number

Service processor apply a microcode change

Problem with the service processor integrated modem

Problem on the external modem attached at the service processor

Most messages are self explanatory. If necessary, go to the 3745 Problem Determination Guide, 3745 Service

Functions or “3745 Advanced Operations Guide”.

The Problem Analysis Guide (online book)

The

Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual. Use the "Handling the Microcode Change Levels" procedure in the chapter "Maintaining the Code Loaded on the Service Processor".

“MAP 4510: 3745 Model 17A Manual Call” on page 2-33

The "Service Processor Problem Determination" in the corresponding Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual.

The "Network Node Processor Problem Determination" in the corresponding Network Node Processor Installation and

Maintenance manual.

The “Service Processor Maintenance Using an SRC

Sequence Number” on page 1-57.

"Handling the Microcode Change Level" in the chapter

"Maintaining the Code Loaded on the Service Processor" in the corresponding Service Processor Installation and

Maintenance manual.

"How to Run the Service Processor Diagnostics" in the corresponding Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual, and run the integrated V.32 modem test, or refer to the

IBM Asynchronous/SDLC V.32 Modem/A; Installation, Operation, and Problem Determination Guide.

Refer to the modem documentation.

Ÿ For IBM the 7855 modem refer to the problem determination chapter in the 7855 Modem Model 10, Guide to

Operation.

Ÿ For IBM the 7857 modem refer to the problem determination chapter in the IBM 7857 Modem Guide to Operation.

Ÿ For the Hayes** modem, refer to the corresponding manual.

1-4

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

START

If You Have a:

Problem on the 3746-900, or attached features

Then Go to:

The IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900

Service Guide, SY33-2116.

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-5

START

3745 Maintenance Actions

If You Want to:

Run 3745 diagnostics in offline mode (ODG)

Run 3745 diagnostics in concurrent maintenance mode (CDG)

Run the 3745/3746-900 LIC wrap test (WTT)

Find information about using the 3745 control panel

Know the definition of a 3745 control panel code

Install a 3745

Find information about using the 3745 MOSS console

Find information about connected consoles

Find the level of a FRU installed.

Check voltages on 3745

Change parameters for the 3745 LIC type 5 or 6.

Apply a Microcode Fix on the 3745-17A

Find information about using the service processor console

Test the 3745-17A RSF link

Find information about customer console on

3745-17A

Perform Engineering Data Transfer

Run diagnostics on the service processor

Run diagnostics on the network node processor

Apply a microcode change on a service processor

Find the modem setting for RSF

Run diagnostics on the 3746-900 or attached features

Find miscellaneous information

Then Go to:

The “3745 Diagnostic Requirement” on page 1-60.

The “3745 Diagnostic Requirement” on page 1-60.

“How to Run the Wrap Test (WTT) for TSS, HPTSS, or

3746-900” on page 3-15.

“3745 Control Panel Use” on page 1-78.

The “3745 Control Panel Codes” on page 1-15.

The

3745/3746-900 Installation Guide, SY33-2067

The 3745 Service Functions Guide, SY33-2069.

The 3745 Console Setup Guide, SA33-0158.

The 3745 Service Functions Guide, SY33-2069.

The 3745 YZ pages

Appendix B, “PKD (Portable Keypad Display) Maintenance

Aids for LIC 5 and 6” on page A-5.

"Handling the Microcode Change Level" in the chapter

"Maintaining the Code Loaded on the Service Processor" in the corresponding Service Processor Installation and

Maintenance manual.

The 3745 Models A, Basic Operations Guide, SA33-0177.

“MAP 4510: 3745 Model 17A Manual Call” on page 2-33.

The

3745 Console Setup Guide, SA33-0158.

The “Engineering Data Transfer” on page 1-58.

"How to Run the Service Processor Diagnostics" in the corresponding

Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual.

The "Network Node Processor Problem Determination" in the corresponding Network Node Processor Installation and

Maintenance manual.

"Handling the Microcode Change Level" in the chapter

"Maintaining the Code Loaded on the Service Processor" in the corresponding

Service Processor Installation and

Maintenance manual.

The

Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual. Use the "Installing and Connecting the RSF

Modem to the Service Processor" procedure according to your modem type.

The IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900

Service Guide, SY33-2116.

“Miscellaneous Information” on page 1-13.

1-6

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

START

Problems During Machine, EC, or MES Installation

When installing a 3745, the 3745 Installation Guide, SY33-2067 should be used. When installing an EC or an MES, the supplied instructions should be used. It is possible that the task or diagnostic you were asked to perform during the installation detected an error, and you were requested to start troubleshooting using this manual.

The primary purpose of this manual is to resolve problems that occur in an operational environment after a successful installation. That is, the machine has worked previously and is now failing.

At installation time, or after an EC or MES is installed, it is possible that errors may occur due to conditions which would not exist in an operational environment.

Ÿ Cables plugged incorrectly

Ÿ Terminators missing

Ÿ

Mismatch between CDF and machine configuration

Ÿ Mismatch between line characteristics and setups

Ÿ

Wrong address set

Ÿ Top card connectors incorrectly installed

Ÿ

Loose cards.

During your path through the MIP, you should remember these possibilities and, when the failing area is identified, check with the aid of the 3745 Hardware Maintenance Reference, SY33-2066 and YZ pages that these conditions do not exist prior to changing FRUs.

Now, starting at the top of the “Selection Table,” work down until you find an entry that matches the symptom detected during the installation.

Be sure to read “Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1 before removing any FRUs from this machine.

Selection Table

If You Have a:

Reference code (see the "3745 Problem

Determination/Analysis Guide", Alarms)

3745 control panel code reported

3745 Power Symptoms

IOC bus symptoms

3745 console symptom

3745 control panel symptom

General verbal symptom

Error detected by diagnostics on the 3745

3745 console message displayed

CDF undefined error

Then Go to:

“Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.

“3745 Control Panel Codes” on page 1-15.

“3745 Power Symptoms” on page 1-12.

“MAP 0100: IOC Bus Trouble Shooting” on page 2-1.

“3745 Console Symptoms” on page 1-10.

“3745 Control Panel Symptoms” on page 1-11.

“General Verbal Symptoms” on page 1-8.

“Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.

Most messages are self explanatory. If needed go to the

"3745 Problem Determination Guide", "3745 Service Functions", or "Advanced Operation Guide".

Correct the CDF using the manual update function (option

S). Refer to the IBM 3745 Communication Controller

Service Function, SY33-2069.

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-7

Symptom Index

Symptom Index

General Verbal Symptoms

Table 1-1 (Page 1 of 2). General Symptoms

If the: Symptom:

Has detected

Host

3745 using a channel

Ÿ Channel errors on this

3745

Ÿ

Route inop

Ÿ Missing interrupt

Has detected channel errors on the 3746-900

Is unable to load/dump the control program via the

3745 CA

Is unable to load/dump the control program via the

3746-900 ESCA

Is unable to activate an

ESCA or there is no traffic on the ESCA

3745 using the MOSS HDD

Is unable to load/dump the control program

Then:

Go to “MAP 3500: Activate/Deactivate Line

Problem or Line Errors on the TSS” on page 2-7.

Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.

Go to “MAP 3500: Activate/Deactivate Line

Problem or Line Errors on the TSS” on page 2-7.

Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.

Refer to the

IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.

Ÿ

Refer to “How to Run MOSS Diagnostics” on page 3-4 and continue with the error detected.

Ÿ

If no error is detected, go to the "Service

Function Guide" for HDD problems.

1-8

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Symptom Index

Table 1-1 (Page 2 of 2). General Symptoms

If the:

3745

Hardware central service

Service processor

Symptom:

Is unable to activate (start) a line or a ring

Has errors while running lines or rings

Then:

1. For TSS: go to “MAP 3500:

Activate/Deactivate Line Problem or Line

Errors on the TSS” on page 2-7.

2. For TRSS : go to “MAP 3520:

Activate/Deactivate Ring Problems or Ring

Errors on the TRSS” on page 2-8.

3. For HPTSS or ESS : go to “MAP 3530:

Activate/Deactivate Line Problems or Line

Errors on the HPTSS/ESS” on page 2-9.

Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.

Is unable to activate (start) a ring or has errors while running a ring connected to a 3746-900

Is unable to activate (start) or has a problem on all the lines of a 3746-900 CLP.

Is unable to activate (start) or has a problem on all the lines of a 3746-900 LIC11.

Is unable to activate or has a problem on all the lines of the same ARC group

Is unable to activate or has a problem on all the lines of the same line connection box expansion (LCBE)

Is unable to activate or has a problem on all the lines of a 3746-900 LIC12

Is unable to activate or has a problem on all the lines of a 3746-900 LIC16

Has a suspected program loop or hang

Has unexpected re-IPLs

Is unable to activate an

RSF link

The 3745 Model 17A, has the RSF link down

Is unable to establish a link with a 3745 or 3746-900

Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.

Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.

Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.

Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.

Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.

Refer to the

IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.

Call your support structure for assistance with this problem. Refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

Ÿ If a message with a reference code is generated, go to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.

Ÿ If no message with a reference code is generated at the re-IPL, contact your support structure for assistance. Refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

Ÿ Run the RSF console link test, refer to “How to Run the Console Link Test for 3745

Models 130, 150, 160, and 170” on page 3-6.

Ÿ If no error is detected suspect the modem or line. Ask the customer to perform problem determination or call the appropriate service representative.

Go to “MAP 4510: 3745 Model 17A Manual

Call” on page 2-33.

Go to “MAP 5600: LAN Problem on the LAN

Attached to the Service Processor” on page 2-42.

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-9

Symptom Index

3745 Console Symptoms

Table 1-2. 3745 Console Symptoms

If a:

Local/Remote/RSF or alternate console appears not to function or functions incorrectly

"Disk not ready" message or

"Disk error" message or

"Diskette error" message

3745 console message is displayed

On 3745 Models 17A, the RSF link is down

Service processor is failing or

Service processor symptom appears

Then:

Ensure that the Problem Determination Guide has been followed.

Perform a MOSS IML. See “How to Perform

3745 Control Panel Operations” on page 1-82.

Restart using the reported Control Panel code.

Most messages are self explanatory.

If necessary, refer to the:

Ÿ Problem Determination Guide, SA33-0096

Ÿ

IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service

Function, SY33-2069

Ÿ IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide,

SA33-0097.

Go to “MAP 4510: 3745 Model 17A Manual

Call” on page 2-33.

Refer to the "Service Processor Problem Determination" in the corresponding

Service

Processor Installation and Maintenance manual.

1-10

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 Control Panel Symptoms

Symptom Index

Table 1-3. Control Panel Symptoms

If the 3745

Control panel displays any wrong character or all segments of all characters are ON

Control panel display has a missing character

Has one or more control panel keys that do not work

MOSS message indicator is always ON without a console pending message

MOSS inoperative indicator is always ON even if

MOSS is operating

Control panel display is blank

"All Channel Adapters Disabled" indicator is in an invalid state

"Console in Use" indicator shows the wrong console

Power On Indicator is not ON

Then:

Ÿ

Run the Control Panel test. Refer to “How to Run the Control Panel Test” on page 3-8.

Ÿ When a FRU group is called for an error, go to

“3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.

Ÿ If no error is detected and the problem still exists, call your support structure for a possible microcode problem. Refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

Ÿ Run the Control Panel test. Refer to “How to Run the Control Panel Test” on page 3-8.

Ÿ

When a FRU group is called for an error, go to

“3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.

Ÿ If no error is detected and the problem still exists, call your support structure for a possible microcode problem. Refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

Ÿ Run the Control Panel test. Refer to “How to Run the Control Panel Test” on page 3-8.

Ÿ When a FRU group is called for an error, go to

“3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.

Ÿ

If no error is detected and the problem still exists, call your support structure for a possible microcode problem. Refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

Ÿ Run the Control Panel test. Refer to “How to Run the Control Panel Test” on page 3-8.

Ÿ When a FRU group is called for an error, go to

“3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.

Ÿ If no error is detected and the problem still exists, call your support structure for a possible microcode problem. Refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

Ÿ

Run the Control Panel test. Refer to “How to Run the Control Panel Test” on page 3-8.

Ÿ When a FRU group is called for an error, go to

“3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.

Ÿ If no error is detected, go to “How to Run MOSS

Diagnostics” on page 3-4.

Go to “Power MAP 3930: Power Control Subsystem

Problems” on page 2-21.

Ÿ Run the Control Panel test. Refer to “How to Run the Control Panel Test” on page 3-8.

Ÿ When a FRU group is called for an error, go to

“3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.

Ÿ

If no error is detected, go to “How to Run MOSS

Diagnostics” on page 3-4.

Ÿ

Refer to “How to Run MOSS Diagnostics” on page 3-4 and continue with the error detected.

Ÿ If no error is detected, exchange the FRU group 52.

Go to page 1-49.

Go to “Power MAP 3930: Power Control Subsystem

Problems” on page 2-21.

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-11

Symptom Index

3745 Power Symptoms

Table 1-4. Power Symptoms

If the: Symptom:

Will not power ON

3745

Will not perform a scheduled power ON

Host power ON sequence stops at the 3745

Power On Indicator is not ON

Control panel display is blank

Will not power OFF

Will not power OFF when a power

OFF command is sent by the control program

Then:

Go to “Power MAP 3930: Power Control Subsystem

Problems” on page 2-21.

Go to “Power MAP 3925: Scheduled Power on Problems” on page 2-20.

Go to “MAP 3905: Power ON Problem in Host Mode or

Host Power Sequence Problem” on page 2-16.

Go to “Power MAP 3930: Power Control Subsystem

Problems” on page 2-21.

Go to “Power MAP 3935: Power OFF not Possible in Host

Mode” on page 2-25.

or

Go to “Power MAP 3945: Power OFF not Possible in

Local Mode” on page 2-26.

Go to “Power MAP 3960: Power OFF not Possible in

Network Mode” on page 2-28.

1-12

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Miscellaneous Information

If You Want to:

Find information about the 3745 console

Ÿ Maintenance

Ÿ Setup

Ÿ Customer MOSS functions

Find the level of an installed FRU

Check voltages

Find information about the maintenance aids for:

Ÿ

Control program

Ÿ Microcode

Ÿ Special tools

Ÿ PKD and LIC5/6

Symptom Index

Then Go to:

Ÿ IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service

Function, SY33-2069

Ÿ IBM 3745 Console Setup Guide, SA33-0158

Ÿ

IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide, SA33-0097

IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service Function,

SY33-2069 CDF chapter.

YZ pages, and IBM 3745 Hardware Maintenance

Reference (specifications chapter).

See this manual appendix A

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-13

Reference Codes

Using Reference Codes

Reference Codes (8 digits) are always displayed at the rightmost position of the alarm on the 3745 console. They are generated by the microcode which runs within the MOSS to provide an automatic analysis of box event records (BERs). This function is known as auto-BER and is part of the AUTOMAINT facility. Reference codes are also generated when diagnostics detect an error.

If several alarms have been generated for the same problem, resulting in multiple reference codes, use the reference code beginning with BX, if any. If there are no BX codes, use the reference code given by the earliest alarm.

To analyze a reference code to find the correct action to take, use the following procedure on the 3745 console:

1. From the Maintenance Functions on Menu 3, select the BRC function.

The reference code screen will be displayed (see Figure 1-1).

à

CUSTOMER ID:

CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-OFFLINE

3745

X71:ð2ð415

X72:ðððð85

SERIAL NUMBER:

ð

F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM F5:BER CORRELATION

á

RUN-REQ

-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/89 ð1:22

FUNCTION ON SCREEN: BER CORRELATION

REFERENCE CODE INTERPRETATION

ENTER REFERENCE CODE ==>

===>

F6:ADDITIONAL INFO

Figure 1-1. Reference Code Screen

ñ

2. Type in the 8-digit reference code you want to analyze in the input area of the screen. Refer to

Figure 1-1.

3. Press SEND the action you are required to perform will appear on the screen.

Note

When the microcode is a possible cause of the error, it is recommended that you check:

1. If you have the highest level of microcode for your machine.

2. That any applicable MCFs are installed.

Your support structure will have this information.

4. Hit F6 for additional information (on associated components and customer resources for TSS,

HPTSS and ESS), and record the data for later usage.

Note: If the CDF is not correct, this information can be wrong.

5. When the FRU list is given, record the types and location, then use the “3745 FRU List” on page 1-53.

If the reference code is reported as 'INVALID' or 'DUMMY', check that you have entered the same code as reported. If so, an error in the BER analysis or BER logging has occurred. Contact your support structure for assistance. See “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

1-14

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 Panel Codes

3745 Control Panel Codes

For the 3746 Model 900 panel code, refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900

Service Guide, SY33-2116.

Table 1-5 (Page 1 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

000

SUCCESSFUL IPL COMPLETION: THE CONTROL

PROGRAM IS LOADED AND MOSS IS OPERA-

TIONAL.

No action required

001

002

ROS CODE DOES NOT GET CONTROL OR DOES

NOT EXECUTE SCHEDULED PROCESSING (CODE

DISPLAYED BY THE PCC )

MMIO INTERFACE NOT OK (CODE DISPLAYED BY

THE PCC )

Go to “MAP 3200: MOSS Control

Panel Code 001” on page 2-3

Exchange the FRU group 22

003

004

005

006

MOSS REIML has been initiated . Progression code.

Problem detected with MOSS POR signal (not the same as the PCC one ).

Problem detected with CCU POR signals (not the same as the PCC one ) .

ac input fault detected . (always sent on panel even if

MOSS IMLed). An alarm and reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console

If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 22

Go to “Power MAP 3950:

PCC-Detected Error on MOSS Reset” on page 2-27

Go to “Power MAP 3970:

PCC-Detected Error on CCU Reset or on Remote Power OFF” on page 2-30

Power on 3745 if it was previously in

'local mode'.

Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14

CB1 has been set OFF then ON (during an exchange procedure for instance).

Do not take into account the Panel

Code

007

008

PCC battery down . (always sent on panel even if

MOSS IMLed)

Problem detected with RPO signal (always ON : CCU or cable problem)

Exchange the FRU group 39

Exchange the FRU group 49

009 and

00A

00B

Unused

Problem detected on power supply 1 " OVERCUR-

RENT FAULT " .

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

Go to “MAP 3900: Overcurrent on

Power Supply 1” on page 2-12

00C

This code can occur if the 3745 is powered ON less than 10 seconds after a power OFF

Problem detected on power supply 1 " POWER

SUPPLY FAULT " (overvoltage, undervoltage) .

This code is normal and no FRUs need to be replaced. Wait at least 10 seconds after power OFF before you try to power ON again

Exchange the FRU group 50

This code can occur if the 3745 is powered ON less than 10 seconds after a power OFF

00D

00E

00F

Unused

This code can occur if the 3745 is powered ON less than 10 seconds after a power OFF

Problem detected on power 2 "OVER-CURRENT

FAULT".

Unused

This code can occur if the 3745 is powered ON less than 10 seconds after a power OFF

This code is normal and no FRUs need to be replaced. Wait at least 10 seconds after power OFF before you try to power ON again

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

This code is normal and no FRUs need to be replaced. Wait at least 10 seconds after power OFF before you try to power ON again

Go to “MAP 3910: Overcurrent on

Power Supply 2” on page 2-18

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

This code is normal and no FRUs need to be replaced. Wait at least 10 seconds after power OFF before you try to power ON again

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-15

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 2 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

010

Machine powered OFF because power supply or blower faults

Use the function 'B' to display the four stacked errors. Refer to “Display

Stacked Errors” on page 1-83.

011 to 02F Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

030

031

032

Problem detected with Power supply Fan

Problem detected with MOSS and basic board Fan

Problem detected with MOSS and basic board Fan

Go to “Power MAP 3920: Air Flow

Detector Fault” on page 2-19

033 to 04F

050

051

052

Unused

INITIAL MOSS PROCESSOR RESET STATE NOT OK

Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

.

Exchange the FRU group 1

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 2

053

054

055

056

INITIAL MOSS PROCESSOR STATE OK

(PROGRESSION CODE) Progression code.

UNEXPECTED LEVEL 0 INTERRUPT PRESENT IN

THE IOIRV.

UNEXPECTED LEVEL 1 INTERRUPT PRESENT IN

THE IOIRV.

UNEXPECTED LEVEL 2 INTERRUPT PRESENT IN

THE IOIRV.

UNEXPECTED LEVEL 3 INTERRUPT PRESENT IN

THE IOIRV.

Exchange the FRU group 3

Exchange the FRU group 4

Exchange the FRU group 3

057

058

059

05A

05B

UNEXPECTED LEVEL 4 INTERRUPT PRESENT IN

THE IOIRV.

UNEXPECTED LEVEL 5 INTERRUPT PRESENT IN

THE IOIRV.

UNEXPECTED LEVEL 6 OR 7 INTERRUPT PRESENT

IN THE IOIRV.

MOSS PROCESSOR CONDITIONS CODES NOT OK

Unused

Exchange the FRU group 3

Exchange the FRU group 7

Go to “MAP 3210: MOSS Control

Panel Code 059” on page 2-4

Exchange the FRU group 2

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

05C

05D

MOSS PROCESSOR CACHE NOT OK

MOSS PROCESSOR INSTRUCTION TEST PART 1

NOT OK

Exchange the FRU group 2

05E Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

05F

060

ROS CHECKSUM NOT OK

ROS BAD PARITY LOCATION NOT DETECTED

Exchange the FRU group 2

061

062

063

Unused

EIRV DOES NOT REPORT FORCED ERRORS

Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

Exchange the FRU group 2

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

070

071

072

073

074

075

PIO BUS TEST DID NOT RUN COMPLETELY

SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO

BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON MPC I/Os.

SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO

BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON DFA I/Os.

SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO

BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON MPC AND DFA I/Os.

SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO

BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON MCCU OR MCAD

I/Os ON MCC

SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO

BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON MPC I/Os AND ON

MCCU OR MCAD I/Os ON MCC.

.

.

Exchange the FRU group 1

Exchange the FRU group 7

Exchange the FRU group 6

Exchange the FRU group 3

Exchange the FRU group 1

1-16

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 3 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

076

SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO

BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON DFA I/Os AND ON

MCCU OR MCAD I/Os ON MCC.

Exchange the FRU group 8

077

078

SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO

BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON MPC I/Os AND ON

DFA I/Os AND ON MCCU OR MCAD I/Os ON MCC.

SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO

BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON PCA'S I/Os ON MCC

Exchange the FRU group 6

Exchange the FRU group 3

079

07A

07B

07C

07D

07E

07F

SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO

BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON MPC AND PCA'S I/Os

ON MCC

SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO

BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON DFA AND PCA'S I/Os

ON MCC

SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO

BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON MPC I/Os , DFA I/Os

AND PCA'S I/Os ON MCC.

SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO

BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON MCC I/Os

(MCCU,MCAD AND PCA'S).

SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO

BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON MPC AND MCC I/Os.

SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO

BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON DFA AND MCC I/Os.

SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO

BUS TEST ERRORS WERE DETECTED ON ALL

ADAPTERS

.

.

.

Exchange the FRU group 1

Exchange the FRU group 8

Exchange the FRU group 6

Exchange the FRU group 3

Exchange the FRU group 1

Exchange the FRU group 8

Exchange the FRU group 1

080 to 096 Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

097

098 ñ

PIO TEST PART 1 SUCCESSFUL PROBLEM IN PIO

BUS TEST PART 2

PIO TEST PART 2 NOT SUCCESSFUL

Exchange the FRU group 9

099

09A to 09C

09D

PIO TEST PART 2 SUCCESSFUL Progression code.

Unused

Exchange the FRU group 5

If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 2

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

Exchange the FRU group 12

09E

09F

0A0

0A1

0A2

0A3

0A4

0A5

0A6

0A7

0A8

0A9

0AA

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

0AB to 0AC

PROBLEM WITH PCC

INFORMATION DEFINING THE ORIGIN OF THE

ACTIVATION OF THE MOSS DIAGNOSTICS IS NOT

VALID. (RUN THE PANEL TEST TO CHECK THE

CONTROL PANEL).

CONTROL LOST IN THE MAINLINE CONTROLLER

AFTER CHECKING THE REQUEST

MOSS STORAGE TEST ENTRY CODE Progression code.

EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 1

EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 2

DISABLE THE VALID OPTION KO IN TEST 1

RECONFIGURE BIT IS ALWAYS 'ON' IN TOD

ADAPTER

ADDRESS NOT INCREMENTED IN TEST 2

DIFFERENT LOADED AND STORED CONTENTS IN

TEST 2

INVALID ADDRESS IN THE ROS IN TEST 2

INVALID ADDRESS AFTER 512K OR 1MEG IN TEST

2

NO MEMORY LOCATION WITHOUT ERROR IS

FOUND IN TEST 2

EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 4

Unused

Exchange the FRU group 10

Exchange the FRU group 2

If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 2

Exchange the FRU group 2

Exchange the FRU group 11

Exchange the FRU group 12

Exchange the FRU group 13

Exchange the FRU group 13

Exchange the FRU group 11

Exchange the FRU group 13

Exchange the FRU group 13

Exchange the FRU group 11

Exchange the FRU group 13

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-17

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 4 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

0AD ñ NO SINGLE ERROR CORRECTION IN TEST 3

Exchange the FRU group 13

0AE ñ BAD SINGLE ERROR CORRECTION IN TEST 3

0AF

0B0

ñ

Unused

NO DOUBLE ERROR DETECTION IN TEST 3

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

Exchange the FRU group 13

0B1 ñ

DIFFERENT LOADED AND STORED CONTENTS IN

TEST 4

Exchange the FRU group 11

0B2 ñ

RECONFIGURE BIT IN TOD ADAPTER CAN NOT BE

SET IN TEST 5

Exchange the FRU group 13

0B3 Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

0B4

0B5

0B6 ñ

0B7

ñ

0B8 to 0BE

0BF

ñ

ñ

DIFFERENT LOADED AND STORED CONTENTS IN

TEST 7

DOUBLE UNCORRECTABLE ERROR IN TEST 6

ENABLE VALID OPTION KO IN TEST 9

EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 9

Unused

MOSS MEMORY TEST EXIT CODE Progression code.

Exchange the FRU group 11

Exchange the FRU group 13

Exchange the FRU group 12

Exchange the FRU group 13

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 2

0C0

0C1

0C2

0C3

0C4

0C5

ñ

ñ

ñ

PROBLEM IN ROS MAINLINE CONTROLLER INITIAL-

IZATION

CONTROL LOST AFTER INITIALIZING THE ROS

MAINLINE CONTROLLER

CONTROL LOST DURING PSV SWAP TEST

STORAGE CHECK (WHEN ACCESSING THE REG-

ISTER SPACE)

SCHEDULED PROGRESSION NOT PERFORMED

DURING THE PSV SWAP TEST

CACHE IN/CACHE OUT OPERATION NOT SUC-

CESSFUL

Exchange the FRU group 14

Exchange the FRU group 2

Exchange the FRU group 13

Exchange the FRU group 11

Exchange FRU group 13

0C6

0C7

0C8 to 0CF

0D0

0D1

0D2

ñ

0D3

ñ

ñ

ñ

Unused

PSV SWAP TEST SUCCESSFUL Progression code.

Unused

DISK ADAPTER TEST ENTRY CODE Progression code.

EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 1

IOIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 1

ADAPTER NOT IN BUSY STATE OR NOT ENABLE

BSTAT BITS 0,1 ARE NOT B'10' IN TEST 1

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 2

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 2

Exchange the FRU group 54

Exchange the FRU group 15

0D4 Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

0D5

0D6

0D7

0D8

ñ

ñ

ñ

0D9 ñ

0DA

ñ

0DB

0DC

ñ

ñ

ñ

0DD ñ

0DE ñ

ADAPTER NOT IN IDLE STATE IN TEST 1 BSTAT

BITS 0,1 ARE NOT B'00'

DIFFERENT LOADED AND READ CONTENTS IN

TEST 2

REGISTER NOT RESET AFTER A RESET COMMAND

IN TEST 2

INVALID PIO COMMAND

EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 2

IOIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 2

ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 1 BSTAT BITS

0,1 ARE NOT B'00'

EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 3

IOIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 2

EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 3

Exchange the FRU group 15

Exchange the FRU group 15

Exchange the FRU group 15

1-18

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 5 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

0DF

0E0

ñ

ñ

IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 2 NO INTER-

RUPT REQUESTED

CHIO TRANSFER KO

0E1

0E2

ñ

ñ

ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 4 BSTAT BITS

0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE

BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE RUN DIAGNOSTIC

COMMAND TEST

DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS

0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO RUN DIAGNOSTIC

COMMAND TEST

Exchange the FRU group 15

0E3

0E4

0E5

0E6

0E7

0E8

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

DIFFERENT CONTENTS IN THE FIRST AND THE

SECOND PART OF THE SECTOR BUFFER RUN

DIAGNOSTIC COMMAND TEST

ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 RUN DIAGNOSTIC

COMMAND TEST

ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 RUN DIAGNOSTIC

COMMAND TEST

ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 5 BSTAT BITS

0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE

BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE DRIVES INITIALIZATION

IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 5 NO INTER-

RUPT RECEIVED DRIVES INITIALIZATION

EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 5 DRIVES

INITIALIZATION

Exchange the FRU group 15

Exchange the FRU group 21

Exchange the FRU group 15

Exchange the FRU group 16

0E9

0EA

0EB

0ED

0EE

0EF

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS

0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO DRIVES INITIALIZATION

ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 6 BSTAT BITS

0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE

BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE SEEK COMMAND

BEFORE RECALIBRATE TEST

IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 6 NO INTER-

RUPT RECEIVED SEEK COMMAND BEFORE

RECALIBRATE TEST

ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 6 BSTAT BITS

0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE

BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE RECALIBRATE COMMAND

TEST

IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 6 NO INTER-

RUPT RECEIVED RECALIBRATE COMMAND TEST

EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 6 RECALI-

BRATE COMMAND TEST

Exchange the FRU group 16

Exchange the FRU group 16

0F0 Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

0F1

0F2

0F3

0F4

0F5

0F6

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS

0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO DRIVES INITIALIZATION

RECALIBRATE COMMAND TEST

NO CYLINDER ZERO IN SSB BYTE0 BIT 7 RECALI-

BRATE COMMAND TEST

ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 RECALIBRATE COMMAND

TEST

ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 RECALIBRATE

COMMAND TEST

ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 7 BSTAT BITS

0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE

BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE READ ID COMMAND TEST

IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 7 NO INTER-

RUPT RECEIVED READ ID COMMAND TEST

Exchange the FRU group 16

Exchange the FRU group 16

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-19

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 6 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

0F7

0F8

ñ

ñ

EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 7 READ ID

COMMAND TEST

DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS

0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO READ ID COMMAND

TEST

Exchange the FRU group 16

0F9

0FA

0FB

0FC

0FD

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ERROR ON HEAD ADDRESSING MECHANISM READ

ID COMMAND TEST

ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 READ ID COMMAND TEST

ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 READ ID COMMAND

TEST

ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 8 BSTAT BITS

0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE

BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE RECALIBRATE COMMAND

BEFORE SEEK TEST

IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 8 NO INTER-

RUPT RECEIVED RECALIBRATE COMMAND

BEFORE SEEK TEST

Exchange the FRU group 16

0FE Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

0FF ñ

ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 8 BSTAT BITS

0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE

BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE SEEK COMMAND TEST

Exchange the FRU group 16

100 Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

101

102

HARD DISK INITIAL STATE IS NOT OK. A

RECOVERY PROCEDURE IS RUNNING.

HARD DISK INITIAL STATE NOT OK (EVEN AFTER

A RECOVERY PROCEDURE).

Exchange the FRU group 16

103 to 110 Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

11A

11B

11C

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 8 NO INTER-

RUPT RECEIVED SEEK COMMAND TEST

EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 8 SEEK

COMMAND TEST

DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS

0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO SEEK COMMAND TEST

DIFFERENT HEAD NUMBERS SEEK COMMAND

TEST

ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 SEEK COMMAND TEST

ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 SEEK COMMAND

TEST

ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 9 BSTAT BITS

0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE

BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE READ/WRITE A SECTOR

COMMAND

IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 9 NO INTER-

RUPT RECEIVED READ/WRITE A SECTOR

COMMAND

EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 9

READ/WRITE A SECTOR COMMAND

DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS

0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO READ/WRITE A SECTOR

COMMAND

DIFFERENT WRITTEN AND READ SECTORS

READ/WRITE A SECTOR COMMAND

ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 READ/WRITE A SECTOR

COMMAND

Exchange the FRU group 16

Exchange the FRU group 16

Exchange the FRU group 16

1-20

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 7 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

11D

11E

ñ

ñ

ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 READ/WRITE A

SECTOR COMMAND

ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 10 BSTAT BITS

0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE

BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE READ/WRITE A FULL

TRACK COMMAND

Exchange the FRU group 16

11F

120

121

ñ

ñ

ñ

IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 10 NO INTER-

RUPT RECEIVED READ/WRITE A FULL TRACK

COMMAND

EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 10

READ/WRITE A FULL TRACK COMMAND

DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS

0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO READ/WRITE A FULL

TRACK COMMAND

122

123

ñ

ñ

DIFFERENT WRITTEN AND READ TRACKS

READ/WRITE A FULL TRACK COMMAND

ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 READ/WRITE A FULL

TRACK COMMAND

Exchange the FRU group 16

124

125

126

127

128

129

12A

12B

12C

12D

12E

12F

130

131

132

133

134

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 READ/WRITE A FULL

TRACK COMMAND

ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 11 BSTAT BITS

0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE

BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE READ/WRITE NO DATA

COMMAND

IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 11 NO INTER-

RUPT RECEIVED READ/WRITE NO DATA

COMMAND

EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 11

READ/WRITE NO DATA COMMAND

DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS

0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO READ/WRITE NO DATA

COMMAND

DIFFERENT WRITTEN AND READ SECTORS

READ/WRITE NO DATA COMMAND

ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 READ/WRITE NO DATA

COMMAND

ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 READ/WRITE NO

DATA COMMAND

ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 12 BSTAT BITS

0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE

BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE READ CHECK/WRITE

VERIFY COMMAND

IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 12 NO INTER-

RUPT RECEIVED READ CHECK/WRITE VERIFY

COMMAND

EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 12 READ

CHECK/WRITE VERIFY COMMAND

DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS

0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO READ CHECK/WRITE

VERIFY COMMAND

ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 READ CHECK/WRITE

VERIFY COMMAND

ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 READ CHECK/WRITE

VERIFY COMMAND

DIFFERENT WRITTEN AND READ SECTORS READ

CHECK/WRITE VERIFY COMMAND

ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 13 BSTAT BITS

0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE

BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE ECC CORRECTION TEST

IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 13 NO INTER-

RUPT RECEIVED ECC CORRECTION TEST

Exchange the FRU group 16

Exchange the FRU group 16

Exchange the FRU group 16

Exchange the FRU group 16

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-21

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 8 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

135

136

137

138

139

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 13 ECC COR-

RECTION TEST

DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS

0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO ECC CORRECTION TEST

ERROR ON A SELECTED SECTOR ECC COR-

RECTION TEST

NO ERROR IN SSB WHILE EXPECTED ECC COR-

RECTION TEST

NO CORRECTION ECC CORRECTION TEST

Exchange the FRU group 16

13A ñ

13C

ñ

NO DETECTION ECC CORRECTION TEST

ERROR SSB BYTE 0 ECC CORRECTION TEST

Exchange the FRU group 16

13D

13E

ñ

ñ

ERROR SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 ECC CORRECTION

TEST

DIFFERENT WRITTEN AND READ CONTENTS IN

TEST 13

Exchange the FRU group 16

13F

140

141

142

143

144

145

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

DISKETTE CHANGE INFORMATION IS NOT

PRESENT

ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 5 BSTAT BITS

0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE

BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE DRIVES INITIALIZATION

DISKETTE

IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 5 NO INTER-

RUPT RECEIVED DRIVES INITIALIZATION DISKETTE

EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 5 DRIVES

INITIALIZATION DISKETTE

DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS

0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO DRIVES INITIALIZATION

DISKETTE

ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 6 BSTAT BITS

0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE

BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE SEEK COMMAND

BEFORE RECALIBRATE TEST DISKETTE

IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 6 NO INTER-

RUPT RECEIVED SEEK COMMAND BEFORE

RECALIBRATE TEST DISKETTE

Exchange the FRU group 18

Exchange the FRU group 17

Exchange the FRU group 19

Exchange the FRU group 17

Exchange the FRU group 19

Exchange the FRU group 17

Exchange the FRU group 19

146 Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

147

148

149

14A

14B

14C

14D

14E

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 6 BSTAT BITS

0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE

BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE RECALIBRATE COMMAND

TEST DISKETTE

IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 6 NO INTER-

RUPT RECEIVED RECALIBRATE COMMAND TEST

DISKETTE

EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 6 RECALI-

BRATE COMMAND TEST DISKETTE

DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS

0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO DRIVES INITIALIZATION

RECALIBRATE COMMAND TEST DISKETTE OR NO

DISKETTE (OR BAD DISKETTE) IN DRIVE

NO CYLINDER ZERO IN SSB BYTE0 BIT 7 RECALI-

BRATE COMMAND TEST2DRIVE DISKETTE

ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 RECALIBRATE COMMAND

TEST DISKETTE

ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 RECALIBRATE

COMMAND TEST DISKETTE

ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 7 BSTAT BITS

0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE

BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE READ ID COMMAND TEST

DISKETTE

Exchange the FRU group 17

Exchange the FRU group 17

Exchange the FRU group 19

Exchange the FRU group 21

Exchange the FRU group 17

1-22

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 9 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

14F ñ

IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 7 NO INTER-

RUPT RECEIVED READ ID COMMAND TEST

DISKETTE

Exchange the FRU group 19

150

151

152

153

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 7 READ ID

COMMAND TEST DISKETTE

DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS

0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO READ ID COMMAND

TEST DISKETTE

ERROR ON HEAD ADDRESSING MECHANISM READ

ID COMMAND TEST DISKETTE

ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 READ ID COMMAND TEST

DISKETTE

Exchange the FRU group 17

Exchange the FRU group 19

Exchange the FRU group 21

154

155

156

158

159

15A

15B

15C

15D

15E

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 READ ID COMMAND

TEST DISKETTE

ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 8 BSTAT BITS

0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE

BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE RECALIBRATE COMMAND

BEFORE SEEK TEST DISKETTE

IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 8 NO INTER-

RUPT RECEIVED RECALIBRATE COMMAND

BEFORE SEEK TEST DISKETTE

ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 8 BSTAT BITS

0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE

BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE SEEK COMMAND TEST

DISKETTE

IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 8 NO INTER-

RUPT RECEIVED SEEK COMMAND TEST DISKETTE

EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 8 SEEK

COMMAND TEST DISKETTE

DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS

0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO SEEK COMMAND TEST

DISKETTE

DIFFERENT HEAD NUMBERS SEEK COMMAND

TEST

ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 SEEK COMMAND TEST

ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 SEEK COMMAND

TEST DISKETTE

Exchange the FRU group 17

Exchange the FRU group 19

Exchange the FRU group 17

Exchange the FRU group 19

Exchange the FRU group 17

Exchange the FRU group 19

Exchange the FRU group 21

15F END OF DISK ADAPTER TEST Progression code.

If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 2

170

171

ROS CODE GETS CONTROL FOR A RE-IML BUT

THE RE-IML RESET SEQUENCE IS NOT PER-

FORMED

RE-IML SEQUENCE COMPLETELY PERFORMED

BUT ERROR IN MOSS PROCESSOR RESET STATE

TEST

Exchange the FRU group 2

172 to 177 Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

178

CONTROL LOST DURING THE PROCESSING OF

THE 'MOSS DIAGS BY-PASS' REQUEST. A PCC

ERROR IS ALSO SUSPECTED.

Exchange the FRU group 22

179 Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

17A

17B

INFORMATION DEFINING THE ORIGIN OF THE ACTI

VATION OF THE MOSS DIAGNOSTICS IS NOT

VALID. (RUN THE PANEL TEST TO CHECK THE

CONTROL PA NEL).

CONTROL LOST DURING THE PROCESSING OF

THE 'MOSS DIAGS BY-PASS' REQUEST

Exchange the FRU group 10

Exchange the FRU group 23

17C Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

17D

STORAGE ACCESS PROBLEM. DUMP REQUEST

CAN NOT BE PROCESSED

Exchange the FRU group 11

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-23

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 10 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

17E

17F

180

181

182

ñ

183 to 187

Unused

COMPLETION OF ROS PART OF MOSS DIAGNOS-

TICS Progression code.

ENTRY INTO RAM PART OF MOSS DIAGNOSTICS

Progression code.

CURRENT PROGRAM LEVEL NOT AS EXPECTED

(SHOULD HAVE BEEN 6)

RAM DIAG CONTROLLER HAS FULL CONTROL

Progression code.

Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 24

If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 25

Exchange the FRU group 25

If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 25

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

188

189

18A

18B

18C

ñ

CONTROL LOST DURING INSTRUCTION TEST PART

2

MOSS PROCESSOR INSTRUCTION TEST PART 2

NOT OK

MOSS PROCESSOR INSTRUCTION TEST PART 2

SUCCESSFULLY RUN Progression code.

Unused

CONTROL LOST DURING TOD ADAPTER TEST

Exchange the FRU group 25

If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 25

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

Exchange the FRU group 6

18D

18E to 18F

END OF TOD TEST (SUCCESSFUL OR NOT)

Progression code.

Unused

If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 2

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

190 START OF MCC TEST Progression code.

If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 9

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

19A

19B

19C

19D

19E

19F

1A0

1A1

1A2

1A3

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

HARDWIRED CONDITIONS IMPOSSIBLE TO GET IN

PCA 1

ERROR IN PCA 1 TEST ASYNCHRONOUS

UNEXPECTED LEVEL 0 INTERRUPT DURING PCA1

TEST

ERROR IN PCA 1 INTERNAL WRAP ASYNCHRO-

NOUS TEST.

UNEXPECTED LEVEL 0 INTERRUPT DURING PCA1

TEST

HARDWIRED CONDITIONS IMPOSSIBLE TO GET IN

PCA 2

ERROR IN PCA 2 TEST ASYNCHRONOUS

UNEXPECTED LEVEL 0 INT. DURING PCA2 TEST

ERROR IN PCA 2 INTERNAL WRAP ASYNCHRO-

NOUS TEST.

UNEXPECTED INT. (<> LEVEL 0) IN PCA2 TEST

HARDWIRED CONDITIONS IMPOSSIBLE TO GET IN

PCA 3

ERROR IN PCA 3 TEST SYNCHRONOUS

UNEXPECTED LEVEL 0 INT. DURING PCA3 TEST

ERROR IN PCA 3 INTERNAL WRAP SYNCHRONOUS

TEST.

UNEXPECTED INT. (<> LEVEL 0) IN PCA3 TEST

WRAP BLOCK DOES NOT SEEM TO BE PRESENT

ON LOCAL PORT , OR SIGNALS TESTED ARE NOT

OK.

LOCAL CONSOLE CABLE DOWN (WHEN WRAP

BLOCK INSTALLED)

LOCAL CONSOLE PCA ERROR

WRAP BLOCK DOES NOT SEEM TO BE PRESENT

ON REMOTE PORT , OR SIGNALS TESTED ARE

NOT OK.

Exchange the FRU group 5

Exchange the FRU group 26

Exchange the FRU group 5

Exchange the FRU group 26

Exchange the FRU group 6

Exchange the FRU group 5

Exchange the FRU group 26

Exchange the FRU group 5

Exchange the FRU group 26

Exchange the FRU group 6

Exchange the FRU group 5

Exchange the FRU group 26

Exchange the FRU group 5

Exchange the FRU group 26

Exchange the FRU group 5

Exchange the FRU group 27

Exchange the FRU group 28

Exchange the FRU group 26

Exchange the FRU group 27

1-24

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 Panel Codes

1B1

1B2

1B3

1B4

1B5

1B6

Table 1-5 (Page 11 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

1A4

1A5

REMOTE/ALTERNATE CONSOLE CABLE DOWN

(WHEN WRAP BLOCK INSTALLED)

REMOTE/ALTERNATE CONSOLE PCA ERROR

Exchange the FRU group 29

Exchange the FRU group 26

1A6

1A7

WRAP BLOCK DOES NOT SEEM TO BE PRESENT

ON RSF PORT , OR SIGNALS TESTED ARE NOT

OK.

RSF CONSOLE CABLE DOWN (WHEN WRAP BLOCK

INSTALLED)

RSF CONSOLE PCA ERROR

Exchange the FRU group 27

Exchange the FRU group 30

1A8

1A9 TO

1AF

Unused

Exchange the FRU group 26

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

1B0 COMPLETION OF MCC TEST Progression code.

If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 2

START OF LOCAL CONSOLE LINK TEST

SUCCESSFUL LOCAL CONSOLE LINK TEST

START OF REMOTE/ALT CONSOLE LINK TEST

SUCCESSFUL REMOTE /ALT CONSOLE LINK TEST

START OF RSF CONSOLE LINK TEST

SUCCESSFUL RSF CONSOLE LINK TEST

INFORMATION ONLY

INFORMATION ONLY

1B7 to 1B9

1D0

1D1

Unused

START OF MCAC TEST.Progression code.

Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 2

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

1D2 ñ

1D3

ñ

1D4 ñ

1D5 ñ

1D6

1D7

ñ

ñ

SOLID ERROR IN MCAD REGISTERS (1 FRU )

100 MS TIMER OF MCAD KO

PERMANENT IR 1 IN IOIRV

PERMANENT IR 4 IN IOIRV

IR LEVEL 1 OF MCAD NOT REPORTED TO MOSS

PROCESSOR.

'MOSS INOP BIT' NOT ON AFTER RESET BY THE

RESET LINE IN MCCU

Exchange the FRU group 26

Exchange the FRU group 5

Exchange the FRU group 26

1D8 ñ Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

1D9

ñ

1DA ñ

1DB ñ

1DC to

1DF

PERMANENT IR 0 IN IOIRV

SOLID ERROR IN MCCU REGISTERS

SOLID ERROR IN MCCU REGISTERS

Unused

Exchange the FRU group 5

1E0

1E1

1E2

1E3

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

1E4 to 1E6

1E7

ñ

1E8 to 1EE

1EF

1F0 to 1FD

1FE

1FF

ñ

IOC TAG RESET FUNCTION KO

Unused

WATCHDOG INTERRUPT BIT ON IN MCCU

MOSS INOP BIT NOT SETTABLE IN MCCU

Unused

NO INTERRUPT REPORTING POSSIBLE IN MCCU

Unused

END OF MCAC TEST Progression code.

Unused

Control lost during return to RAM IML processor

Completion of MOSS diagnostics RAM part

Exchange the FRU group 26

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

Go to “MAP 0100: IOC Bus Trouble

Shooting” on page 2-1

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

Exchange the FRU group 26

Exchange the FRU group 5

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

Exchange the FRU group 26

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 2

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

Exchange the FRU group 25

Exchange the FRU group 2

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-25

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 12 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

200 to 9FF

Definition

Unused

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

A00

A01

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A or SWAD

Adapter is 'down'; Excess spurious errors

Moss level 0 error detection; PCA1; Adapter is 'down'

Exchange the FRU group 5

A02 ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; PCA1; PIO Bus Check;

Inbound parity

A03

A04

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; PCA1; PIO Bus Check;

Adapter not detected

Moss level 0 error detection; PCA1; PIO Timeout; Outbound; Address parity check

A05

A06

A07

A08

A09

A0A

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; PCA1; PIO Timeout; Outbound; Command/data parity check

Moss level 0 error detection; PCA2; Adapter is 'down'

Moss level 0 error detection; PCA2; PIO Bus Check;

Inbound parity

Moss level 0 error detection; PCA2; PIO Bus Check;

Adapter not detected

Moss level 0 error detection; PCA2; PIO Timeout; Outbound; Address parity check

Moss level 0 error detection; PCA2; PIO Timeout; Outbound; Command/data parity check

Exchange the FRU group 5

Exchange the FRU group 5

A0B ñ

A0C

A0D

A0E

A0F

A10

A11

A12

A13

A14

A15

A16

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; PCA3; Adapter is 'down'

Moss level 0 error detection; PCA3; PIO Bus Check;

Inbound parity

Moss level 0 error detection; PCA3; PIO Bus Check;

Adapter not detected

Moss level 0 error detection; PCA3; PIO Timeout; Outbound; Address parity check

Moss level 0 error detection; PCA3; PIO Timeout; Outbound; Command/data parity check

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Adapter is

'down'

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Adapter is

'down'; Excess spurious errors

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Adapter check;

1 usec counter parity

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Adapter check;

MIOC/CCU timeout parity

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO Bus check

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO Timeout

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Storage

ECC error;

Register space parity during main store.

Exchange the FRU group 5

Exchange the FRU group 5

Exchange the FRU group 20

Exchange the FRU group 42

A17

A18

A19

A1A

A1B

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Storage

ECC error;

Multiple bits in DIV Register

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Storage

ECC error; No bits active in DIV Register

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Exception; Address exception on main store data access

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Exception; Operation exception; CHCV Register invalid

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Exception; Register precision; CHP Register bits 0-7 are not zero

Exchange the FRU group 5. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

1-26

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 13 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

A1C

A1D

A1E

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Exception; Specification exception with invalid address on main store data access

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Exception; Multiple bits in DIV Register

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Exception; No bits active in DIV Register

Exchange the FRU group 5. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

A1F

A20

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Internal check; Cache parity check

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Internal check; Invalid address on CHP Register access

Exchange the FRU group 5

A21

A22

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Internal check; Multiple bits in DIV Register

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Adapter check; Step counter parity

A23

A24

A25

A26

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Adapter check; Half word/burst counter parity

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Adapter check; CCU busy; Time out

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Adapter check; MIOC time out

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Adapter check; MIOC parity check - in

Exchange the FRU group 5

Exchange the FRU group 20

A27

A28

A29

A2A

A2B

A2C

A2D

A2E

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Adapter check; MIOC parity check - out

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Adapter check; Adapter failure

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Adapter check; Multiple bits detected in Stat reg

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Adapter check; No CHIO in progress in Adapter Control Block

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Multiple bits detected in EIRV reg

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; No CHIO in progress in Adapter Control Block

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Device; Adapter check; Step counter parity

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Device; Adapter check; MIOC timeout

Exchange the FRU group 9

Exchange the FRU group 9

Exchange the FRU group 5

A2F

A30

A31

A32

A33

A34

A35

A36

A37

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Device; Adapter check; MIOC parity check - in

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Device; Adapter check; MIOC parity check - out

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Device; Adapter check; Adapter failure

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Device; Adapter check; Multiple bits detected in Stat reg

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Device; Adapter check; No Common Adapter Code running

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; PIO; Bus check;

Inbound parity

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; PIO; Bus check;

Adapter failure

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; PIO; Bus check;

Adapter not detected

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; PIO; Timeout;

Invalid command

Exchange the FRU group 20

Exchange the FRU group 5

Exchange the FRU group 20

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-27

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 14 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

A38

A39

A3A

A3B

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; PIO; Timeout;

Outbound address parity check

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; PIO; Timeout;

Adapter not detected

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; PIO; Timeout;

Adapter failure

Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; PIO; Timeout;

Multiple bits detected in Stat reg

Exchange the FRU group 20

A3C to A67 Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

A68 ñ Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Adapter is 'down'

A69

A6A

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Adapter is 'down';

Excess spurious errors

Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Adapter check;

Internal clock check 1

Exchange the FRU group 5

A6B

A6C

A6D

A6E

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Adapter check;

Internal clock check 2

Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Adapter check;

Multiple bits detected in Disconnect reg

Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter check; State counter parity

Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter check; Shift pulse counter parity

Exchange the FRU group 5

A6F

A70

A71

A72

A73

A74

A75

A76

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter check; Ground fault detected on a driver line

Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter check; Interface check

Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter check; Interface timeout

Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter check; Interface parity check

Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter check; Multiple bits detected in EB Stat reg

Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter check; Switch interface error

Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter check; Switch driver fault

Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter check; Switch serial link parity

Exchange the FRU group 5

Exchange the FRU group 5

A77

A78

A79

A7A

A7B

A7C

A7D

A7E

A7F

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter check; Switch invalid command

Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter check; Multiple bits detected in Device stat reg

Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter check; Adapter failure

Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter check; No Common Adapter Code running

Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; PIO; Bus check;

Inbound parity

Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; PIO; Bus check;

Adapter failure

Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; PIO; Bus check;

Adapter not detected

Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; PIO; Timeout;

Invalid command

Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; PIO; Timeout;

Outbound address parity check

Exchange the FRU group 5

Exchange the FRU group 5

1-28

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 15 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

A80

A81

A82

A83

A84

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; PIO; Timeout;

Overrun

Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; PIO; Timeout;

Adapter not detected

Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; PIO; Timeout;

Adapter failure

Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; PIO; time out;

Multiple bits detected in Stat register

Moss level 0 error detection; MCAD; Adapter is 'down'

Exchange the FRU group 5

A85

A86

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; MCAD; PIO; Bus check;

Inbound parity

Moss level 0 error detection; MCAD; PIO; Bus check;

Adapter failure

Exchange the FRU group 5

A87

A88

A89

A8A

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; MCAD; PIO; Bus check;

Adapter not detected

Moss level 0 error detection; MCAD; PIO; time out;

Invalid command

Moss level 0 error detection; MCAD; PIO; time out; Outbound parity check

Moss level 0 error detection; MCAD; PIO; time out;

Adapter not detected

Exchange the FRU group 5

A8B

A8C

A8D

A8E

A8F

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; MCAD; PIO; time out;

Adapter failure

Moss level 0 error detection; MCAD; PIO; time out; Multiple bits detected in Stat reg

Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; Adapter is 'down'

Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO Bus check

Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO time out

Exchange the FRU group 5

If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then exchange the FRU group 45; if loading from

HDD then exchange the FRU group

46

A90

A91

A92

A93

A94

A95

A96

A97

A98

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Storage ECC error; Register space parity during main store.

Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Storage ECC error; Multiple bits in DIV Register

Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Storage ECC error; No bits active in DIV Register

Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Exception;

Operation exception; CHCV Reg invalid

Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Exception;

Register precision; CHP Reg bits 0-7 are not zero

Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Exception;

Specification exception with invalid address on main store data access

Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Exception;

Address exception on main store data access

Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Exception;

Multiple bits in DIV Register

Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Exception; No bits active in DIV Register

Exchange the FRU group 43

Exchange the FRU group 15. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

Exchange the FRU group 15. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

A99

A9A

A9B

A9C

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Internal check; Cache parity check

Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Internal check; Invalid address on CHP Reg access

Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Internal check; Multiple bits in DIV Register

Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Multiple bits detected in EIRV reg

If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then exchange the FRU group 45; if loading from

HDD then exchange the FRU group

46

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-29

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 16 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

A9D

A9E

A9F

AA0

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; No CHIO in progress in Adapter Control Block

Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; PIO; Bus check;

Inbound parity

Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; PIO; Bus check;

Adapter failure

Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; PIO; Bus check;

Adapter not detected

If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then exchange the FRU group 45; if loading from

HDD then exchange the FRU group

46

AA1

AA2

AA3

AA4

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; PIO; time out; Invalid command

Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; PIO; time out; Outbound address parity check

Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; PIO; time out; Outbound command/data parity check

Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; PIO; time out;

Adapter failure

If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then exchange the FRU group 45; if loading from

HDD then exchange the FRU group

46

AA5 ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; PIO; time out; Multiple bits detected in Stat reg

If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then exchange the FRU group 45; if loading from

HDD then exchange the FRU group

46

AA6

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; TOD; Adapter is 'down'

AA7 ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; TOD; PIO; Bus check;

Inbound parity

Exchange the FRU group 2

AA8 ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; TOD; PIO; Bus check;

Adapter not detected

AA9

AAA

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; TOD; PIO; time out; Outbound address parity check

Moss level 0 error detection; TOD; PIO; time out; Outbound command/data parity check

Moss level 0 error detection; PLC; Adapter is 'down'

Exchange the FRU group 2

AAB ñ

AAC to

AAD

Unused

Exchange the FRU group 12

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

AAE ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; PLC; MMIO Interface error

OR Invalid address during main store data access ( ON level 2) exchange the FRU group 12. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

AAF ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; PLC; MMIO Parity error

OR Memory storage; Storage ECC; Data parity ( ON level 2)

Exchange the FRU group 12

AB0

AB1 ñ

Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

Exchange the FRU group 1

AB2

AB3

AB4

AB5

AB6

AB7

AB8

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; UC Bus; Bus is 'down'

Moss level 0 error detection; Register Storage; PIO

Storage ECC; Data parity whilst accessing MPC

Moss level 0 error detection; Register Storage; PIO

Storage ECC; Data parity whilst accessing MSC

Moss level 0 error detection; Register Storage; PIO

Storage ECC; Unresolved problem

Moss level 0 error detection; Register Storage; Storage

ECC; Check during PSV swap

Moss level 0 error detection; Memory Storage; CHIO

Storage ECC; Data parity

Moss level 0 error detection; Memory Storage; Storage

ECC; Data parity ( NOT ON level 2)

Moss level 0 error detection; Memory Storage; Storage

ECC; Instruction fetch parity

Exchange the FRU group 11. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

Exchange the FRU group 11. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

1-30

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 17 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

AB9

ABA

ABB

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; Loop; Excessive MOSS

IML loop is detected via a TOD interrupt

Moss level 0 error detection; Erroneous MOSS code;

Program error; IO address is not authorized Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by

Moss level 0 error detection; Diag code; Program error;

Power on reset / start; Unresolved

Exchange the FRU group 13 the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

ABC

ABD

ABE

ABF

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program error; Invalid BER set during Checkpoint Retry

Recovery

Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program error; Invalid BER set during Postponed Retry Recovery

Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program error; Invalid BER set during Transparent Retry

Recovery your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

Exchange the FRU group 13. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

AC0

AC1

AC2

AC3

AC4

AC5

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program error; Program request dispatcher - module

CHGH0PGM - is in an unexpected state

Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program error; Invalid adaptor ID present in module CHGH0BUS

Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program error; Ram processor is in an unexpected state

Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program error; Ros processor is in an unexpected state your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program error; Call address stack table is full

Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program error; Return address stack table is empty

Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program error; The type of BER created does not exist in the

BER table

Exchange the FRU group 13. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

AC6

AC7

AC8

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program error; Moss already IML'd routine before the IML routine your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious interrupt; CHIO error detected

Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious interrupt; Level 0 interrupt detected

Exchange the FRU group 13. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

AC9

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious interrupt; Level 0 interrupt in IOIRV detected

Exchange the FRU group 5. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

ACA

ACB

ACC

ACD

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious interrupt; PIO Bus check; No adaptor found with Last Priority Level

Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious interrupt; PIO Bus check; Instruction was not an IO type

Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious interrupt; PIO Bus check; Detected on level 2

Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious interrupt; PIO Bus check; Detected on level 6

Exchange the FRU group 9. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-31

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 18 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

ACE ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious interrupt; PIO time out; No adaptor found with Last Priority

Level

ACF

AD0

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious interrupt; PIO time out; Instruction was not an IO type

Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious interrupt; PIO time out; Detected on level 2

Exchange the FRU group 9. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

AD1

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious interrupt; PIO time out; Detected on level 6

AD2

AD3

AD4

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious interrupt; Program request detected in PIRV

Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception error; Addressing exception during Instruction fetch

Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception error; Addressing exception during Main store data access

Exchange the FRU group 9. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

Exchange the FRU group 11. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

AD5

AD6

AD7

AD8

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception error; Fixed point overflow exception

Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception error; Invalid address exception during non main store access

Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception error; Multiple bits detected in DIV

Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception error; Multiple bits detected in EIRV

Exchange the FRU group 11. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

AD9

ADA

ADB

ADC

ADD

ADE

ADF

AE0

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception error; Operation exception; Invalid opcode detected

Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception error; Register precision exception

Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception error;

Specification exception; Invalid address during Instruction fetch

Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception error;

Specification exception; Invalid address during Main store data access

( NOT ON level 2)

Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception error;

Specification exception; Invalid address during non

GPR access

Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception error;

Specification exception; Invalid execution of KI instruction

Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception error;

Specification exception; PSV bits (40-44-47) are not zero

Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Internal

Check; Cache register parity check

Exchange the FRU group 11. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

Exchange the FRU group 11. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

1-32

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 19 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

AE1

AE2

AE3

AE4

AE5

AE6

AE7

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Internal

Check; Invalid address during GPR access

Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Internal

Check; Invalid address during PSV swap

Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Internal

Check; Multiple bits detected in DIV

Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Internal

Check; Multiple bits detected in EIRV

Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Storage/ECC

Check; Multiple bits detected in DIV

Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Storage/ECC

Check; Multiple bits detected in EIRV

Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Storage/ECC

Check; No bits detected in DIV

Exchange the FRU group 11. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

Exchange the FRU group 11. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

AE8 to BFE Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

Exchange the FRU group 55.

B01

B02

B03

MLA internal diagnostic error

Error during MPC-MLA interface test

MOSS LAN adapter (MLA) hardware initialization error

B8D to B8E Hardware MMIO error

Exchange the FRU group 56.

Exchange the FRU group 57.

Exchange the FRU group 55. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange. A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

B8F

B90

Lan adapter check

MOSS LAN adapter (MLA) hardware initialization error

B91

B92

B93

B94

MOSS microcode error

Ring lobe media test failure

Ring signal lost while opening

Ring wire fault while opening

Exchange the FRU group 55.

Exchange the FRU group 55.

A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

Check LAN cable connections, if problem persists: Exchange the FRU group 55.

A LAN ring problem is suspected.

Use the

Token-Ring Network,

Problem Determination Guide

SX27-3710.

Check the LAN cable connections, if the problem persists: A LAN ring problem is suspected. Use the

Token-Ring Network, Problem Determination Guide SX27-3710.

B95

B96

B97

B98

Ring open frequency error

Ring time out while opening

Ring failure while opening

Ring beaconing while opening

A LAN ring problem is suspected.

Use the Token-Ring Network,

Problem Determination Guide

SX27-3710.

B99 Ring duplicate node address

Duplicate Node address. Exchange the FRU group 55. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange.

A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

B9A

B9B

B9C

B9D

Ring open request parameters

Ring open remove received

Ring open IMPL force received

Ring no monitor for RPL at open

A LAN ring problem is suspected.

Use the

Token-Ring Network,

Problem Determination Guide

SX27-3710.

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-33

3745 Panel Codes

BB0

BB1

BB2

BB3

BB4

BB5

BB6

Table 1-5 (Page 20 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

B9E Ring lobe wire fault at open

Check the LAN cable connections, if the problem persists: Exchange the

FRU group 55.

B9F Remote station connection time out

Check that the service processor is powered On, if yes: there was a LAN time out or a LAN problem or a service processor problem is suspected. Go to Service Processor

Installation and Maintenance manual, chapter "Service Processor Problem

Determination".

Communication lost between MOSS and MOSS-E.

BC0

BC1

BC2

BC3

BC4

BD0

BE0

Ring link lost

Ring DM/DISC received/acked

Ring FRMR received

Ring SABME received

Ring TI timer expired

Ring FRMR sent

Ring unexpected SABME received

Permanent ring beaconing

Ring lobe wire fault

Auto removal while beaconing

Ring remove received

Ring auto removal

FSM time out

Watchdog time out

Ÿ Check the physical connection between the 3745 and the service processor.

Ÿ Check that the service processor is powered ON.

Ÿ

Review the configuration of stations connected to the LAN.

The MOSS-to-MOSS-E connection will be automatically recovered when the number of broadcast frames goes under 200 per second.

If the problem continues a Service

Processor problem is suspected, go to

Service Processor Installation and

Maintenance manual, chapter

"Service Processor Problem Determination" or a MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

A Service Processor problem is suspected, go to Service Processor

Installation and Maintenance manual, chapter "Service Processor Problem

Determination" or a MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

A LAN ring problem is suspected.

Use the Token-Ring Network,

Problem Determination Guide

SX27-3710.

Check the LAN cable connections, if the problem persists: Exchange the

FRU group 55.

Exchange the FRU group 55.

A LAN problem is suspected. Use the Token-Ring Network, Problem

Determination Guide SX27-3710.

Check the LAN cable connections, if the problem persists: Exchange the

FRU group 55.

A Service Processor problem is suspected. Go to Service Processor

Installation and Maintenance manual, chapter "Service Processor Problem

Determination".

1-34

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 21 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

BFF

ñ

Moss level 0 Incoherence; Problem within the level 0 code

Exchange the FRU group 2. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

C00 to C03 Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

C04

C05

C06

C07

C08

C09

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Supervisor; Invalid SVTTRC

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Supervisor; More than one request

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Supervisor; Invalid SVTDRC

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Supervisor; Invalid TCB ID

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Supervisor; Invalid Adapter ID

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Supervisor; Invalid Timer request

A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

C0A

C0B

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Supervisor; Lost BER counter is full

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Supervisor; BER length null

Refer to logged BERs leading to overflow, or: exchange the FRU group

46.

A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

C0C

C0D

C0E

C0F

C10

C11

C12

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Supervisor; Invalid macro ID in CHGSUBEM

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Supervisor; Invalid adaptor ID in CHGSUBEA

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;

Keyboard/Display Support; Invalid function request

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;

Keyboard/Display Support; End I/O without FRB

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;

Keyboard/Display Support; Program interrupt without

FRB

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;

Keyboard/Display Support; Invalid interrupt

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;

Disk/Diskette Support; Invalid function request

A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

C13

C14 ñ

C15 to C16

C17

C18

C19

C1A

ñ

ñ

Unused

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;

Disk/Diskette Support; Invalid header label

Unused

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;

Disk/Diskette Support; Invalid LM elements

Unused

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;

Disk/Diskette Support; Invalid completion status with preemptive request

Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-35

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 22 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

C1B

C1C

C1D

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;

Disk/Diskette Support; Control record found

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;

Disk/Diskette Support; Invalid completion status with exception detected

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;

Disk/Diskette Support; Program problem detected by

CAC

A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

C1E

C1F

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;

Disk/Diskette Support; Invalid completion status with error detected

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;

Disk/Diskette Support; Invalid completion status with complete but with neither exception nor error detected

C20

C21

C22

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;

Disk/Diskette Support; Unexpected completion status or interrupt.

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;

Disk/Diskette Support; Bad disk IOCS initialize

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;

Disk/Diskette Support; Threshold exceeded on unexpected interrupt

A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

C23

C24

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU

Support; No action for Scanner AC hit

Unused

A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

C25

C26

C27

C28

C29

C2A

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU

Support; Undefined interrupt

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU

Support; Unexpected Mailbox IN rejected

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU

Support; Invalid ID from scanner selected

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU

Support; Invalid adaptor address

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU

Support; Undefined CHIO request

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU

Support; Switch adaptor CAC requests an ABEND

A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

C2B to

C2D

C2E ñ

C2F to C30

Unused

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU

Support; Invalid PCW command

Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

C31

C32

C33

C34

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Operator

Control; Load module not found

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Operator

Control; Logical Disk error

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Operator

Control; Invalid cancel request

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Operator

Control; Moss IML request by operator

A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

1-36

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 23 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

C35

C36

C37

C38

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Operator

Control; Data stream out is greater than 1024 bytes

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU

Functions; End of DCF application

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU

Functions; Incorrect load module identified

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU

Functions; Logical disk error

A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

C39

C3A

C3B

C3C

C3D

C3E

C3F

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU

Functions; Unknown operator control return code

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Transient

Tasks; Load module not found

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Transient

Tasks; Logical disk error

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Transient

Tasks; Unknown operator control return code

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Transient

Tasks; Conflicting dump file information

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Transient

Tasks; Scanner not installed or SCB not flagged "auto dump"

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Transient

Tasks; Control program invalid answer

A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

C40

C41

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Transient

Tasks; Disconnect not allowed

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Transient

Tasks; Buffer limit reached

C42

C43

C44

C45

C46

C47

C48

C49

C4A

C4B

C4C

C4D

C4E

C4F

C50

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Box Error

Logging; Invalid BER stack

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Mail Box

Support; Load module not found

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Mail Box

Support; Mail box request rejected

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Mail Box

Support;

Unsolicited call

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Mail Box

Support; Invalid RU

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Macro

Invocation; Started bit in request

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; System

IPL; Start IPL refused

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Disk

Functions; Disk unusable

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Disk

Functions; Unable to load CHGDFINT

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Power

Functions; Incorrect access to PCST

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Power

Functions; Invalid data - threshold

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Power

Functions; Next request received before RP

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Level 1;

Permanent HLIR - kill MOSS

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Level 1;

Excess amount of spurious errors

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Level 1;

Soft checker - snapshot

A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-37

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 24 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

C51

C52

C53

C54

C55

C56

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; MSD;

Invalid frame number

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; IMIN2; No timer IMIN2

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; TRSS;

NCP pointer not found

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; TRSS;

Invalid field format received

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; TRSS;

Invalid TIC storage

Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; TRSS;

TRA/TIC not installed or ASB not flagged "Auto TIC

Dump"

A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

C57 to C61

C62 to C7A

C7B to D00

Unused

MOSS microcode error

Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

D01

D02

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during

IML/Dump; Adapter busy - attn

Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during

IML/Dump; FRB busy

Exchange the FRU group 44

D03 to D04 Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

D05

D06

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during

IML/Dump; Adapter busy - CHIO

Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during

IML/Dump; Adapter busy - reset

Exchange the FRU group 44

D07 Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

D08

D09

D0A

D0B

D0C

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during

IML/Dump; SCA 1 not open

Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during

IML/Dump; SCA 2 not open

Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during

IML/Dump; Adapter not open

Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during

IML/Dump;

Pre-emptive request complete

Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during

IML/Dump;

Pre-emptive request rejected

Exchange the FRU group 45

Exchange the FRU group 46

Exchange the FRU group 44

D0D

D0E

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during

IML/Dump; SCA 1 already open

Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during

IML/Dump; SCA 2 already open

Exchange the FRU group 44

D0F to D10 Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

D11

D12

D13

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during

IML/Dump; FRB Program check

Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during

IML/Dump; BCL Program check

Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during

IML/Dump; Invalid PIO command (hardware & equipment checks)

Exchange the FRU group 44

Exchange the FRU group 44

Exchange the FRU group 44

D14to D1F Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

1-38

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 25 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

D20

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during

IML/Dump;

Indeterminate equipment check (hardware error in adapt.)

Exchange the FRU group 44

D21

D22 ñ

D23 to D27

Unused

Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during

IML/Dump; Device (SCA) ready (hardware error in adaptor)

Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then exchange the FRU group 45; if loading from

HDD then exchange the FRU group

46

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

D28 ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during

IML/Dump; Seek check (DATA transmission problems)

Exchange the FRU group 44

D29 to D2F

D30

D31

ñ

ñ

Unused

Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during

IML/Dump; Device (SCA) not ready (no error)

Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during

IML/Dump; Control record found (error/not successful class. sequence errors)

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then ensure the diskette is correctly inserted and that the diskette drive operator handle is closed. If no problem in this area, then exchange the FRU group 45

If loading from HDD then exchange the FRU group 46

If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then exchange the FRU group 45; if loading from

HDD then exchange the FRU group

46

D32

D33

D34

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during

IML/Dump; Sector Buffer Parity error

Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during

IML/dump;

Termination error with no specific error

Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during

IML/dump; Cylinder overrun

Exchange the FRU group 44

If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then exchange the FRU group 45 if loading from HDD then exchange the FRU group 46

D35 ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during

IML/dump; Write/Protect fault with FDD

The installed diskette is 'Write protected'. Replace the diskette with an equivalent which permits writing.

D36

D37

D38

D39

D3A

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during

IML/dump; Write fault with HDD

Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during

IML/dump; Halt during a CHIO operation

Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during

IML/dump; I/O bus parity error

Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during

IML/dump; CCB with no active CSB

Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during

IML/dump; Invalid command in CCB or SSB

Go to IBM 3745 Service Functions

Exchange the FRU group 7

Exchange the FRU group 44

D3B ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during

IML/dump; ERP invoked by DFA

If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then exchange the FRU group 45; if loading from

HDD then exchange the FRU group

46

D3C ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during

IML/dump; internal parity error

Exchange the FRU group 44

D3D ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during

IML/dump; data error (SSB byte 1)

If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then exchange the FRU group 21 If loading from

HDD then go to IBM 3745 Service

Functions

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-39

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 26 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

D3E

D3F

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during

IML/dump; record not found (L/operator intervention required)

Unused

If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then exchange the FRU group 45; if loading from

HDD then exchange the FRU group

46

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

D40

D41

D42

D43

D44

D45

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during

IML/dump; CRC/ECC error on ID

Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during

IML/dump; CRC/ECC error on data

Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during

IML/dump; bad track detected

Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during

IML/dump; format error detected

Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during

IML/dump; unable to find ID

Moss level 0 error detection; diskette errors during

IML/dump; format error detected

Go to

Go to

IBM 3745 Service Functions

IBM 3745 Service Functions

Exchange the FRU group 47

D46 to D4F

D50 ñ

Unused

Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during

IML/dump; disk change information

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then ensure the diskette is correctly inserted and that the diskette drive operator handle is closed. If no problem in this area, then exchange the FRU group 45

If loading from HDD then exchange the FRU group 46

D51 to D75 Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

D76 ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during

IML/dump; PIO MCK (non-recursive)

Exchange the FRU group 7

D77 to DF5 Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

DF6 ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during

IML/dump; PIO MCK (recursive) - (preemptive request class.)

Exchange the FRU group 7

DF7

DF8

ñ

Unused

Moss level 0 error detection; device errors during

IML/dump; dump directory entry not found

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then the problem may be a possible incorrect diskette in the drive. If OK then try the backup diskette. If problem still exists then exchange the FRU group

18

OR

If loading is from the disk then restore the disk. Refer to IBM 3745 Service

Functions If problem still exists then exchange the FRU group 48. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

1-40

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 27 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

DF9

DFA

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; Device errors during

IML/dump; hard disk not initialized

Moss level 0 error detection; Device errors during

IML/dump; hard disk not formatted

Restore the disk. Refer to IBM 3745

Service Functions If problem still exists then exchange the FRU group

48 go to page 1-49. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange;

A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

DFB

DFC

DFD

ñ

ñ

ñ

Moss level 0 error detection; Device errors during

IML/dump; invalid IML request

Moss level 0 error detection; Device errors during

IML/dump; volume IML check

Moss level 0 error detection; Device errors during

IML/dump; data compare check

If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then the problem may be a possible incorrect diskette in the drive. If OK then try the backup diskette. If problem still exists then exchange the FRU group

18

OR

If loading is from the disk then restore the disk. Refer to IBM 3745 Service

Functions If problem still exists then exchange the FRU group 48. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

DFE

DFF

F00

ñ

ñ

E00 to EFF

Moss level 0 error detection; Device errors during

IML/dump; disk time out

Moss level 0 error detection; Device errors during

IML/dump; diskette time out

Unused

Status/progression step; Start of MOSS dump

Exchange the FRU group 46. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

Exchange the FRU group 45. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

Normal progression code. If this code is displayed for more than 2 minutes, then a MOSS microcode problem is suspected.

Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

F01

F02

F03

F04

F05

Status/progression step; MOSS dump has been completed without error

Status/progression step which occurs during the IML sequence; IML Initialization

Status/progression step which occurs during the IML sequence; open adaptor

Status/progression step which occurs during the IML sequence; open secondary component address (either disk or diskette)

Status/progression step which occurs during the IML sequence; check disk or diskette ID n/a

Normal progression code. If this code is displayed for more than 2 minutes, then a MOSS microcode problem is suspected.

Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

F06 to F07 Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-41

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 28 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

F08

F09

F0A

Status/progression step which occurs during the IML sequence; find directory entry

Status/progression step which occurs during the IML sequence; IML end - go to MOSS loader

Status/progression step which occurs during the IML sequence; Ram entry (Start of MOSS Init step 1)

Normal progression code. If this code is displayed for more than 2 minutes, then a MOSS microcode problem is suspected.

Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

F0B

Status/progression step which occurs during the IML sequence; end of MOSS init step 1

Normal progression code. If this code is displayed during the 1st installation, a manual intervention is required to exchange the wrap block.

F0C

Status/progression step which occurs during the IML sequence; start of MOSS init step 2 (Moss level 7)

Normal progression code. If this code is displayed for more than two minutes, then suspect any adapters attached to the MOSS, or microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

MOSS diagnostics detected an error during the IML.

F0D

Status/progression step which occurs during the IML sequence; IML complete with errors detected during

MOSS diagnostics.

Ÿ Normally a reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.

Ÿ This code may be caused by a console problem which prevents the display of the reference code.

If this is the case, go to “3745

Console Symptoms” on page 1-10.

F0E

Status/progression step which occurs during the IML sequence; IML complete - MOSS ALONE

N/A

F0F

Status/progression step which occurs during the IML sequence; IML Complete - CCU connected - MOSS

OFFLINE

If this code appear without requested

IML (MOSS become alone during normal operations) look at the console for messages and go to

“3745 Console Symptoms” on page 1-10

F10

F11

F12

F13

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; Solid error during MIOC

operation

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CCU hardcheck during a CCU IPL in progress

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; Host IPL request during CCU IPL in progress

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; Unidentified

IPL selection

A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.

F14

F15

F16

F17

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CDS not correctly built by the CDF

Unused

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CCU memory test failed

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CCU test failed

A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.

If this code is displayed during IML:

1. Run IOC bus diagnostics to ensure that there is no adapter problem.

2. Run CCU diagnostics.

1-42

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 29 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

F18

F19

F1A

F1B

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; IOC BUS test failed

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; IPL port table has been incorrectly built via the CDF

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CLDP not accessible

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CLDP/SALT abend. (output 70)

A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.

F1C

F1D

F1E

F1F

F20

F21

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CLDP/MOSS interface error

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; NCP/EP init abend

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CLDP time out on 'IN MAILBOX' acknowledgement

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; MOSS time out on waiting NCP/EP init MB out

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; MOSS time out on waiting NCP/EP init MB in acknowledgement

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; NCP/EP

INIT/MOSS interface error acknowledgement

A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.

A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.

F22 to F23 Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

F24

F25

F26

F27

F28

F29

F2A

F2B

F2C

F2D

F2E

F2F

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; no scanner

IMLed after scanner IML routine (Phase 3)

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; no valid scanner in CDS

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; LSSD residual count > 7

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; LSSD string select error during a read or write LSSD

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; IPL phase 1A load module not accessible

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; IPL phase 1B load module not accessible

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; IPL phase 2 load module not accessible

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; IPL phase 3 load module not accessible

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; IPL phase 4 load module not accessible

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; too many

CCU RE-IPL (PGM abend or hardcheck)

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; wrong CCU

LSSD initialization

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; no IPL port is available (neither link nor channel) and no load module on the disk is available

A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.

There is a defect with the hard disk.

Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CPIT error:

F30

F31

Ÿ CPIT length different from CHGCONCP

Ÿ

Some CPIT fields not initialized

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; IPL phase 1C load module not accessible

A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.

F32

F33

F34

F35

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CCU check occurred during phase 1C

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; SALT not accessible

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CCU memory failure

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; Dispcrepancy between CLDP and 3746-900 CDF information

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-43

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 30 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

F36 to F47

Definition

Unused

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

F48

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CCU and

CACHE checkout failed SCTL checkout failed

A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.

F49 Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

F4A

F4B

F4C

F4D

F4E

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; SCTL initialization failed

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; switch checkout failed

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; permanent level 1 in CCU, no need to load CLDP

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; channel monitoring failure in normal monitor mode, during FB or SB

A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.

F4F

F50

F51

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; reset adapters can not be performed during FB or SB

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; problem detected by the CDF

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CP not set

ONLINE by the fallback or switchback

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; bus switching operation unsuccessful

F52

F53

F54

F55

F56

F57

F58

F59

F5A

F60

F61

F62

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; problem detected with the MCAD interface

Error detected during the IPL sequence; fallback function not supported

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; no buffer available for NCP during fallback

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; NCP / MOSS fallback interface error

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; interface problem between fallback-switchback and channel monitoring

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CCU power has dropped during the IPL

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; error during

SBK protocol

Error detected during MOSS IML diagnostics; IPL can not be performed on the selected CCU

Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CA configuration from CDF does not match the actual configuration

Error detected during MOSS IML Diagnostics; IPL can not be performed on CCU

IPL cancelled after IPL abort

Error detected during MOSS IML Diagnostics; IPL cancelled after a stop in phase 1 diagnostic

A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.

A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.

F63 to FD5 Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

FD6

FD7

FD8

Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL sequence; the control program loading is started from the Disk

Status/progression step; dump control program on

MOSS disk in progress

Status / Progression step; save control program on

MOSS disk in progress

If this code is displayed for more than

2 minutes, when the load/dump is via the disk, then refer to “How to Run

MOSS Diagnostics” on page 3-4 to aid problem isolation and refer to IBM

3745 Service Functions, "Hard Disk

Trouble Analysis".

FD9 to FE0 Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

1-44

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 31 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

FE1

FE2

Errors detected during IML sequence; disk initialization failure

Errors detected during IML sequence; disk load operation failure

A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14. Be aware that the IBM

3745 Service Functions, Chapter 11 may be used later during the investigation.

FE3

FE4

FE5

FE6

Errors detected during IML sequence; power error A get end of IML data

Unused

Errors detected during IML sequence; panel error

Errors detected during IML sequence; MIOC error with

CCU operation

A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14. Record “How to Run the

Control Panel Test” on page 3-8 which may assist problem isolation.

A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.

FE7

FE8

FE9

FEA

FEB

FEC to

FED

FEE

FEF

Unused

Errors detected during IML sequence; disk error when reading CDF

Errors detected during IML sequence; CDF not created

Errors detected during IML sequence; CDF access function(s) error

Errors detected during IML sequence; NCP time out on mailbox to CCU A

Unused

Errors detected during IML sequence; MOSS data saving error

Errors detected during IML sequence; disk error when reading Port swap file.

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14. Be aware that the IBM

3745 Service Functions, Chapter 11 may be used later during the investigation.

A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14. Be aware that the IBM

3745 Service Function Chapter 9 and

11 may be used later during the investigation.

A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14. Record whether this code can be resolved by use of the

Problem Determination Guide,

SA33-0096. Perform a MOSS IML but if problem occurs again Contact your support structure.

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14. Record whether this code can be resolved by use of the

Problem Determination Guide,

SA33-0096. Perform a MOSS IML but if problem occurs again Contact your support structure.

A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14. Be aware that the IBM

3745 Service Functions, Chapter 11 may be used later during the investigation.

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-45

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 32 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

Definition

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

FF0

FF1

FF2

FF3

Status/progression step which occur during the IPL sequence; IPL entered

Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL sequence; IPL phase 1 started

Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL sequence; IPL phase 2 started

Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL sequence; IPL phase 3 entered

If this code is displayed for more than

2 minutes, then a MOSS microcode problem is suspected.

Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

If this code is displayed for more than

2 minutes when:

1. The load/dump is via a channel, then go to “MAP 3500:

Activate/Deactivate Line Problem or Line Errors on the TSS” on page 2-7.

FF4

FF5

FF6

FF7

Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL sequence; IPL phase 4 entered

Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL sequence; the control program load/dump is started on a channel-attached 3745

Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL sequence; the control program load/dump is started on a link-attached 3745

Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL sequence; control program is loaded and initialization has started

2. The load/dump is via the disk, then run “How to Run MOSS

Diagnostics” on page 3-4 to aid problem isolation and refer to IBM

3745 Service Functions, "Hard

Disk Trouble Analysis".

OR if this code is displayed for more than

10 - 20 minutes (depending on IPL link speed) when:

3. The load/dump is via a link, then follow carefully the PD Guide.

If this code is displayed for more than

2 minutes, then go to “MAP 3500:

Activate/Deactivate Line Problem or

Line Errors on the TSS” on page 2-7.

If this code is displayed for more than

10 - 20 minutes (depending on IPL link speed) then follow the PD guide.

If this code is displayed for more than

2 minutes, then the CCU failed to initialize the control program. A control program problem is suspected.

Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

FF8

Status/Progression step which occurs during the IPL sequence; control program Load/Dump is started on a

ESCA attached 3756-900.

No action required

FF9

FFA

Unused

Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL sequence; IPL has completed but has detected a PCA1 adapter error; local console may not be accessible

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

Go to “How to Run the Console Link

Test for 3745 Models 130, 150, 160, and 170” on page 3-6 and run the local console link test. Record: exchange the FRU group 26 for possible exchange if problem still exists.

FFB

Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL sequence; IPL was cancelled by the 3745 console operator

No action required

FFC Unused

Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel

Message” on page 2-5

FFD

Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL sequence; IPL has completed; The MOSS IML was performed from the diskette; the control program is loaded and MOSS is operational

No action required

FFE

Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL sequence; IPL has been completed but has detected some error during the sequence.

A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.

1-46

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 Panel Codes

Table 1-5 (Page 33 of 33). Panel Codes. An

ñ

following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.

Panel

Code

FFF

Definition

Status/MOSS offline function is successfully ended.

Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group

Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number

No action required

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-47

FRU Group Table

Using the MIP FRU Group Table

Very important

The MIP FRU group table lists the FRU groups likely to be called in this manual.

This table covers MOSS/POWER FRU group for failures that prevent correct operation of the BRC function.

Ÿ

Each FRU group contains from one to three FRUs, listed by name and location.

Ÿ The “1st FRU” is the most likely to be failing. The “3rd FRU” is the least likely.

Ÿ Usually, only one FRU in an FRU group is failing, and you should try to reduce the FRU group

to the one failing FRU.

Ÿ If you can reproduce the 3745 failure, exchange FRUs one at a time until the failing FRUs are isolated.

Ÿ

As soon as you have recorded the FRU and location in the FRU Group, go to “3745 FRU

List” on page 1-53.

Always

1. Ensure that the failing area of the machine is available for service.

2. Consult the “Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1 before removing any FRUs.

3. Check for loose cards, cables, and crossovers before exchanging FRUs.

4. Run diagnostics after any repair action.

5. Follow the 'CE leaving' procedure before returning the machine to the customer.

The FRU group table starts on the next page.

1-48

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 FRU Group Table

Very important

Read the previous page before using this table.

FRU Group Table

Table 1-6 (Page 1 of 3). 3745 FRU Table

FRU

Group

1st FRU

Name Location

2nd FRU

Name Location

1

2

MPC/MPC2

01A-X0E

MPC/MPC2

01A-X0E

MCC/MAC

01A-X0H

3

4

5

6

7

MCC/MAC

01A-X0H

PCC 01A-X0B

MCC/MAC

01A-X0H

MPC/MPC2

01A-X0E

DFA 01A-X0G

MPC/MPC2

01A-X0E

MPC/MPC2

01A-X0E

MPC/MPC2

01A-X0E

DFA 01A-X0G

8

9

10

DFA 01A-X0G

MPC/MPC2

01A-X0E

PCC 01A-X0B

MPC/MPC2

01A-X0E

MCC/MAC

01A-X0H

MCC/MAC

01A-X0H

CONTROL PANEL

11

12

13

14

15

16

MSC

PCC

01A-X0E

01A-X0E

01A-X0F

01A-X0B

MPC/MPC2

MPC/MPC2

DFA 01A-X0G

DFA 01A-X0G

MPC/MPC2

01A-X0E

MPC/MPC2

01A-X0E

MSC 01A-X0F

PCC 01A-X0B

MPC/MPC2

01A-X0E

HDD 01D

3rd FRU

Name Location

DFA 01A-X0G

DFA 01A-X0G

MCC/MAC

01A-X0H

MCC/MAC

01A-X0H

MCC/MAC

01A-X0H

MPC/MPC2

01A-X0E

MPC/MPC2

01A-X0E

MPC/MPC2

01A-X0E

17

18

DFA

FDD

01A-X0G

01B

FDD 01B MPC/MPC2

01A-X0E

Cable Location

01A-Y0D1 to

01C-A1J1

01A-Y0C4 to

01D-A1J2

01A-Y0D4 to

01D-A1J1

01F-A1J3 to

01D-A1J3 and

01B-A1J2

01A-Y0C1 to

01B-A1J1

01F-A1J3 to

01D-A1J3 and

01B-A1J2

01A-Y0C1 to

01B-A1J1

01F-A1J3 to

01D-A1J3 and

01B-A1J2

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-49

FRU Group Table

Table 1-6 (Page 2 of 3). 3745 FRU Table

FRU

Group

1st FRU

Name Location

2nd FRU

Name Location

19 FDD 01B DFA 01A-X0G

20

21

MCC/MAC

01A-X0H

Diskette

MPC/MPC2

01A-X0E

DFA 01A-X0G

3rd FRU

Name Location

MPC/MPC2

01A-X0E

PUC 01G-V

FDD 01B

Cable Location

01A-Y0C1 to

01B-A1J1

01F-A1J3 to

01D-A1J3 and

01B-A1J2

01A-Y0C1 to

01B-A1J1

01F-A1J3 to

01D-A1J3 and

01B-A1J2

26

27

28

29

22

23

24

25

30

31

32

33

41

42

43

44

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

MPC/MPC2

01A-X0E

MPC/MPC2

01A-X0E

MPC/MPC2

01A-X0E

MPC/MPC2

01A-X0E

MCC/MAC

01A-X0H

MCC/MAC

01A-X0H

Local Console

Remote Console

RSF

PCC 01A-X0B

PCC 01A-X0B

MCC/MAC

01A-X0H

MSC 01A-X0F

CONTROL PANEL

PCC 01A-X0B

CONTROL PANEL

PCC 01A-X0B

Battery 01C-D1

PS Fan 01K

Logic Fan 01E

MSC 01A-X0F

MSC 01A-X0F

DFA 01A-X0G

PCC 01A-X0B

MSC 01A-X0F

DFA 01A-X0G

MSC 01A-X0F

Wrap Block

Console Cable

Console Cable

MPC/MPC2

01A-X0E

MOSS Power

PUC 01G-V

PCC

PCC

01A-X0B

CONTROL PANEL

01A-X0B

PCC 01A-X0B

PCC 01A-X0B

PCC 01A-X0B

MCC/MAC

01A-X0H

DFA 01A-X0G

MSC 01A-X0F

PCC 01A-X0B

MSC 01A-X0F

DFA 01A-X0G

MSC 01A-X0F

MPC/MPC2

01A-X0E

MPC/MPC2

01A-X0E

MPC/MPC2

01A-X0E

MPC/MPC2

01A-X0E

01A-Y0C5 to

01R-A1J3

01A-Y0B5 to

01R-A1J2

01A-Y0A5 to

01R-A1J1

01A-Y0A2 to

01G-A1YR

01A-Y0B2 to

01G-A1YQ

01A-Y0D1 to

01C-A1J1

01A-Y0D1 to

01C-A1J1

01A-Y0D1 to

01C-A1J1

01A-Y0B1 to

01C-D1J1 and

01C-B1J1

01A-Y0A1 to

01E-A0J1 and

01K-A0J1

01A-Y0A1 to

01E-A0J1 and

01K-A0J1

1-50

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

FRU Group Table

Table 1-6 (Page 3 of 3). 3745 FRU Table

FRU

Group

1st FRU

Name Location

2nd FRU

Name Location

45 DFA 01A-X0G FDD 01B

3rd FRU

Name Location

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

DFA

FDD

HDD

PUC

01A-X0G

01B

01D

01G-V

PS1 01F

PCC 01A-X0B

MPC/MPC2

01A-X0E

PCC 01A-X0B

DFA 01A-X0G

MLA 01A-X0D

MLA 01A-X0D

MLA 01A-X0D

MLA 01A-X0D

HDD

DFA

PCC

01D

01A-X0G

01A-X0B

PCC 01A-X0B

PS2 in PPB 01H

PCC 01A-X0B

EPO box 01S

MPC/MPC2

01A-X0E

MPC2 01A-X0E

MPC2 01A-X0E

MPC2 01A-X0E

MCC/MAC

01A-X0H

MSC 01A-X0F

MOSS Board

PCC 01A-X0B

Cable Location

01A-Y0C1 to

01B-A1J1

01F-A1J3 to

01D-A1J3 and

01B-A1J2

01A-Y0C4 to

01D-A1J2

01F-A1J3 to

01D-A1J3 and

01B-A1J2

01A-Y0C1 to

01B-A1J1

01F-A1J3 to

01D-A1J3 and

01B-A1J2

01A-Y0C4 to

01D-A1J2

01F-A1J3 to

01D-A1J3 and

01B-A1J2

01A-Y0A2 to

01G-A1YR

01A-Y0B2 to

01G-A1YQ

01A-Y0D2 to

01H-B1J8

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-51

FRU Group Table

3745 Cable Location

Table 1-7. 3745 Cable Location

From To

01A-Y0A1 01E-A0J1 01K-A0J1

01A-Y0A2

01A-Y0A3

01A-Y0A5

01A-Y0B1

01G-A1YR

01G-A1YP

01R-A1J1

01C-D1J1 01C-B1J1

01A-Y0B2

01A-Y0B3

01A-Y0B5

01A-Y0C1

01A-Y0C3

01A-Y0C4

01G-A1YQ

01G-A1YN

01R-A1J2

01B-A1J1

01L-B1J1 01L-B2J1

01D-A1J2

01A-Y0C5

01A-Y0D1

01A-Y0D2

01A-Y0D4

01A-Y0E3

01A-Y0E4

01F-A1J3

01H-B1J8

01H-B1J6

01H-B1J7

01F-A1J5

01F-A1J6

01F-A1J8 via 01L-B1

01F-A1J7 via 01L-B2

01H-A1J11

01F-A1J4

01R-A1J3

01C-A1J1

01H-B1J8

01D-A1J1

01H-B1J9

01F-A1J2

01D-A1J3 01B-A1J2

01C-C1

01E-A0J2

01K-A0J2

01M-A1A3

01M-A2A3

01L-A1A3

01L-A2A3

01S-A0J5/6/7/8

01G-A1YE

Name

AFD CCU/Power. Sense to PCC

CCU from/to MCC, PUC (cable 1)

POR PCC to CCU, LA, CA

RSF console from/to MCC

Panel: Battery/Ready LED

CCU from/to MCC, PUC (cable 2)

Channel from/to MCC, CAs

Remote console from/to MCC

Diskette data/control from/to DFA ac FAIL / POR

Disk data from/to DFA

Local console from/to MCC

Panel display from/to PCC

5 Volts to PCC from PPB

Disk control from/to DFA

PS2 power Control.

PWR ENT/Control from PS1 to PCC

Disk / Diskette power from PS1

EPO switch from panel to PPB

CCU fan box (Power) from PS2

Power fan box (Power) from PS2

LIB1

LIB1 or LIB3

LIB2

LIB1 or LIB2

Customer EPO

Multi voltage to CCU

1-52

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

DCRG

DFA

LIC1

LIC3

LIC4

LIC5

LIC6

MAC

DSKTE

DMUX

EAC

Fan1

Fan2

FDD

FESH

HDD

MCC

3745 FRU List

FRU Code

BATT

CADR

CAL6

CAL7

CBSP

CBC

CSC

CSP

08C

850

8A0

430

70C

0EC

Type

04C

06C

07C

FRU Name

Battery

CADR

CAL

CAL

CBSP

CBSP2

CBSP3

CBC

CSC

CSP

73C

0FC

DCREG

DFA

LIC1

LIC3

LIC4

LIC5

LIC6

MAC

Diskette

DMUX

EAC

Fan1

Fan2

FDD

FESH

HDD

20C

22C

23C

24C

25C

84C

10C

12C

14C

7EC

7FC

17C

18C

1AC

7BC MCC

MLA

MPC

MPC2

44C MLA

2BC MPC

2CC MPC2

3745 FRU List

Text

It is not necessary to disable any part of the machine or run diagnostics. Go to “Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.

Channel adapter driver receiver card. Go to “Disabling Procedure

0110: Preparing a CA for Maintenance” on page 1-61

Channel adapter logic card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0110: Preparing a CA for Maintenance” on page 1-61.

Channel adapter logic card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0110: Preparing a CA for Maintenance” on page 1-61.

Controller bus and service processor. Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways

Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.

Controller bus coupler. Refer to the

IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol

Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.

Scanner for medium low speed. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0120:

Preparing a TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62.

Communication scanner processor (associated with FESH card for high high speed lines. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a

TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62.

DC regulator card Go to “Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.

Disk file adapter card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for Maintenance” on page 1-65.

Remove the diskette from the FDD and exchange it.

Double multiplex card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a

TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62.

Ethernet adapter card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a

TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62.

“Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.

“Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.

Flexible disk drive. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the

MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for Maintenance” on page 1-65.

Front-end scanner (high speed). Go to “Disabling Procedure 0120:

Preparing a TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62.

Hard disk drive. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the

MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for Maintenance” on page 1-65.

Line interface coupler type 1 card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0150:

Preparing LIC Type 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 for Maintenance” on page 1-69.

Line interface coupler type 3 card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0150:

Preparing LIC Type 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 for Maintenance” on page 1-69.

Line interface coupler type 4 card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0150:

Preparing LIC Type 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 for Maintenance” on page 1-69.

Line interface coupler type 5 card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0150:

Preparing LIC Type 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 for Maintenance” on page 1-69.

Line interface coupler type 6 card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0150:

Preparing LIC Type 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 for Maintenance” on page 1-69.

MOSS adapter card for 3745 Model 17A. Go to “Disabling Procedure

0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for

Maintenance” on page 1-65.

MOSS control card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for Maintenance” on page 1-65.

MOSS LAN adapter card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to

Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for Maintenance” on page 1-65.

MOSS processor card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for Maintenance” on page 1-65.

MOSS processor card (specific for Model 17A). Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for

Maintenance” on page 1-65.

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-53

3745 FRU List

FRU Code

MSC

MSC2

PCC

PNLC

PS1

PS2

PUC

SALC

SCTL

SMUXA/B

STO4

STO8

TIC2

TRM

TERMC

TERMD

TERMI

TERMR

Type

2DC

2EC

7AC

MSC2

PCC

77C

46C

47C

85C

079C

71C

72C

87C

75C

3AC

3DC

76C

Control Panel

PS1

PS2

PUC

SALC

SCTL

SMUXA/B

STO4

STO8

TIC2

TRM

TERMC

7CC

7DC

86C

FRU Name

MSC

TERMD

TERMI

TERMR

Text

MOSS storage card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for Maintenance” on page 1-65

MOSS storage card (specific for Model 17A). Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for

Maintenance” on page 1-65.

Power control card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for Maintenance” on page 1-65.

Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for Maintenance” on page 1-65.

Power supply number 1. Go to “Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.

Power supply number 2. Go to “Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.

CCU card. Go to “3745 Diagnostic Requirement” on page 1-60 and follow 'CCU/IOC bus' requirements.

Scanner ALC. Refer to Airline Line Control Scanner RPQ 7L1148

Supplement to Service Documentation SY33-2077.

Storage control card. Go to “3745 Diagnostic Requirement” on page 1-60 and follow 'CCU/IOC bus' requirements.

Single multiplex card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a

TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62.

Storage card. Go to “3745 Diagnostic Requirement” on page 1-60 and follow 'CCU/IOC bus' requirements.

Storage card. Go to “3745 Diagnostic Requirement” on page 1-60 and follow 'CCU/IOC bus' requirements.

Token-ring interface coupler type 2. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0140:

Preparing a TRSS for Maintenance” on page 1-66.

Token-ring multiplexer card; Go to “Disabling Procedure 0140: Preparing a TRSS for Maintenance” on page 1-66.

Channel adapter IOC terminator card (specific for Model 17A). Go to

“3745 Diagnostic Requirement” on page 1-60 and follow 'CCU/IOC bus' requirements.

DMA terminator card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a

TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62

IOC terminator card. Go to “3745 Diagnostic Requirement” on page 1-60 and follow 'CCU/IOC bus' requirements.

IOC terminator card (specific for Model 17A). Go to “3745 Diagnostic

Requirement” on page 1-60 and follow 'CCU/IOC bus' requirements.

1-54

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 and Service Processor Maintenance

3745 and Service Processor Maintenance Using a CPN

The service processor console should be logged ON. If it is not go to “Console Use for Maintenance” on page 1-1 for logging ON and return here.

1. On the MOSS-E View window, click on Program (in the action bar).

2. Click on Search CPN.

3. Enter the CPN.

4. The controller icon corresponding to the CPN is highlighted. On the bottom line of the MOSS-E View window the type of controller (3745 or 3746-900) and its serial number are displayed.

5. Note the type of controller and double-click on the highlighted controller icon.

001

Was a 3745 Controller icon highlighted?

Yes No

002

Was a 3746-900 Controller icon highlighted?

Yes No

003

Go to Step 008.

004

Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.

005

The selected machine is a 3745.

Are you here for a hardware problem (with FRU)?

Yes No

006

For a 3745 microcode problem refer to the Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual.

Use the "Handling the Microcode Change Levels" procedure in the "Maintaining the Code Loaded on the Service Processor" chapter.

007

Ÿ

The 3745 Menu window is displayed.

Ÿ Click on the Problem Management option.

Ÿ Double-click on the Display Alarms option.

Ÿ On the next window, double-click on the alarm which has the CPN corresponding to your call.

Ÿ You obtain a FRU or a list of FRUs with the FRU location.

Ÿ Note this information and go to “3745 FRU List” on page 1-53 for FRU replacement.

008

The service processor icon is highlighted.

Are you here for a hardware problem (with FRU)?

Yes No

009

For a service processor microcode problem, refer to the Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual. Use the "Handling the Microcode Change Levels" procedure in the "Maintaining the

Code Loaded on the Service Processor" chapter.

010

Ÿ

On the MOSS-E View window, double click on the service processor icon.

(Step 010 continues)

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-55

3745 and Service Processor Maintenance

010 (continued)

Ÿ The Service Processor Menu window is displayed.

Ÿ Click on the Problem management option.

Ÿ Double-click on the Display Alarms option.

Ÿ The Display Alarms window is displayed.

Ÿ Record the SRC number of the alarm which has the CPN corresponding to your call.

Ÿ

Return to the Problem management window.

Ÿ

Double-click on the Manage Alarms/Errors/Events (SRCs).

Ÿ Select Alarms then click on OK.

Ÿ Double-click on the alarm which has the SRC number previously recorded.

Ÿ A FRU or a list of FRUs with the FRU location is displayed.

Ÿ Record this FRU list with each card fault probability.

Ÿ Go to "Service Processor Problem Determination" in the corresponding

Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual.

1-56

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 and Service Processor Maintenance

Service Processor Maintenance Using an SRC Sequence Number

The service processor console should be logged ON. If it is not, go to “Console Use for Maintenance” on page 1-1 for logging ON and return here.

1. On the MOSS-E View window, double click on the service processor icon.

2. The Service Processor Menu window is displayed.

3. Click on the Problem management option.

4. Double-click on the Manage Alarms/Errors/Events (SRCs) option.

5. Select the Alarm option then click on OK.

6. On the next window, double-click on the alarm which has the SRC number that you want.

7. A FRU or a list of FRUs with the FRU location is displayed.

8. Record this FRU list with each card fault probability.

9. Go to "Service Processor Problem Determination" in the corresponding Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual.

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-57

3745 and Service Processor Maintenance

Engineering Data Transfer

Overview

The engineering data can be transferred in two main ways:

Ÿ Optical disk or diskettes

Ÿ DCAF (Distributed Console Access Facility) via LAN, or SDLC.

The transfer can be done from:

Ÿ

The local service processor using optical disk or diskettes

Ÿ The remote service processor using DCAF.

Transferring Engineering Data from the Local Service Processor

Ÿ

You should be logged ON.

Ÿ

On the MOSS-E View window, double-click on the service processor icon.

Ÿ On the Service Processor Menu, click on the Operation Management option.

Ÿ Double-click on the Retrieve Engineering Data option.

Ÿ The Retrieve Engineering Data window is displayed, askin g if you have transferred the 3745 engineering data.

– If you click on YES:

The Engineering Data Retrieval window is displayed with a wait message. The

Save/Transfer Engineering Data window becomes available for selection.

- Click on your Copy to Diskette or Copy to Optical Disk option. Then follow the information displayed.

- At the end of the copy, double click on the Delete Engineering data window to delete the engineering data file on MOSS-E.

– If you click on NO you are directed to the MIP: Start page - 3745/3746-900 Maintenance

Actions. See “Transferring 3745 Engineering Data to MOSS-E.”

Transferring 3745 Engineering Data to MOSS-E

Ÿ From the MOSS-E View window, double-click on the 3745 icon.

Ÿ On the 3745 Menu window, click on the MOSS Console option.

Ÿ A MOSS window is displayed. Enter the PEM command on this window, and press Enter.

Ÿ

On the same window enter the SD (Super Diagnostic) function and press Enter.

Ÿ

On the Super Diagnostic window, select function 5 (transfer file to MOSS-E).

Ÿ Enter the file names to be transferred as specified hereafter and press Enter.

– CHGCDF for CDF

– CHGCIL for BERs

For other dump files, type DDD in menu 3 to check their availability :

– CHGDMP

– CHHDMPA

– CHHDMPB

– CHGTRSSA

– CHGTRSSB

– CHGCADSA

– CHGCADSB

Ÿ Enter PEM and press Enter to end.

Logon on the Remote Service Processor

Note

Before continuing, establish the physical connection with the local service processor.

Ÿ On the desk top screen, double-click on the Distributed Console Access Facility icon.

Ÿ A Distributed Console Access Facility-Icon View is displayed.

Ÿ

Double-click on the Controlling for the DCAF option.

Ÿ

On the Product Information window, click on OK.

Ÿ On the Distributed Console Access Facility, click on Services in the action bar.

1-58

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 and Service Processor Maintenance

Ÿ

Click on the Select a link Record option.

Ÿ On the DCAF Link Record Directory window, double-click on the desired link (LAN, SDLC)

Ÿ On the DCAF Target Password window, enter the password and click on OK.

Ÿ The DCAF Target/Monitoring/ALT+T is displayed.

Ÿ Return to the SDLC State Monitoring and click on Session in the action bar.

Ÿ Click on Active.

Transferring Engineering Data to the Remote Service Processor

Ÿ

On the SDLC State Active-Key Stroke Remote window, click on Services in the action bar.

Ÿ Click on Start File Transfer.

Ÿ The DCAF - File Transfer Utilities window is displayed.

Ÿ On this window:

– Enter the source file name:

K:|pedat|xxxxxxxx.zip (Note)

– Enter the destination file name (which can be the same).

– Do not select the compress option.

– Click on Receive.

Ÿ A DCAF - File Transfer Utility window is displayed showing the status.

Ÿ When the transfer is done, the message File Transfer Performed successfully is displayed. Click on OK.

Ÿ

Click on the Delete Engineering Data to delete engineering data file on MOSS-E.

Note: xxxxxxxx = Manufacturing plant and serial number of service processor.

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-59

Disabling Procedures

3745 Diagnostic Requirement

If all of the machine is available and the MOSS is running alone, go to “How to Run Internal Function Tests” on page 3-9 and run the appropriate diagnostic or perform other maintenance as required.

Table 1-8. 3745 Diagnostic Requirements

Diagnostic Go to

CA “Disabling Procedure 0110: Preparing a CA for Maintenance” on page 1-61.

CA wrap tests

ESS

HPTSS

MOSS

“Disabling Procedure 0110: Preparing a CA for Maintenance” on page 1-61.

“Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62.

“Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62.

“Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for

Maintenance” on page 1-65.

TRSS

TSS

LIC wrap test (IFT)

LIC wrap test (WTT)

CCU/IOC bus/CBA

“Disabling Procedure 0140: Preparing a TRSS for Maintenance” on page 1-66.

“Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62.

“Disabling Procedure 0150: Preparing LIC Type 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 for Maintenance” on page 1-69.

“How to Run the Wrap Test (WTT) for TSS, HPTSS, or 3746-900” on page 3-15.

The entire machine is required. Notify the operator to deactivate all the lines attached to the 3745 and to deactivate NCP. Run the requested diagnostics. If necessary refer to “How to Run Internal Function Tests” on page 3-9. Then go to

“Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000” on page 4-99. For CBA diagnostic you need the whole 3745 powered ON and in Offline mode, while the

3746-900 must be powered ON, error free, setted in Online mode with the CBC and its CBSP available in the CDF-E and not in concurrent mode.

To run the requested diagnostics, refer to “How to Run Internal Function Tests” on page 3-9 then go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.

1-60

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Disabling Procedures

Disabling Procedure 0110: Preparing a CA for Maintenance

Important

Before using this procedure, ensure that the

MOSS is online. Refer to “How to Put the

MOSS Online” on page 4-105 for more information.

Note: For information about any specific console message, refer to the

IBM 3745 Service Functions

Guide.

1. Ask the customer to disable the channel adapter and the associated channel adapter, if applicable.

Associated CAs:

Ÿ CA5 and CA6

Ÿ CA7 and CA8

2. At the 3745 console, select MENU 3 and type

CAS for channel adapter services.

3. Press SEND.

4. Type 4 for concurrent mode commands.

5. Press SEND and type the channel adapter number corresponding to the suspected CA

(in the CA number ===> field).

6. Press SEND.

7. Type SHT for shutdown in the command ===> field.

8. Press SEND.

9. Follow the instructions on the screen, then press SEND.

10. After the COMMAND COMPLETED has been displayed, press PF6 twice (in order to go back two screens) and enter the channel adapter number corresponding to the associated CA if required in the CA number ===> field.

11. Press SEND.

12. Type SHT for shutdown in the command

===> field.

13. Press SEND.

14. Follow the instructions on the screen, then press SEND.

15. Wait for COMMAND COMPLETED.

16. Referring to “How to Run Internal Function

Tests” on page 3-9, run the diagnostics on the suspected channel adapter.

.

17. Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-61

Disabling Procedures

Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a TSS/HPTSS/ESS for

Maintenance

Important

Before using this procedure, ensure that the

MOSS is online. If at this time MOSS is offline, set MOSS online to perform this procedure. Refer to “How to Put the MOSS Online” on page 4-105 for more information.

If you are coming from MAP 2100 or MAP 2130, go to Step 002.

001

Is the FRU a CSP card (CSP is one of the 2

HPTSS/ESS cards) ?

Yes No

002

1. Ask the customer to deactivate all the lines attached to the line adapter

(recorded as affected lines).

Wait until the customer has completed deactivating the lines.

2. Using the 3745 console, disconnect the line adapter from the NCP as follows: a. From menu 3, select TSS Services by entering TSS in the selection area.

b. From the TSS Services screen, choose select/release by entering 1 in the selection area. See

Figure 1-2 on page 1-63.

c. In the input area, enter an S followed by the line adapter number.

See Figure 1-3 on page 1-63.

d. Enter 3 in the selection area to choose Mode Control.

e. If, in the MSA display (upper part of the screen), the status of the scanner is Unknown Mode, then enter RT on the Mode Control screen enter and continue with the next Step 2f f. On Mode Control screen, enter DS to disconnect the line adapter. See

Figure 1-4 on page 1-64.

If deactivation of all the lines driven by this line adapter was not done, a screen showing the still active lines will be displayed. If the customer is unable to deactivate these lines, request his approval to force deactivation for these lines.

To force deactivation, enter F on the displayed screen.

Continue with the next step only when all lines have been deactivated and the line adapter has been disconnected.

g. Enter 1 in the selection area to choose select/release. See

Figure 1-2 on page 1-63.

h. Enter REL in the input area to release the disabled line adapter.

See Figure 1-3 on page 1-63.

Run the requested diagnostics (TSS,

HPTSS, or ESS).

Refer to Figure 1-5 on page 1-64. If necessary, refer to “How to Run Internal Function Tests” on page 3-9. Then go to

“Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis

0000” on page 4-99

003

The entire machine is required. Ask the customer to deactivate all the lines attached to the 3745 and to deactivate NCP. Then refer to “How to

Run Internal Function Tests” on page 3-9.

Note: You must never run the HPTSS/ESS diagnostics under concurrent maintenance before exchanging a probably defective

CSP card. This would cause other line adapters to go down.

1-62

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

à

CUSTOMER ID:

CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE

3745

X71:ð2ð415

X72:ðððð85

SERIAL NUMBER:

RUN-REQ

-------------------------------------------------------------- ð2/14/87 ðð:15

FUNCTION ON SCREEN: TSS SERVICES

1 SELECT/RELEASE :

2 DUMP/IML :

3 MODE CONTROL :

4 DPLY/ALT STORE :

5 DPLY/ALT BLOCKS:

6 DPLY/ALT LSR :

7 DPLY/ALT XREG :

8 ADDRESS COMPARE:

9 CHK-POINT TRACE:

1ð D/ALT HPTSS/ESS:

:

:

:

===>

ð

F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM

á ñ

Figure 1-2. TSS Service Screen

à

CUSTOMER ID:

CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE

3745

X71:ð2ð415

X72:ðððð85

SERIAL NUMBER:

ð

RUN-REQ

-------------------------------------------------------------- ð4/13/87 ð5:2ð

FUNCTION ON SCREEN: TSS SERVICES

1 SELECT/RELEASE :

2 DUMP/IML : - TO SELECT A SCANNER, ENTER:

3 MODE CONTROL :

4 DPLY/ALT STORE :

5 DPLY/ALT BLOCKS:

6 DPLY/ALT LSR

7 DPLY/ALT XREG

:

:

THE LINE ADAPTER NUMBER PRECEDED BY S (S1 TO S32)

OR

THE LINE ADDRESS

(TSS: ð TO 895, HPTSS: 1ð24 TO 1ð39)

) ==> 8 ADDRESS COMPARE: (ESS: 1ð56 TO 1ð71

9 CHK-POINT TRACE: - TO RELEASE SELECTED SCANNER, ENTER REL

1ð D/ALT HPTSS/ESS:

:

:

:

===>

F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM

á ñ

Figure 1-3. Select/Release Screen

Disabling Procedures

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-63

Disabling Procedures

à

CUSTOMER ID:

CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE

3745

X71:ð2ð415

X72:ðððð85

SERIAL NUMBER:

RUN-REQ

-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/87 ð1:22

FUNCTION ON SCREEN: TSS SERVICES

1 SELECT/RELEASE :

2 DUMP/IML :

3 MODE CONTROL : - SELECT SCANNER CONTROL COMMAND(SP, ST, CT, DS, RT) ==>

4 DPLY/ALT STORE :

5 DPLY/ALT BLOCKS: SP = STOP

6 DPLY/ALT LSR :

7 DPLY/ALT XREG :

8 ADDRESS COMPARE:

9 CHK-POINT TRACE:

1ð D/ALT HPTSS/ESS:

:

:

:

===>

ST = START

CT = CONNECT

DS = DELAYED DISCONNECT

RT = RESET

ð

F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM

á ñ

Figure 1-4. Mode Control Screen

à

CUSTOMER ID:

CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE

3745

X71:ð2ð415

X72:ðððð85

SERIAL NUMBER:

ð

F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM

á

RUN-REQ

-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/87 ð1:22

FUNCTION ON SCREEN: OFFLINE DIAGS

GROUP : ADP#: LINE:

1 ALL : : :

2 CCU : : :

3 IOCB: 1- 4:

4 CA : 1- 8:

5 TSS : 1-32: ð-31:

6 TRSS: 1- 2: 1- 2:

:

:

7 HTSS: 1- 8:

8 OLT : 1- 8:

9 ESS : 1- 8:

:

:

:

OPT= Y IF MODIFY :

OPTION REQUIRED :

: ENTER REQUEST ACCORDING TO THE DIAG MENU

: DIAG==>(A) ADP#==>(B) LINE==>

===>

OPT==>

F6:QUIT

ñ

(A)

Enter 5 here for TSS diagnostics or 7 for HPTSS/ESS.

(B)

Enter the number of the suspected adapter here.

Figure 1-5. TSS/HPTSS/ESS Diagnostic Selection Screen

1-64

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Disabling Procedures

Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for Maintenance

The MOSS can be disabled via the 3745 console or via the control panel. It is recommanded to use the console to put MOSS offline. If this is not possible, the control panel can be used.

Using the 3745 Console

1. Ensure that the customer is not using any of the 3745 consoles or the control panel.

2. On the control panel, check if the MOSS Inop indicator is ON or B is displayed. If so, it is not necessary to take the MOSS offline. Go to 6.

3. Select MENU 2.

4. Enter MOF to put the MOSS offline.

5. Press SEND.

(MOSS OFFLINE will be displayed on the console screen).

6. Then : a. If you were sent to this procedure from another procedure, return there now.

b. If the panel test or console link test was used to detect the FRU to be exchanged, go to “Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.

c. If not, using the table Table 1-9 run the appropriate diagnostics. Refer to

Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745

Diagnostics” on page 3-1. Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis

0000” on page 4-99.

Using the Control Panel

1. Ensure that the customer is not using any of the 3745 consoles or the control panel.

2. MOSS IML a. Ensure that the service mode is either 0 or 1.

b. Select function 1 on the control panel.

c. Press Valid.

When the MOSS IML starts, the MOSS will automatically become disabled and MOSS diagnostics will be run.

3. Then : a. If you were sent to this procedure from another procedure, return there now.

b. If the panel test or console link test was used to detect the FRU to be exchanged, go to “Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.

c. If not, using the table Table 1-9, run the appropriate diagnostics. Refer to

Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745

Diagnostics” on page 3-1. (MOSS diagnostics will have been started if a MOSS

IML was done). Then go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.

Table 1-9. Diagnostic Selection

FRU Location

DFA 01A-X0G

FDD 01B

HDD 01D

MCC/MAC 01A-X0H

MPC/MPC2 01A-X0E

MSC 01A-X0F

PCC 01A-X0B

CONTROL PANEL

Diagnostic to be Run

MOSS

MOSS (load from diskette)

MOSS

MOSS and console link test

MOSS

MOSS

MOSS and panel test

Panel test

Suspected

Area

MOSS

MOSS

MOSS

MOSS

MOSS

MOSS

PCSS

PCSS

Associated

Area

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

MOSS

MOSS

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-65

Disabling Procedures

Disabling Procedure 0140: Preparing a TRSS for Maintenance

Important

Before using this procedure, ensure that the

MOSS is online. Refer to “How to Put the

MOSS Online” on page 4-105 for more information.

1. Ask the customer to deactivate all the lines attached to this adapter.

Ÿ

Wait until the customer has completed deactivating the rings.

2. Using the 3745 console, disconnect the TRA from the NCP as follows: a. From Menu 3, select TRSS Services by entering TRS in the selection area.

b. From the TRSS Services screen, choose

select by entering 1 in the selection area.

See Figure 1-6 on page 1-67.

c. In the input area, enter the number of the

TRA. See Figure 1-7 on page 1-67.

d. Enter 2 in the selection area to choose

'Connect/Disc'. See Figure 1-6 on page 1-67.

e. On Connect/Disc screen, enter DS to disconnect the TRA. See Figure 1-8 on page 1-68.

If the TRSS can not successfully be disconnected (msg:function not performed), contact your support structure. Refer to

“Contacting Support” on page A-1.

3. Run the concurrent TRSS diagnostics using the adapter number. Refer to Figure 1-9 on page 1-68. If necessary, refer to “How to Run

Internal Function Tests” on page 3-9. Go to

“Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis

0000” on page 4-99.

1-66

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

à

CUSTOMER ID:

CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE

3745

X71:ð2ð415

X72:ðððð85

SERIAL NUMBER:

RUN-REQ

-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/87 ð1:22

FUNCTION ON SCREEN: TRSS SERVICES

1 SELECT :

2 CONNECT/DISC :

3 TRM REGS :

4 TIC INTR REG :

5 DPLY STORAGE :

6 DUMP :

7 DPLY SCB, SSB :

8 DPLY PARM BLK :

9 TIC ERR STAT :

:

:

:

:

===>1

ð

F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM

á ñ

Figure 1-6. TRSS Service Screen

à

CUSTOMER ID:

CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE

3745

X71:ð2ð415

X72:ðððð85

SERIAL NUMBER:

ð

RUN-REQ

-------------------------------------------------------------- ð2/1ð/87 ð3:3ð

FUNCTION ON SCREEN: TRSS SERVICES

1 SELECT :

2 CONNECT/DISC :

3 TRM REGS

TRA SELECTION

: ENTER THE TRA # ==>2 TRA# LINE ADDRESS TIC CCU

4 TIC INTR REG

5 DPLY STORAGE

:

:

6 DUMP :

7 DPLY SCB, SSB :

1

2

1ð88 1ð89

1ð9ð 1ð9ð

YY B

YN B

8 DPLY PARM BLK :

9 TIC ERR STAT :

:

:

: PRESS SEND TO CONFIRM

===>

:

F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM

á ñ

Figure 1-7. Select Screen

Disabling Procedures

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-67

Disabling Procedures

à

CUSTOMER ID:

CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE

3745

X71:ð2ð415

X72:ðððð85

SERIAL NUMBER:

RUN-REQ

-------------------------------------------------------------- 1ð/19/9ð ð9:32

FUNCTION ON SCREEN: TRSS SERVICES

1 SELECT :

2 CONNECT/DISC :

TRA CONNECT/DISCONNECT

3 TRM REGS :

4 TIC INTR REG :

5 DPLY STORAGE : TYPE CT TO CONNECT

DS TO DISCONNECT ==> 6 DUMP :

7 DPLY SCB, SSB :

8 DPLY PARM BLK :

9 TIC ERR STAT :

:

:

:

:

PRESS SEND TO CONFIRM

===>

ð

F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM

á ñ

Figure 1-8. Connect/Disconnect Screen

à

CUSTOMER ID:

CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE

3745

X71:ð2ð415

X72:ðððð85

SERIAL NUMBER:

ð

F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM

á

RUN-REQ

-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/87 ð1:22

FUNCTION ON SCREEN: ONLINE DIAGS

GROUP : ADP#: LINE:

1 ALL :

2 CCU : : :

3 IOCB: 1- 4:

4 CA : 1- 8:

5 TSS : 1-32: ð-31:

6 TRSS: 1- 2: 1- 2:

:

:

7 HTSS: 1- 8:

8 OLT : 1- 8:

9 ESS : 1- 8:

:

:

:

OPT= Y IF MODIFY :

OPTION REQUIRED :

: ENTER REQUEST ACCORDING TO THE DIAG MENU

: DIAG==>(A) ADP#==>(B) LINE==>

===>

OPT==>

F6:QUIT

ñ

(A)

Enter 6 here for TRSS diagnostics.

(B)

Enter the number of the suspected adapter here.

Figure 1-9. TRSS Diagnostic Selection Screen

1-68

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Disabling Procedures

Disabling Procedure 0150: Preparing LIC Type 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 for

Maintenance

Important

Wait until the customer has completed deactivating the lines.

Before using this procedure, ensure that the

MOSS is online. Refer to “How to Put the

MOSS Online” on page 4-105 for more information.

Using the 3745 console, disconnect the line adapter from the NCP as follows: a. From Menu 3, select TSS Services by entering TSS in the selection area.

You should have recorded the following information from the reference code and from the additional information (PF6) for use during this service call.

b. From the TSS Services screen, choose select/release by entering 1 in the selection area. See

Figure 1-11 on page 1-74.

Ÿ FRU and location

Ÿ Suspected adapter

Ÿ Affected lines.

c. In the input area, enter an S followed by the suspected adapter number. See Figure 1-12 on page 1-74.

If necessary, use the LIC/Line address tables to find the affected lines. Refer to “LIC/Line Address

Table” on page 1-73.

d. Enter 3 in the selection area to choose Mode Control. See

Figure 1-11 on page 1-74.

What you should do next:

001

– Ask the customer to stop the lines connected to the suspected LIC or pair of LICs for LIC type 5 and 6. A LIC pair is an odd numbered LIC plus an even numbered LIC. Refer to the IBM 3745

Connection and Integration Guide.

– Run the automatic wrap test on the LIC unit

(option 1) and the wrap test at tailgate level

(option 2). Refer to “How to Run the Wrap Test

(WTT) for TSS, HPTSS, or 3746-900” on page 3-15.

Did you get the message: 'Wrap test completed. The LIC is OK'?

Yes No

003

002

Go to Chapter 4, “3745 FRU Exchange” on page 4-1, then exchange the LIC card.

e. On the Mode Control screen, enter

DS to disconnect the line adapter.

See Figure 1-13 on page 1-75.

If deactivation of all the lines driven by this line adapter was not done, a screen showing active lines will be displayed. If the customer is unable to deactivate these lines, request his approval to force deactivation for these lines.

To force deactivation, enter F on the displayed screen.

Continue with the next action only when all lines have been deactivated and the line adapter has been disconnected.

f. Enter 1 in the selection area to choose select/release. See

Figure 1-11 on page 1-74.

g. Enter REL in the input area to release the disconnected line adapter. See Figure 1-13 on page 1-75.

Continue with Step 005.

Has “Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a

TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62 already been performed, or is the

3745 fully available?

Yes No

004

Ask the customer to deactivate all the lines attached to the suspected adapter.

005

– Run the concurrent TSS diagnostics using the number of the suspected adapter. Refer to

Figure 1-10 on page 1-72.

If necessary, refer to “How to Run Internal

Function Tests” on page 3-9.

(Step 005 continues)

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-69

Disabling Procedures

005 (continued)

Did the diagnostics run without error?

Yes No

006

Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result

Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.

007

– Note their positions and remove the modem or line cables from the LIC.

– If the LIC is type 1 or 4, install the wrap plug

(PN 65X8927) on the uppermost socket. See

Figure 1-17 on page 1-76 and Figure 1-14 on page 1-75.

– If the LIC is type 3, install the LIC wrap cable

(PN 65X8928) between the two sockets. See

Figure 1-17 on page 1-76 and Figure 1-15 on page 1-75.

– If the LIC is type 5 or 6, unplug the line cable at the customer wall frame and install the wrap plug (PN 11F4815) on the uppermost socket of the cassette. See Figure 1-18 on page 1-77 and Figure 1-16 on page 1-76.

Is the LIC type 1, 3, or 4?

Yes No

008

– Using the LID function, enter the line address in the input area of the displayed screen and record the line number displayed on the next sceen.

– Run only the RH59 routine of the concurrent TSS diagnostics using the number of the suspected adapter, and the line number recorded above, refer to

Figure 1-10 on page 1-72.

If necessary, refer to “How to Run Internal

Function Tests” on page 3-9.

Did the diagnostics run without error?

Yes No

009

Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange

Result Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.

010

– Change the wrap plug to the other socket, if any (LIC type 5).

– Rerun the RH59 routine of the TSS diagnostics.

(Step 010 continues)

010 (continued)

Did the diagnostics run without error?

Yes No

011

Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange

Result Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.

012

No trouble was found with this LIC.

– Remove the wrap plug.

Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result

Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.

013

– Using the LID function, enter the line address in the input area of the displayed screen and record the line number displayed on the next screen.

– Run only the RC01 routine of the concurrent

TSS diagnostics, using the number of the suspected adapter, and the line number recorded above. Refer to Figure 1-10 on page 1-72.

If necessary, refer to “How to Run Internal

Function Tests” on page 3-9.

Did the diagnostics run without error?

Yes No

014

Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result

Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.

015

Is the LIC type other than 3?

Yes No

016

Go to Step 024 on page 1-71.

017

Is the LIC type 1 or 4A?

Yes No

018

No trouble was found with this LIC.

– Remove the wrap plug and reconnect the modem cable.

Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result

Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.

1-70

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Disabling Procedures

019

– Change the wrap plug to the next downward socket of the LIC.

– Rerun the RC01 routine of the concurrent TSS diagnostics using the number of the suspected adapter. Refer to Figure 1-10 on page 1-72.

If necessary, refer to “How to Run Internal

Function Tests” on page 3-9.

Did the diagnostics run without error?

Yes No

020

Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result

Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.

021

Have you tested all the ports of this LIC with the wrap plug on?

Yes No

022

Go to Step 019.

023

No trouble was found with this LIC.

– Remove the wrap plug.

Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis

0000” on page 4-99.

024

– Turn the wrap cable around between the LIC sockets.

– Rerun the RC01 routine of the concurrent TSS diagnostics using the number of the suspected adapter. Refer to Figure 1-10 on page 1-72.

If necessary, refer to “How to Run Internal

Function Tests” on page 3-9.

Did the diagnostics run without error?

Yes No

025

– Remove the wrap cable.

Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result

Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.

026

No trouble was found with this LIC.

– Remove the Wrap cable.

(Step 026 continues)

026 (continued)

Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis

0000” on page 4-99.

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-71

Disabling Procedures

à

CUSTOMER ID:

CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE

3745

X71:ð2ð415

X72:ðððð85

SERIAL NUMBER:

RUN-REQ

-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/87 ð1:22

FUNCTION ON SCREEN: ONLINE DIAGS

GROUP :ADP# :LINE :

1 ALL :

2 CCU : :

3 IOCB: 1- 4:

4 CA : 1- 8:

5 TSS : 1-32: ð-31:

6 TRSS: 1- 2: 1- 2:

7 HTSS: 1- 8:

8 OLT : 1- 8:

:

:

:

:

:

9 ESS : 1- 8: :

OPT= Y IF MODIFY :

OPTION REQUIRED :

: ENTER REQUEST ACCORDING TO THE DIAG MENU

: DIAG==>(A) ADP#==>(B) LINE==>(C)

===>

ð

F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM

á

F6:QUIT

ñ

(A)

Enter 5 here for TSS diagnostics or 7 for HPTSS.

(B)

Enter the number of the suspected adapter here.

(C)

Enter the number of the line (00-15) or (00-31) here.

Figure 1-10. TSS/HPTSS Diagnostic Selection Screen

1-72

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

LIC/Line Address Table

┌───────────┬──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐

│ │ Line Address for LIC Type │

│ Location ├─────────────┬───────┬───────────┬────────────┬───────────┤

│ │ 1 - 4 │ 3 │ 5 │ 6 LS │ 6 HS │

├───────────┼─────────────┼───────┼───────────┼────────────┼───────────┤

│ ð1M-A1-C1 │ ð32-ð35 │ ð32 │ N/A │ N/A │ N/A │

│ ð1M-A1-D1 │ ð36-ð39 │ ð36 │

│ ð1M-A1-E1 │ ð4ð-ð43 │ ð4ð │

N/A │

N/A │

N/A

N/A

│ N/A

│ N/A

│ ð1M-A1-F1 │ ð44-ð47 │ ð44 │

│ ð1M-A1-G1 │ ð48-ð51 │ ð48 │

│ ð1M-A1-H1 │ ð52-ð55 │ ð52 │

│ ð1M-A1-J1 │ ð56-ð59 │ ð56 │

N/A │

N/A │

N/A │

N/A │

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

│ N/A

│ N/A

│ N/A

│ N/A

│ ð1M-A1-K1 │ ð6ð-ð63 │ ð6ð │ N/A │ N/A │ N/A │

├───────────┼─────────────┼───────┼───────────┼────────────┼───────────┤

│ ð1M-A2-C1 │ ððð-ðð3 │ ððð │

│ ð1M-A2-D1 │ ðð4-ðð7 │ ðð4 │

│ ð1M-A2-E1 │ ðð8-ð11 │ ðð8 │

│ ð1M-A2-F1 │ ð12-ð15 │ ð12 │

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

│ ð1M-A2-G1 │ ð16-ð19 │ ð16 │

│ ð1M-A2-H1 │ ð2ð-ð23 │ ð2ð │

│ ð1M-A2-J1 │ ð24-ð27 │ ð24 │

│ ð1M-A2-K1 │ ð28-ð31 │ ð28 │

N/A │

N/A │

N/A │

N/A │

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

│ N/A

│ N/A

│ N/A

│ N/A

├───────────┼─────────────┼───────┼───────────┼────────────┼───────────┤

│ ð1L-A1-C1 │ N/A │ N/A │ ð8ð-ð81 │ ð8ð │ ð8ð │

│ ð1L-A1-D1 │

│ ð1L-A1-E1 │

│ ð1L-A1-F1 │

│ ð1L-A1-G1 │

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

ð82-ð83

ð84-ð85

ð86-ð87

ð88-ð89

ð82

ð84

ð86

ð88

ð8ð

ð84

ð84

ð88

│ ð1L-A1-H1 │

│ ð1L-A1-J1 │

N/A

N/A

│ N/A │ ð9ð-ð91 │

│ N/A │ ð92-ð93 │

ð9ð

ð92

│ ð88

│ ð92

│ ð1L-A1-K1 │ N/A │ N/A │ ð94-ð95 │ ð94 │ ð92 │

├───────────┼─────────────┼───────┼───────────┼────────────┼───────────┤

│ ð1L-A2-C1 │ 128-131 │ 128 │ ð64-ð65 │

│ ð1L-A2-D1 │ 132-135 │ 132 │ ð66-ð67 │

│ ð1L-A2-E1 │ 136-139 │ 136 │ ð68-ð69 │

│ ð1L-A2-F1 │ 14ð-143 │ 14ð │ ð7ð-ð71 │

│ ð1L-A2-G1 │ 144-147 │ 144 │ ð72-ð73 │

│ ð1L-A2-H1 │ 148-151 │ 148 │ ð74-ð75 │

ð64

ð66

ð68

ð7ð

ð72

ð74

ð64

ð64

ð68

ð68

ð72

ð72

│ ð1L-A2-J1 │ 152-155 │ 152 │ ð76-ð77 │

│ ð1L-A2-K1 │ 156-159 │ 156 │ ð78-ð79 │

ð76

ð78

ð76

ð76

└───────────┴─────────────┴───────┴───────────┴────────────┴───────────┘

Disabling Procedures

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-73

Disabling Procedures

à

CUSTOMER ID:

CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE

3745

X71:ð2ð415

X72:ðððð85

SERIAL NUMBER:

RUN-REQ

-------------------------------------------------------------- ð2/14/87 ðð:15

FUNCTION ON SCREEN: TSS SERVICES

1 SELECT/RELEASE :

2 DUMP/IML :

3 MODE CONTROL :

4 DPLY/ALT STORE :

5 DPLY/ALT BLOCKS:

6 DPLY/ALT LSR :

7 DPLY/ALT XREG :

8 ADDRESS COMPARE:

9 CHK-POINT TRACE:

1ð D/ALT HPTSS/ESS:

:

:

:

===>

ð

F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM

á ñ

Figure 1-11. TSS Service Screen

à

CUSTOMER ID:

CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE

3745

X71:ð2ð415

X72:ðððð85

SERIAL NUMBER:

ð

RUN-REQ

-------------------------------------------------------------- ð4/13/87 ð5:2ð

FUNCTION ON SCREEN: TSS SERVICES

1 SELECT/RELEASE :

2 DUMP/IML : - TO SELECT A SCANNER, ENTER:

3 MODE CONTROL :

4 DPLY/ALT STORE :

5 DPLY/ALT BLOCKS:

6 DPLY/ALT LSR

7 DPLY/ALT XREG

:

:

THE LINE ADAPTER NUMBER PRECEDED BY S (S1 TO S32)

OR

THE LINE ADDRESS

(TSS: ð TO 895, HPTSS: 1ð24 TO 1ð39)

) ==> 8 ADDRESS COMPARE: (ESS: 1ð56 TO 1ð71

9 CHK-POINT TRACE: - TO RELEASE SELECTED SCANNER, ENTER REL

1ð D/ALT HPTSS/ESS:

:

:

:

===>

F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM

á ñ

Figure 1-12. Select/Release Screen

1-74

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

à

CUSTOMER ID:

CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE

3745

X71:ð2ð415

X72:ðððð85

SERIAL NUMBER:

RUN-REQ

-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/87 ð1:22

FUNCTION ON SCREEN: TSS SERVICES

1 SELECT/RELEASE :

2 DUMP/IML :

3 MODE CONTROL : - SELECT SCANNER CONTROL COMMAND(SP, ST, CT, DS, RT) ==>

4 DPLY/ALT STORE :

5 DPLY/ALT BLOCKS: SP = STOP

6 DPLY/ALT LSR :

7 DPLY/ALT XREG :

8 ADDRESS COMPARE:

9 CHK-POINT TRACE:

1ð D/ALT HPTSS/ESS:

:

:

:

===>

ST = START

CT = CONNECT

DS = DELAYED DISCONNECT

RT = RESET

ð

F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM

á ñ

Figure 1-13. Mode Control Screen

Disabling Procedures

Figure 1-14. LIC Types 1 and 4 Wrap Plug

(PN 65X8927)

Figure 1-15. LIC Type 3 Wrap Cable (PN 65X8928)

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-75

Disabling Procedures

Figure 1-16. LIC Types 5 and 6 Wrap Plug

(PN 11F4815)

Note: LIC 4B uses only port 0.

Figure 1-17. LIC Types 1, 3, and 4

1-76

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Port 0

W

X

Y

Lever

Switch

Z

Port 1

TYPE Knob Color

LIC5 Black

Figure 1-18. LIC Types 5 and 6

Port 0

W

X

Y

TYPE Knob Color

LIC6 Black

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-77

3745 Control Panel

3745 Control Panel Use

Attention: Providing that the UEPO switch has not been activated, the control panel always has power and will display information on power control and service even though the

3745 is powered OFF.

Purpose of the Control Panel

The control panel allows the execution of functions which:

1. Are not possible via the console.

2. Must to be operational before the MOSS is

IMLed.

Uses of the Control Panel

The control panel is used to:

Ÿ

Control the power

Operations from the panel for power are:

– Set Power Control Mode to Network,

Local, or Remote

– Power On/Power On reset

– Power Off

– Unit Emergency Power Off

Ÿ

Perform basic functions which are:

– General IPL from disk

– MOSS IML from disk

– MOSS dump

– Request local console

– Force local console

– Panel test

– Remote/Alternate console link test

– RSF console link test

– Local console link test

– Load from diskette

– Loop on MOSS diagnostics

– Display stacked errors

Ÿ Indicate the machine status via indicators which show:

– Function selected

– Hex code displayed

– Current service mode

– Power control mode

– Console in use

– All channel adapters disabled

– MOSS inoperative

– MOSS message waiting

– Power On Indicator ON

Ÿ Sound an audible alarm if an invalid action is attempted.

1-78

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 Control Panel

Explanation of 3745 Panel Keys,

LEDs, and Switches

Refer to Figure 1-19 on page 1-80 for the location of the keys and switches.

The following three keys allow the customer to scroll the different options available.

1. Function

2. Service Mode.

3. Power Control

Each scrolled digit is set blinking on the panel display.

Validate Key:

After pressing this key, the selected digit stops blinking and the chosen option is performed.

Any options not validated disappear after a time out of 60 seconds.

Exit Key:

Pressing this key will cancel the scrolled option.

Power On/Reset Key:

When the function digit is '0' and service mode is '0' or '1', this key will start a power on reset sequence followed by a general IPL. Power On should not be pressed until after a 10-second delay from Power Off.

Power Off Key:

This key initiates a 'power down' sequence.

Unit Emergency Power Off (UEPO)

Switch:

When this switch is switched downwards, power is removed from the machine and a mechanical interlock locks the switch in the OFF position. The machine can not be powered ON until a CE resets the interlock and sets the switch upwards which enables power ON.

Power On Indicator

This indicator is a green LED. It turns ON when the 3745 starts to power ON and turns OFF as soon as the machine powers down. Refer to

Figure 1-19 on page 1-80. It is located to the right of the Power On/Reset key.

Control Panel Display Description

The control panel display is a gaz panel with various fields that can have different values. The meaning of each value is given in Table 1-10 on page 1-81.

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-79

3745 Control Panel

Code

Function

Service Mode

Power Control

Function

Service Mode

MOSS MSG

MOSS Inop

All CAs Disabled

Console In Use

Power Control

Validate

Exit

Power On

Reset

Power Control

Power Off

Unit

Emergency

Only

OFF

Figure 1-19. 3745 Control Panel Layout

1-80

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 Control Panel

Table 1-10. Panel Display Values

Indicator Display

Function 0

1

2

3

7

8

9

4

5

6

Code

Service Mode

Power Control

Console in Use

All CAs Disabled

MOSS Inoperative

MOSS Message

A

B

000 to FFF

0

1

2

3

A to D

1

2

3

1

2

3

Blank

Blank

Blank

Description

General IPL.

MOSS IML.

MOSS dump.

Request local console.

Force local console.

Panel test.

Remote/Alternate console link test.

RSF console link test.

Local console link test.

IML from diskette.

This function must not be used with service function mode

2.

Loop on MOSS diagnostics.

Display stacked errors.

A 3 hex character code which shows function progress codes and error codes. A code which blinks indicates an error condition has been detected. For more information on the meaning of these codes, refer to the “3745 Control

Panel Codes” on page 1-15.

Normal: the functions from 0 to 9 are available.

Maintenance 1: the functions from 0 to B are available.

Maintenance 2: for functions 1, 2, MOSS diagnostics will be bypassed.

Maintenance 3: used for installation. Allows function 9 only.

Used with the Display Stacked Error function.

Host: the 3745 is powered ON or OFF from the host systems. If ac power is lost then restored, an Auto Restart will be performed.

Network: the 3745 is powered ON by either a scheduled power ON or Power On Reset on the control panel. If ac power is lost then restored, an Auto Restart will be performed. The 3745 is powered OFF by a command received via NCP.

Local: the 3745 is powered ON from Power On Reset and powered OFF from Power Off on the control panel.

The remote or alternate console is in use.

The RSF modem-to-console connection is in use.

The local console is in use.

Indicator ON: indicates all channel adapters are disabled.

Indicator OFF: indicates that at least one channel adapter is enabled.

Indicator ON: the MOSS is not available for the CCU.

Indicator OFF: the MOSS is powered ON and available.

Indicator ON: a message is displayed on the 3745 console.

Indicator OFF: no messages are waiting to be displayed on the 3745 console.

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-81

3745 Control Panel

How to Perform 3745 Control Panel Operations

Important

Before working on non-customer access areas of the 3745, power control should be set to

Local Mode. This can be done as follows:

1. Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 3, Local Mode.

2. Press Validate.

0FF4 x 3 x x x x

Or, when NCP is IPLed from the hard disk:

0000 x 3 x x x x x = variable values.

Power On Reset

To perform this function:

Start from machine power OFF with Service

Mode either 0 or 1 and the default value for Func-

tion digit at 0.

1. Allow a 10-second delay from power OFF.

2. Press Power On Reset.

A power ON reset sequence will be executed followed by a general IPL. At successful completion of the operation, the display will be as follows:

0FF4 x 3 x x x x

Or, when NCP is IPLed from the hard disk:

0000 x 3 x x x x

MOSS IML

1. Using Function, scroll till the value is 1,

MOSS IML.

2. Press Validate.

3. This initiates a MOSS reset followed by a

MOSS IML.

At successful completion of the operation, the display will be as follows:

When MOSS was alone prior to the IML:

1F0E x 3 x x x x

Or, when MOSS was not alone prior to the IML:

1F0F x 3 x x x x x = variable values.

x = variable values.

General IPL

1. Using Function, scroll till the value is 0,

General IPL.

2. Press Validate.

A general reset, MOSS IML, CCU IPL, and a scanner IML is executed and the CLDP is loaded.

At successful completion of the operation, the display will be as follows:

MOSS Dump

1. Using Function, scroll till the value is 2,

MOSS DUMP.

2. Press Validate. A MOSS reset and dump of

MOSS microcode onto disk will be executed.

At successful conclusion of the operation, the display will be as follows:

2F01 x 3 x x x x x = variable values.

3. Perform a MOSS IML to return to normal mode (see preceding procedure).

1-82

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 Control Panel

Request Local Console

1. Using Function, scroll till the value is 3,

Request local console.

2. Press Validate.

A message is sent to inform the remote/alternate or RSF console customer that the local console customer wants to log on at the local console.

Option B:

1. Using Service Mode, scroll till the value is 1,

Maintenance 1 mode.

2. Press Validate.

3. Using Function, scroll till the value is 9, Load from diskette.

4. Press Validate.

A MOSS reset followed by a MOSS IML will be executed.

Force Local Console

1. Using Function, scroll till the value is 4, Force local console.

2. Press Validate.

The link to the remote/alternate or RSF console is disconnected to allow the local console customer to log on.

Panel Test and Console Link

Tests

See the separate detailed procedures in

Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745 Diagnostics” on page 3-1.

Loop on MOSS Diagnostics

1. Using Service Mode, scroll till the value is 1,

Maintenance 1 mode.

2. Press Validate.

3. Using Function, scroll till the value is A, Loop on MOSS diagnostics.

4. Press Validate.

The diagnostic MOSS code loops until an error is detected and the error code is displayed.

Press Exit to terminate the diagnostic loop.

Load from Diskette

1. Insert diskette 1 into the diskette drive.

2. Close the diskette drive (by turning or pulling the door latch).

3. Two options are available:

Option A:

1. Using Service Mode, scroll till the value is 0,

Normal mode.

2. Press Validate.

3. Using Function, scroll till the value is 9, Load from diskette.

4. Press Validate.

A general reset, MOSS IML, CCU IPL, and a scanner IML is executed and the CLDP is loaded.

Display Stacked Errors

1. Using Service Mode, scroll till the value is 1,

Maintenance 1 mode.

2. Press Validate.

3. Using Function, scroll till the value is B,

Display stacked errors

4. Press Validate.

5. Using Service Mode, scroll till the value is A,

Display the First Stacked Error

6. Press Validate.

7. Using Service Mode, scroll till the value is B,

Display the Second Stacked Error

8. Press Validate.

9. Similary stacked errors 3 and 4 are displayed by selecting Service Mode C and D.

Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting

1-83

3745 MAPs

1-84

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 MAPs

Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation

IOC Bus MAPs

MAP 0100: IOC Bus Trouble Shooting

Symptom Explanation

IOC bus error detected but not fixed by diagnostics or autoBER.

If you have an intermittent problem, consider that any of the conditions given in the above table can cause the problem.

001

Are the FRUs: PUC, TERMI, TREMC, or TERMR indicated by the diagnostics or reference code?

Yes No

002

The problem origin can be the channel adapter or line adapter

– Power the 3745 OFF as follows:

Ÿ

Put the power control in local mode:

– Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 3.

– Press Validate.

Ÿ Press Power Off.

– Remove all line adapters

– Press Power On Reset.

– Run the channel adapter diagnostics

Are they running error free?

Yes No

003

Go to Step 008.

004

One line adapter may be failing. Go to Step

017 on page 2-2.

005

– Press Power Off.

(Step 005 continues)

Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom

Ÿ PUC

Ÿ

TERMI

Ÿ TERMC

Ÿ

TERMR

Ÿ LAs ( TRM/CSP/CSC )

Ÿ CAL

Ÿ Basic board

005 (continued)

– Change the TERMI and/or PUC accordingly.

– See “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.

– And/or “TERMD/TERMI Exchange Procedure” on page 4-62.

– Change the TERMC and/or TERMR accordingly. See “TERMC/TERMR Exchange

Procedure” on page 4-61.

– Press Power On Reset.

– Run the diagnostics.

Are they running error free?

Yes No

006

Go to Step 002.

007

Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.

008

– Press Power Off.

– Replug all line adapters.

– Unplug all channel adapters.

– Press Power On Reset.

– Run the line adapter diagnostics.

Are they running error free?

Yes No

009

Change the basic board. Go to “Exchange

Precautions” on page 4-1.

010

(Step 010 continues)

Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997

2-1

3745 MAPs

010 (continued)

– Press Power Off.

– Replug the first channel adapter.

– Press Power On Reset.

– Run the channel adapter diagnostics on this channel.

Are they running error free?

Yes No

011

– Press Power Off.

– Change the channel adapter you have just replugged.

– Press Power On Reset.

– Run channel adapter diagnostics on this channel.

Are they running error free?

Yes No

012

Change the basic board. Go to

“Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.

013

Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.

014

– Press Power Off.

– Replug next channel adapter.

– Press Power On Reset.

– Run the channel adapter diagnostics on this channel.

Are they running error free?

Yes No

015

Change the channel adapter you have just replugged.

016

Go to Step 014.

017

– Press Power Off.

– Replug first line adapter.

– Press Power On Reset.

– Run the line adapter diagnostics.

Are they running error free?

Yes No

018

(Step 018 continues)

018 (continued)

– Press Power Off.

– Change the line adapter you have just replugged.

– Press Power On Reset.

– Run the line adapter diagnostics.

Are they running error free?

Yes No

019

Change the basic board. Go to

“Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.

020

Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.

021

– Press Power Off.

– Replug the next line adapter.

– Press Power On Reset.

– Run the line adapter diagnostics.

Are they running error free?

Yes No

022

Change the line adapter you have just replugged.

023

Go to Step 021.

2-2

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 MOSS MAPs

MAP 3200: MOSS Control Panel Code 001

Symptom Explanation

001 displayed on control panel

Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom

Ÿ PCC

Ÿ MPC

Ÿ MSC

Ÿ PS1

If the problem is intermittent, consider that any of the conditions given in the above box can be involved.

If the nature of the fault does not allow control panel actions, exchange the FRU group 36 on page 1-51.

001

There is a LED mounted on the MPC card

(01A-X0E).

Is the MPC LED permanently ON or blinking?

Yes No

002

Was the MPC LED ON during the reset function execution?

Yes No

003

Exchange the FRU group 32. Go to

“3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.

004

Exchange the FRU group 22. Go to “3745

FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.

005

Is the MPC LED permanently ON?

Yes No

006

Exchange the FRU group 31. Go to “3745

FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.

007

Exchange the FRU group 22. Go to “3745 FRU

Group Table” on page 1-49.

3745 MAPs

Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation

2-3

3745 MAPs

MAP 3210: MOSS Control Panel Code 059

Symptom Explanation

Code 059 displayed on control panel

001

This MAP should be used only if the problem can be reproduced.

If you have an intermittent problem, exchange the

FRU group 1. Go to “3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.

– Power the 3745 OFF as follows:

- Put the power control in local mode:

Ÿ

Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 3.

Ÿ Press Validate.

- Press Power Off.

Switch the CB1 OFF. Refer to

Figure 4-40 on page 4-34

Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.

– Refer to Figure 4-9 on page 4-11.

– Unplug the DFA card (01A-X0G).

Attention: The following sequence

should always be observed.

– Remove the cable which is attached to the

MCC card (01A-X0H).

– Unplug the MCC card (01A-X0H).

– Press Power On Reset.

– Switch the CB1 ON.

Is code 07E displayed?

Yes No

002

– Press Power Off.

Switch the CB1 OFF.

– Replug all cards and reinstall the cable on the MCC card.

Exchange the MPC card. Go to Step 006.

003

– Press Power Off.

Switch the CB1 OFF.

– Replug the MCC card (01A-X0H).

– Install the cable to the MCC card

(01A-X0H).

– Press Power On Reset.

– Switch the CB1 ON.

(Step 003 continues)

Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom

Ÿ MPC

Ÿ MCC

Ÿ DFA

003 (continued)

Is code 072 displayed?

Yes No

004

– Press Power Off.

Switch the CB1 OFF.

– Remove the cable which is attached to the MCC card (01A-X0H).

Exchange the MCC card, install the cable on the MCC card. Go to Step 006.

005

– Press Power Off.

Switch the CB1 OFF.

Exchange the DFA card (01A-X0G). Continue with Step 006.

006

– Reinstall any remaining unplugged cards.

– Press Power On Reset.

Switch the CB1 ON.

Is an error detected during IML?

Yes No

007

Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.

008

Is the panel code displaying the same code as when you started this MAP?

Yes No

009

Go to “3745 Control Panel Codes” on page 1-15 and follow the procedure given by the table.

010

Go to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

2-4

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 MAPs

MAP 3220: Undefined Panel Message

Symptom Explanation

The message on the control panel is undefined

001

You may have loose cables and/or cards.

If the nature of the fault does not allow control panel actions, exchange the FRU group 37. Go to page “3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.

– Power the 3745 OFF as follows:

Ÿ Put the power control in local mode:

– Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 3.

– Press Validate.

Ÿ Press Power Off.

Switch the CB1 OFF.

Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.

– Refer to Figure 4-9 on page 4-11.

– Carefully check and reseat any loose cables or cards (especially the MPC, PCC, and MSC).

Switch the CB1 ON.

Are Power Control and Service Mode indicators displayed on the control panel?

Yes No

002

The initial power checkouts on the PLC card did not complete successfully.

– Exchange the FRU group 37. Go to “3745

FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.

003

– Press Function on the control panel until the

MOSS IML function 1 is displayed.

– Press Validate.

– Press Power On Reset.

– When the IML is complete, retry the operation that displayed the unexpected hex display code.

Is the unexpected hex display code problem resolved?

Yes No

004

Referring to “How to Run the Control Panel

Test” on page 3-8, run the diagnostic. If an

FRU group is called, go to “3745 FRU

Group Table” on page 1-49.

(Step 004 continues)

Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom

Ÿ Loose cables/cards

Ÿ PCC card failing

Ÿ Control panel failing

Ÿ MPC card failing

Ÿ Microcode update

004 (continued)

– If no errors are detected, consult the

Support Center for any microcode update which may not be reflected in the MIP.

Have you received more information from support?

Yes No

005

– Exchange the FRU group 22. Go to

“3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.

006

– Take action as directed.

Is the problem solved?

Yes No

007

– Exchange the FRU group 22. Go to “3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.

008

– In the CE Leaving Procedure you will be instructed to set the time of day clock, and set any required scheduled power

ON time.

Go to page “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.

009

Did the unexpected hex code occur while you were using the MIP for another reason?

Yes No

010

Go to Step 008.

011

Restart with Chapter 1, “START: How to Begin

Troubleshooting” on page 1-1.

Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation

2-5

3745 MAPs

MAP 3230: Console Link Procedure

The display code that sent you to this procedure defines the connector or cable referred to in this procedure.

Ÿ 1A0 or 1A1 local

Ÿ 1A3 or 1A4 remote

Ÿ 1A6 or 1A7 RSF.

001

– A console wrap plug should be installed at the

3745 console connector (see Figure 2-1), or at the far end of the cable which should be disconnected from the relevant console/modem. See

Table 2-1 for the wrapplug part number to be used.

006 (continued)

– or –

If any other code is displayed, go to “3745

Control Panel Codes” on page 1-15 and follow the instructions.

007

The console wrap plug could be faulty.

Change the console wrap plug and go to step 7 on page 3-6, or exchange the FRU group 26 on page 1-51. Go to page 1-49.

Table 2-1. Wrap plug PN

PN

6398697

2667737

26f0320

Console Type

31XX

3727

Personal computer or

PS/2*

R

S

F

R

E

M

O

T

E

L

O

C

A

L

Was a console wrap plug installed?

Yes No

002

Install the console wrap plug and go to Step

7 of “How to Run the Console Link Test for

3745 Models 130, 150, 160, and 170” on page 3-6.

003

Was the console wrap plug installed on the cable?

Yes No

004

The console wrap plug could be faulty.

Change it and go to Step 7 on page 3-6, or exchange the FRU group 26 on page 1-51

(see page 1-49).

005

– Install a console wrap plug at the 3745 console connector (see Figure 2-1) and refer to Step 7 on page 3-6 to repeat the test.

Is the code displayed the same as the one with which you entered this procedure?

Yes No

006

If 1A1, 1A4, or 1A7 is displayed, the cable from the 3745 is faulty.

– Repair or exchange the cable.

– Verify the repair by re-running the console link test with the console wrap plug installed on the cable.

(Step 006 continues)

J1 J2 J3

Location: 01R

Figure 2-1. Console Outputs

2-6

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 MAPs

3745 Line Adapter MAPs

MAP 3500: Activate/Deactivate Line Problem or Line Errors on the

TSS

Symptom Explanation

You are unable to activate or deactivate a line, or errors are occurring while lines are running.

Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom

Ÿ See below

001

– Ensure that the customer has completed his

Problem Determination guide procedure.

If not done, follow this problem determination procedure yourself before continuing this map.

Does the problem still exist?

Yes No

002

– Problem is solved.

003

– Using the 3745 console, determine the number of the line adapter driving the suspected line as follows:

1. From Menu 3, select the TSS services by entering TSS in the selection area.

2. From the TSS services screen, choose

select/release by entering 1 in the selection area.

3. On the displayed select/release screen, enter the address of the suspected line.

The line adapter number will be displayed in the machine status area (MSA) and in the selection area.

4. Enter REL in the input area to release the line adapter

Does the operator accept to deactivate all the lines attached to this line adapter?

Yes No

004

Go to Step 009.

005

Go to “Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a

TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62 and follow the procedure until you have run the

TSS diagnostics for this line adapter (scanner).

Then return here.

Did the diagnostics run error free?

Yes No

006

(Step 006 continues)

006 (continued)

Diagnostics have detected an error. With the diagnostic reference code, go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.

007

– Go to “Disabling Procedure 0150: Preparing

LIC Type 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 for Maintenance” on page 1-69 for LIC type 1-6.

– Follow the procedure until you have run the

RC01 (for LIC type 1-4) or RH59 (for LIC type

5, 6) routine of the TSS diagnostics with the appropriate wrap plug/cable installed.

– Then return here.

Did the diagnostics run error free?

Yes No

008

Diagnostics have detected an error. With the diagnostic reference code, go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.

009

The problem has not been resolved.

– Collect any related RECMS (MDR) records and contact your support structure for assistance.

Refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation

2-7

3745 MAPs

MAP 3520: Activate/Deactivate Ring Problems or Ring Errors on the

TRSS

Symptom Explanation

You are unable to activate or deactivate a ring, or errors are occurring while rings are running.

Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom

Ÿ See below

001

– Ensure that the customer has completed his

Problem Determination guide procedure.

If not done, follow this problem determination procedure yourself before continuing this map.

Does the problem still exist?

Yes No

002

– Problem is solved.

003

– Using the 3745 console, determine the number of the TRA driving the suspected ring as follows:

1. From Menu 3, select the TRSS services by entering TRS in the selection area.

2. From the TRSS services screen, choose

select/release by entering 1 in the selection area.

The TRA numbers will be displayed with the ring addresses connected to.

Does the operator accept to deactivate all the lines attached to this adapter?

Yes No

004

Go to Step 007.

005

– Go to Step 2c on page 1-66 and follow the disabling procedure until you have run the TRSS diagnostics for this line adapter (TRA).

Then return here.

Did the diagnostics run error free?

Yes No

006

Diagnostics have detected an error. With the diagnostic reference code, go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.

007

The problem has not been resolved. Collect any related RECMS (MDR) records and call your support structure for assistance. Refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

2-8

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 MAPs

MAP 3530: Activate/Deactivate Line Problems or Line Errors on the

HPTSS/ESS

Symptom Explanation

You are unable to activate or deactivate a line, or errors are occurring while lines are running.

Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom

Ÿ See below

001

– Ensure that the customer has completed his

Problem Determination guide procedure.

If not done, follow this problem determination procedure yourself before continuing this map.

Does the problem still exist?

Yes No

002

– Problem is solved.

003

– Using the 3745 console, determine the number of the line adapter driving the suspected line as follows:

1. From Menu 3, select the TSS services by entering TSS in the selection area.

2. From the TSS services screen, choose

select/release by entering 1 in the selection area.

3. On the displayed select/release screen, enter the address of the suspected line.

The line adapter number will be displayed in the machine status area (MSA) and in the selection area.

4. Enter REL in the input area to release the line adapter.

Does the operator accept to deactivate all the lines attached to this adapter?

Yes No

004

Go to Step 009.

005

– Go to “Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a

TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62 and follow the procedure until you have run the HPTSS/ESS diagnostics for this line adapter. Then return here.

Did the diagnostics run error free?

Yes No

006

Diagnostics have detected an error. With the diagnostic reference code, go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.

007

– Replace the modem cable on the failing port by the wrap plug (PN 58X9349 for V.35, PN

58X9354 for X.21, or PN 70X8670 for ESS).

– Update the CDF. Run the VI and VK for V.35,

VJ and VK for X.21, or UF02 and UF03 for ESS routines of the HPTSS or ESS diagnostics.

Return here.

Did the diagnostics run error free?

Yes No

008

Diagnostics have detected an error. With the diagnostic reference code, go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.

009

The problem has not been resolved, collect any related RECMS (MDR) records and contact your support structure for assistance. Refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation

2-9

3745 MAPs

3745 Channel MAPs

MAP 3700: CA Isolation Procedure

You are here for a channel reported problem at the host console or you are unable to load or dump the control program for a channel-attached

3745.

Symptom Explanation

Condition code 3 (CC3)

Interface control check

Channel data check

CPU hang

Load/dump CP problem

CA enable not possible

Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom

Ÿ Channel disabled

Ÿ CADR card

Ÿ CAL card

Ÿ External conditions:

– Channel

– Channel cables

– Other Control Units

– Switch unit

If you have an intermittent problem, consider that any of the conditions given in the above table can cause the problem.

If the 3745 is stopped in IPL phase 4 and a U is displayed in the MSA: exchange the CAL card of the channel.

001

Is an interface control check or channel data check reported?

Yes No

002

On the 3745 console select, the CID function (from Menu 2) and check at the E/D request field for the involved channel adapter.

Is E displayed?

Yes No

003

– Enter E in the CHANGE E/D

REQUEST ==> area.

– Press SEND and re-initiate the operation.

004

Go to Step 006.

005

Go to Step 011.

006

– Check the physical path (channel switch, host channel, and channel cables).

(Step 006 continues)

006 (continued)

Is everything OK?

Yes No

007

Correct the problem and re-initiate unit initialization.

008

– Select the CAS function with option 1 (display

CA statuses).

Is INIT status displayed in the Internal Status field?

Yes No

009

Is ERRXXX or *** displayed?

Yes No

010

For any other status displayed, see

IBM 3745 Service Functions and contact your support structure if the problem can not be corrected.

011

– Ask the customer to disable the channel adapter.

Is NCP loaded?

Yes No

012

Referring to "“How to Run Internal

Function Tests” on page 3-9", run the diagnostics on the channel adapter.

(Step 012 continues)

2-10

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 MAPs

012 (continued)

Did the diagnostics run error free?

Yes No

013

Go to “Action to Take After a

Diagnostic Run or an FRU

Exchange” on page 4-99.

014

– Ask the operator to put the channel offline from the host.

– Interface cables must be removed from the 3745.

– Run routines LG02, LI03, LI04,

LJ03, LK02 and LO01 which need manual intervention. Refer to “How to Run Internal Function Tests” on page 3-9

Did the routines run error free?

Yes No

015

Go to “Action to Take After a

Diagnostic Run or an FRU

Exchange” on page 4-99

016

Reconnect the interface cables on the

3745.

If you are here for an interface control check, determine if the channel works properly from the host when you set the Select out bypass switch to the

bypass position. Refer to Figure 4-28 on page 4-25.

Is the channel working properly?

Yes No

017

You probably have an external problem. Check the interface cables and the other control units, if any.

018

– Exchange CADR and CAL. Go to

“Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1 and refer to “Basic Board,

Cards, Connectors, and

Crossovers” on page 4-5 for the failing channel CADR location.

019

– At the 3745 console select Menu 3 and enter CAS for channel adapter services.

– Enter 4 for concurrent mode commands.

– Enter the channel adapter number corresponding to the suspected CA, in the CA number ===> field. Enter SHT for shutdown in the command ===> field.

– Press SEND twice.

– Go to Step 012 on page 2-10.

020

– Refer to the IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service Function (CDF chapter) and check the CDF for a correct configuration.

Is the CDF OK?

Yes No

021

Correct the CDF and re-initiate the operation.

022

Go to Step 011 on page 2-10

Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation

2-11

3745 MAPs

3745 Power MAPs

MAP 3900: Overcurrent on Power Supply 1

Symptom Explanation

Overcurrent on power supply 1.

Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom

Ÿ Short circuit in:

– - MOSS Board or cable from 01A-Y0E4 to 01F-A1J2

– - Basic Board or flat cable from 01F-A1TB1/3 to 01G-A1YF/H or flat cable from 01F-A1TB2/4 to 01G-A1YA/D or cable from 01F-A1J4 to 01G-A1YE

– - any LIB1 or LIB2 or cable from 01F-A1J5 to 01M-A1A3 or cable from 01F-A1J6 to 01M-A2A3 or cable from 01F-A1J8 via 01L-B1 to 01L-A1A3 or cable from 01F-A1J7 via 01L-B2 to 01L-A2A3

– - HDD or FDD or cable from 01F-A1J3 to 01D-A1J3 and

01B-A1J2

Ÿ PCC

Ÿ PS1

Power ON executed less than 10 seconds after a power OFF. This is a normal operation.

001

Notes:

1. Panel codes 00B and 00C can occur if the

3745 is powered ON less than 10 seconds after a power OFF. This is a normal operation.

Wait at least 10 seconds after a power OFF before you try to power ON again.

2. You will have to disconnect (area by area) the elements connected to PS1. Depending on the configuration of your 3745, the panel code

00C (overvoltage, undervoltage) can be displayed at power ON when one board is disconnected. During this MAP consider only

panel code 00B (overcurrent).

Power ON the machine. Wait at least 10 seconds then power ON. If the trouble remains, continue with this step. If not, gather all information from the BER file and contact your support group.

– Unplug the Basic board power cable 01F-J4 from PS1.

– Unscrew the Basic board 5V laminar bus

01F-A1TB1/2/3 and 4. Refer to Figure 4-36 on page 4-31.

– Power ON the 3745 as follows:

Ÿ Set the power control in local mode:

– Using Power Control scroll till the value is 3, local mode.

(Step 001 continues)

001 (continued)

– Press Validate.

– Press Power On reset.

Is the panel code 00B still displayed?

Yes No

002

– Press Power Off.

– Replug the basic board power cables.

– Unplug the basic board card by card from

01G-A1A2 to 01G-A1X2 and try to power the 3745 ON after each one.

Is the panel code 00B still displayed?

Yes No

003

– Press Power Off.

– Exchange the faulty card you have just unplugged when 00B (oc) disappeared.

004

– Exchange the basic board. Go to “Basic

Board Exchange Procedure” on page 4-77.

005

(Step 005 continues)

2-12

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

005 (continued)

– Replug the basic board power cables.

– Unplug the HDD/FDD power cable 01F-A1J3 from PS1.

– Press Power On Reset.

Is the panel code 00B still displayed?

Yes No

006

– Press Power Off.

– Replug the HDD/FDD power cable.

– Unplug the FDD power cable 01B-A1J2.

Refer to Figure 4-33 on page 4-29.

– Press Power On Reset.

Is the panel code 00B still displayed?

Yes No

007

– Exchange the FDD. Go to “FDD

Exchange Procedure” on page 4-52.

008

– Exchange the HDD. Go to “HDD

Exchange Procedure” on page 4-56.

009

– Replug the HDD/FDD power cable.

– Unplug the LIB1 power cable (01F-A1J6) from

PS1, if any. If there is no cable, go to Step 015.

Press Power On Reset.

Is the panel code 00B still displayed?

Yes No

010

– Replug the LIB1 power cable.

– Unplug all LICs of LIB1 from 01M-A2C2 to 01M-A2K2 with their cable.

– Press Power On Reset.

Is the panel code 00B still displayed?

Yes No

011

– Relug the LICs, one by one, and exchange the faulty one. Go to

“LIC Exchange Procedure” on page 4-44.

012

– Unplug the DMUX (01M-A2B2) with its cables.

– Press Power On Reset.

(Step 012 continues)

3745 MAPs

012 (continued)

Is the panel code 00B still displayed?

Yes No

013

– Exchange the DMUX. Go to

“DMUX Exchange Procedure” on page 4-39.

014

– Exchange the LIB1 01M-A2. Go to “LIC

Board Type 1 and 3 Exchange

Procedure” on page 4-84.

015

– Replug the LIB1 power cable.

– Unplug the LIB1 power cable (01F-A1J5) from the PS1, if any. If there is no cable, go to Step

021.

Press Power On Reset.

Is the panel code 00B still displayed?

Yes No

016

– Replug the LIB1 power cable.

– Unplug all LICs of LIB1 from 01M-A1C2 to 01M-A1K2 with their cables.

– Press Power On Reset.

Is the panel code 00B still displayed?

Yes No

017

– replug the LICs one by one and exchange the faulty one. Go to

“LIC Exchange Procedure” on page 4-44.

018

– Unplug the DMUX 01M-A1B2 with its cables.

– Press Power On Reset.

Is the panel code 00B still displayed?

Yes No

019

– Exchange the DMUX. Go to “DMUX

Exchange Procedure” on page 4-39.

020

– Exchange the LIB1 01M-A1. Go to “LIC

Board Type 1 and 3 Exchange

Procedure” on page 4-84.

021

(Step 021 continues)

Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation

2-13

3745 MAPs

021 (continued)

– Replug the LIB1 power cable.

– Unplug the LIB2 or LIB1 power cable 01F-A1J7 from PS1. if any. If there is no cable go to Step

027.

– Press Power On Reset.

Is the panel code 00B still displayed?

Yes No

022

– Replug the LIB2 or LIB1 power cable.

– Unplug all LICs of LIB1 or LIB2 from

01L-A2C2 to 01L-A2K2 with their cables.

– Press Power On Reset.

Is the panel code 00B still displayed?

Yes No

023

– Replug the LICs one by one and exchange the faulty one. Go to

“LIC Exchange Procedure” on page 4-44.

024

– Unplug the SMUX or DMUX (01L-A2B2) with its cables.

– Press Power On Reset.

Is panel code 00B still displayed?

Yes No

025

– Exchange the SMUX. Go to

“SMUXA/B Exchange Procedure” on page 4-41.

– For the DMUX go to “DMUX

Exchange Procedure” on page 4-39.

026

– Exchange the LIB1 (01M-A1). Go to “LIC

Board Type 1 and 3 Exchange

Procedure” on page 4-84.

– or exhange the LIB2. Go to “LIC Board

Type 2 Exchange Procedure” on page 4-88.

027

– Replug LIB2 or LIB1 power cable.

– Unplug LIB1 power cable 01F-A1J8 from PS1.

– Press Power On Reset.

Is the panel code 00B still displayed?

Yes No

028

(Step 028 continues)

028 (continued)

– Replug the LIB2 power cable.

– Unplug all LICs from LIB2 from 01L-A1C2 to 01L-A1K2 with their cables.

– Press Power On Reset.

Is the panel code 00B still displayed?

Yes No

029

– replug the LICs one by one and exchange the faulty one. Go to

“LIC Exchange Procedure” on page 4-44.

030

– Unplug the SMUX (01L-A1B2) with its cables.

– Press Power On Reset.

Is the panel code 00B still displayed?

Yes No

031

– Exchange the SMUX. Go to

“SMUXA/B Exchange Procedure” on page 4-41.

032

– Exchange the LIB2 (01L-A1). Go to “LIC

Board Type 2 Exchange Procedure” on page 4-88.

033

– Replug the LB1 power cable

– Unplug the MOSS cards (from 01A-X0E to

01A-X0H). Do not remove the PCC card

(01A-X0B).

– Press Power On Reset.

Is the panel code 00B still displayed?

Yes No

034

– Press Power Off.

– Replug the MOSS card by card and try to power 3745 ON after each one.

– Exchange the faulty card you replugged when the over current appeared.

035

– Exchange the PCC card (01A-X0B). Go to

“Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.

Is the panel code 00B still displayed?

Yes No

036

Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.

2-14

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

037

– Exchange the PS1. Go to “PS1 Exchange

Procedure” on page 4-67.

– Press Power On Reset.

Is the panel code 00B still displayed?

Yes No

038

Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.

039

– Exchange the MOSS board. Go to “MOSS

Board Exchange Procedure” on page 4-92.

3745 MAPs

Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation

2-15

3745 MAPs

MAP 3905: Power ON Problem in Host Mode or Host Power Sequence

Problem

Symptom Explanation

Power ON is not possible in host mode.

The host system detects errors during the power ON sequence.

Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom

Ÿ The Power Control is not in host mode

Ÿ Host or host cable problem

Ÿ Remote power control box (EPO)

Ÿ PCC card

Attention

Power may be present when nothing is displayed on the control panel.

Pin 1 Pin 4

001

When the power control is in host mode, a 1 is displayed on the control panel.

Is the power control in host mode?

Yes No

002

– If the panel is blank; go to “Power MAP

3930: Power Control Subsystem

Problems” on page 2-21.

– If not, put the power control in host mode:

Ÿ Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 1.

Ÿ Press Validate.

Ÿ Re-initiate the command.

Continue with Step 003.

003

Is the 3745 powered ON?

Yes No

004

Go to Step 010.

005

– Check for 28 V between the frame ground and the back of the host connector which initiated the command at EPO 01S, pins 3 and 4. Refer to Figure 2-2 and to Figure 4-2 on page 4-4.

Is 28 V present on pin 3?

Yes No

006

There is a host problem, or an external host cable problem.

If no problem was found, contact your support structure. Refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

007

(Step 007 continues)

Pin 3 Pin 6

J5 J6 J7

Figure 2-2. EPO Location 01S

007 (continued)

Is 28 V present on pin 4?

Yes No

J8

008

– Exchange the FRU group 53 “3745 FRU

Group Table” on page 1-49

009

There is a Host problem, or an external host cable problem.

If no problem was found, contact your support structure. Refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

010

– Try to power ON in local mode:

Ÿ

Using Power Control scroll till the value is

3.

Ÿ Press Validate.

Is Power ON possible in local mode?

Yes No

011

Go to “Power MAP 3930: Power Control

Subsystem Problems” on page 2-21.

012

– Press Power Off.

– Put the power control in host mode:

(Step 012 continues)

2-16

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

012 (continued)

Ÿ Using Power Control scroll, till the value is

1.

Ÿ

Press Validate.

Ÿ Re-initiate the command.

Is the 3745 powered ON?

Yes No

013

– Check for the 28 V between frame ground and Power Hold/Power Pick on EPO

01S on:

Ÿ

Any J Connector pin 5 if one is free

(J5/6/7/8) or

Ÿ The back of any host connector if the four are used.

Pin 1 Pin 4

Pin 3 Pin 6

J5 J6 J7 J8

Are the two lines ON?

Yes No

014

There is a host problem, or an external host cable problem.

If no problem was found, contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting

Support” on page A-1.

015

– Exchange the PCC card. Go to

“Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.

016

– Intermittent problem. The host, host cable, or

PCC card can be suspected.

3745 MAPs

Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation

2-17

3745 MAPs

MAP 3910: Overcurrent on Power Supply 2

Symptom Explanation

Overcurrent on power supply 2.

001

– Unplug the FAN1 power cable 01H-B1-J7 from

PS2.

– Power the 3745 ON as follows:

Ÿ put the power control in local mode:

– Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 3.

– Press Validate.

Ÿ Press Power On Reset.

Is the panel code 00E still displayed?

Yes No

002

– Press Power Off.

– Exchange the Fan1. Go to “Fan 1

Exchange Procedure” on page 4-50.

003

– Replug the Fan1 power cable.

– Unplug the Fan2 power cable (01H-B1-J6) from

PS2.

– Power the 3745 ON as follow:

Ÿ

Put the power control in local mode:

– Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 3.

– Press Validate.

Ÿ Press Power On reset.

Is the panel code 00E still displayed?

Yes No

004

– Press Power Off.

– Exchange the Fan2. Go to “Fan 2

Exchange Procedure” on page 4-51.

005

– Replug the Fan2 power cable.

– Exchange the PCC card (01A-X0B). Go to

“Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.

– Press Power On Reset.

(Step 005 continues)

Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom

Ÿ Short circuit in:

Ÿ Fan1

Ÿ Fan2

Ÿ PCC

Ÿ Panel

Ÿ PS2

005 (continued)

Is the panel code 00E still displayed?

Yes No

006

Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.

007

– Exchange the control panel. Go to “Control

Panel Exchange Procedure” on page 4-46.

– Press Power On Reset.

Is the panel code 00E still displayed?

Yes No

008

Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.

009

– Exchange the PS2. Go to “PS2 and Primary

Power Box Exchange Procedure” on page 4-69.

2-18

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 MAPs

Power MAP 3920: Air Flow Detector Fault

Symptom Explanation

Air flow detector fault for Fan1 or

Fan2

001

If the problem is intermittent, consider that any of the conditions given in the above table can cause the problem.

Panel code 030 indicates Fan1.

Panel codes 031 or 032 indicate Fan2.

Is the code 030 displayed?

Yes No

002

– Disconnect the Fan2 power cable from the front side of the power supply 2,

(location 01H-J6). Refer to Figure 4-37 on page 4-32.

– Check for the presence of -38 V dc between pins 1 and 2 of the power supply

2 (PS2) connector J6 while attempting to power ON the machine.

(Pin 1 ground and pin 2 -38 V.)

J6 J7

1 2

1 2

Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom

Ÿ Fan1 or Fan2

Ÿ PCC

Ÿ PS2

Ÿ Tripped CP3

005 (continued)

– Check for the presence of -38V dc between pins 1 and 2 of the power supply 2 (connector

J7) while attempting to power ON the machine,

(Pin 1 ground and pin 2 -38 V).

J6 J7

1 2

Is voltage present and within tolerence

Yes No

006

±

10%?

1 2

– Reconnect the Fan1 power cable to

01H-J7.

– Exchange PS2. Go to “PS2 and Primary

Power Box Exchange Procedure” on page 4-69.

007

– Reconnect the Fan1 power cable to 01H-J7.

– Check the cable from 01A-Y0A1 to 01K-J1 for correct setting.

If this cable is correctly fitted, exchange the

FRU group 40 “3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.

Is voltage present and within tolerence

±

10%?

Yes No

003

– Reconnect the Fan2 power cable to

01H-J6.

– Exchange the PS2. Go to “PS2 and Primary Power Box Exchange

Procedure” on page 4-69.

004

– Reconnect the Fan2 power cable to

01H-J6.

– Check cable from 01A-Y0A1 to 01E-J1 for correct setting. If this cable is correctly fitted, exchange the FRU group 41 “3745

FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.

005

– Disconnect the Fan1 power cable from the front side of the power supply 2, (location 01H-J7).

Refer to Figure 4-37 on page 4-32.

(Step 005 continues)

Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation

2-19

3745 MAPs

Power MAP 3925: Scheduled Power on Problems

Symptom Explanation

The machine will not power On as scheduled

Attention

Power may be present when nothing is displayed on the control panel.

Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom

Ÿ Wrong setting of scheduled time

Ÿ Wrong setting of power control (should be 2)

Ÿ Battery

Ÿ PCC card

007 (continued)

You have a dead battery.

– Exchange it and record this action. Go to

“Battery Exchange Procedure” on page 4-48.

Note: Before starting maintenance, check the control panel to ensure that the Power Control display is set to 3 (Local).

If yes, proceed with Step 001.

If not, perform the following:

1. Press Power Control until 3 is displayed in the power control window.

2. Press Validate.

001

– Press Power On.

– Check at the ac present lamp to the right of the

Power On pushbutton.

Is the ac present lamp ON?

Yes No

002

You have a power ON problem. Go to

“Power MAP 3930: Power Control Subsystem Problems” on page 2-21.

003

Is the code 007 displayed at the control panel?

Yes No

004

– Check with the operator that the data entered matches the actual day and time:

– Select the time services screen, and display Scheduled Power On data.

Is the data correct?

Yes No

005

With the right scheduled information, re-initiate the command.

006

Exchange the FRU group 38. Go to “3745

FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.

007

(Step 007 continues)

2-20

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 MAPs

Power MAP 3930: Power Control Subsystem Problems

Symptom Explanation

Panel display or power indicator not lit.

Machine will not Power ON.

Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom

Ÿ UEPO

Ÿ CB1 or any CP tripped

Ÿ PS2

Ÿ PCC card or Control Panel

Attention

Power may be present when nothing is displayed on the control panel.

Power supplies are sealed replaceable units.

B1

001

– Check at the control panel.

Are all indicators OFF or **** displayed?

Yes No

002

Go to Step 024 on page 2-23.

003

– Check for the presence of 28 V at the UEPO switch (see Figure 2-3). Use a CE meter and check for 28 V between:

Ÿ Position 5 and the ground of the switch on the 3745 Models 130-170

Or

Ÿ Positions A2 and the ground of the switch on the 3745 Model 17A.

Are 28 volts present?

Yes No

004

– Check the position of CP2 on the primary power box.

Is CP2 ON?

Yes No

005

Switch CB1 OFF.

Switch CP2 ON.

Switch CB1 ON.

Does CP2 drop again?

Yes No

006

Power ON the 3745.

007

(Step 007 continues)

Battery

J1

C1

A1

EPO

4

5

6

Wiring Side

1

2

3

1

2

3

D C B A

Detail C 01C-C1SW1

Figure 2-3. UEPO Switch

Rear View

007 (continued)

– Check that the voltage select switch

(01H-B1/SW1) is correct for the input voltage. Refer to Figure 4-37 on page 4-32.

Is it correct?

Yes No

008

Set the voltage select switch

(SW1) to the correct position.

Go to Step 005.

Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation

2-21

3745 MAPs

009

Exchange the PS2. Go to “PS2 and

Primary Power Box Exchange

Procedure” on page 4-69.

010

– Check the position of the CB1 on the primary power box. Refer to Figure 4-1 on page 4-3 for location.

Is the CB1 in the ON position?

Yes No

011

Switch the CB1 ON.

– Power ON the 3745.

Is the 3745 powering ON now?

Yes No

012

Go to Step 001 on page 2-21

013

Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.

014

– Check the ac main voltage:

Ÿ Power the 3745 OFF as follows:

– Put the power control in local mode:

- Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 3.

- Press Validate.

– Press Power Off.

Refer to Figure 4-35 on page 4-30 and do the following:

Ÿ Remove the PS1 input power cord at the Primary power box connector J1.

Ÿ Connect a voltmeter to J1.

Ÿ Press Power On Reset.

Ÿ You have approximately two seconds to read the ac voltage.

Is the voltage correct?

Yes No

015

– Check for one of the following:

Ÿ If the machine is correctly wired for the customer's input voltage.

Ÿ

If you have a short circuit in the primary control box.

Ÿ If the customer's supply is defective.

016

Exchange the PS2. Go to “PS2 and

Primary Power Box Exchange Procedure” on page 4-69.

017

– Check Fuse 1. Refer to Figure 4-37 on page 4-32 for location.

Is the fuse OK?

Yes No

018

Switch CB1 OFF.

– Exchange the fuse.

Switch CB1 ON.

– If the fuse blows again, exchange the

FRU group 37.

Go to “3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.

If not, re-initiate the operation.

019

– Measure the dc voltages at 01A-A1-J3 (Location

: 01b, refer to Figure 4-1 on page 4-3.)

VDC Vmin Vmax Test Point

+ 5.00

+ 4.75

+ 5.25

pin 22

+28.00 +24.90 +29.50 pin 21

01A-A1-J3

01A-Y0

A B C D E

13

25 28 V

5 V

1

14

Are both voltages present and within tolerance?

Yes No

020

(Step 020 continues)

2-22

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

020 (continued)

Is only +5 V present and within tolerance?

Yes No

021

– Exchange the Primary Power Box.

Go to “PS2 and Primary Power Box

Exchange Procedure” on page 4-69.

022

– Exchange the PS2. Go to “PS2 and

Primary Power Box Exchange Procedure” on page 4-69.

023

Exchange the FRU group 37. Go to “3745 FRU

Group Table” on page 1-49.

024

.

– At the power control window, check the mode validity.

Ÿ 1 = Host

Ÿ

2 = Network

Ÿ 3 = Local

Is the power mode in accordance with customer requirements?

Yes No

025

Correct the power mode and try again.

026

Is the power mode in local 3 displayed in the power window?

Yes No

027

– Press Power Control until the correct mode is displayed in the power control window.

– Press Validate.

Continue with Step 028.

028

.

– Press Power On.

Is the 3745 failing to power ON?

Yes No

029

– You may have an intermittent problem.

Before you continue, perform another

Power OFF/ON to check that the problem still exists in that mode.

3745 MAPs

If it does not, go to “MAP 3905: Power ON

Problem in Host Mode or Host Power

Sequence Problem” on page 2-16.

030

Is the UEPO switch (on the control panel), in the Power Enable position?

Yes No

031

.

– Put the UEPO switch in Power Enable position as follows (see Figure 2-3 on page 2-21):

Ÿ Loosen the two screws.

Ÿ Move the metal slider completely to the left.

Ÿ Set the switch to I.

Ÿ Move the metal slider to the right.

Ÿ Secure the screws.

Retry the operation that brought you here.

032

Is Power On indicator ON?

Yes No

033

Does the control panel display a hexadecimal code?

Yes No

034

– Exchange the FRU group 37. Go to “3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.

035

– Record the value of the hexadecimal code at the control panel.

Go to “3745 Control Panel Codes” on page 1-15 and follow the action to be taken.

036

Normally (when the Power ON Indicator is lit), relay K1 in the primary control box is closed and the ac voltage is distributed to the rest of the machine.

Nevertheless, in case of a severe under voltage of the ac mains, the Power ON command may be memorized but not fully executed.

The Power On lamp is turned ON but the K1 remains OFF.

Consequently, all power supplies and blowers remain OFF.

– Using a CE meter, check for 28 volts between position 2 and ground on the UEPO switch (see

Figure 2-3 on page 2-21).

(Step 036 continues)

Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation

2-23

3745 MAPs

036 (continued)

Is 28 V within tolerance between 24.9 V and

29.5 V?

Yes No

037

Exchange the PS2. Go to “PS2 and Primary

Power Box Exchange Procedure” on page 4-69.

038

Exchange the FRU group 37, go to “3745 FRU

Group Table” on page 1-49.

2-24

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 MAPs

Power MAP 3935: Power OFF not Possible in Host Mode

Symptom Explanation

Power OFF is not possible in host mode

Attention

Power may be present when nothing is displayed on the control panel.

001

Is the host (that which initiated the command) the last host connected to be power ON?

Yes No

003

007

002

– Set the power control to local mode.

– Using power control, scroll till the value is 3.

– Press Validate.

– Power OFF.

(Step 007 continues)

Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom

Ÿ Another connected host is still power ON.

Ÿ The power control is not in host mode.

Ÿ Host or host cable problem.

Ÿ PCC card.

– The 3745 will be powered OFF only by the last connected host.

When the power control is in host mode, a 1 is displayed on the control panel.

Is the power control in host mode?

Yes No

004

– Set the power control to host mode.

– Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 1.

– Press Validate.

– Power OFF in host mode.

Is power OFF now possible in host mode?

Yes No

005

Go to Step 007.

006

Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.

007 (continued)

Does the Power On Indicator now go OFF?

Yes No

008

Go to “Power MAP 3945: Power OFF not

Possible in Local Mode” on page 2-26.

009

– Check for 24 V between the frame ground and

Power Hold line on EPO 01S on:

Ÿ

Any J Connector pin 5 if one is free

(J5/6/7/8) or

Ÿ

The back of any host connector if the four are used.

Refer to Figure 2-4 and Figure 4-2 on page 4-4.

Pin 1

Pin 3

J5 J6 J7

Figure 2-4. EPO Location 01S

Is the power hold dropped?

Yes No

J8

Pin 4

Pin 6

010

There is a host problem or an external host cable problem.

If no problem is found, contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.

011

– Exchange the PCC card. Go to “Exchange

Precautions” on page 4-1

Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation

2-25

3745 MAPs

Power MAP 3945: Power OFF not Possible in Local Mode

Symptom Explanation

Power OFF is not possible in local mode

Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom

Ÿ The power control is not in local mode

Ÿ Relay K1

Ÿ Control Panel

Ÿ PCC

Attention

Power may be present when nothing is displayed on the control panel.

001

When the power control is in local mode, a 3 is displayed at the control panel.

Is the power control in local mode?

Yes No

002

– Power the 3745 OFF as follows:

Ÿ

Set the power control to local mode:

– Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 3.

– Press Validate.

Ÿ Press Power Off.

– Continue whit Step 003.

003

Is the 3745 still powered ON?

Yes No

004

Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.

005

Are the blowers stopped?

Yes No

006

– Suspect relay K1 located in primary power box 01H-A2.

Refer to the YZ pages for wiring.

– Repair and re-initiate the command.

– If correct, go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.

007

– Exchange the FRU group 37 on page 1-51. Go to “3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.

2-26

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 MAPs

Power MAP 3950: PCC-Detected Error on MOSS Reset

Symptom Explanation

Incorrect states/sequencing in

MOSS reset signals.

001

– Power the 3745 OFF as follows:

Ÿ

Set the power control to local mode:

– Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 3.

– Press Validate.

Ÿ Press Power Off.

– Unplug the:

Ÿ MCC card (01A-X0H)

Ÿ

MPC card (01A-X0E)

Ÿ DFA card (01A-X0G)

– Press Power On Reset.

Does the same error appear?

Yes No

002

– Replug the:

Ÿ

MCC card (01A-X0H)

Ÿ MPC card (01A-X0E)

– Exchange the DFA card (01A-X0G).

– Press Power On Reset.

Does the same error appear?

Yes No

003

Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.

004

– Press Power Off.

– Exchange the DFA card (01A-X0G).

– Exchange the MPC card (01A-X0E).

– Press Power On Reset.

Does the same error appear?

Yes No

005

Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.

006

(Step 006 continues)

Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom

Ÿ MPC

Ÿ MCC

Ÿ DFA

Ÿ PCC

Ÿ PS1

006 (continued)

– Press Power Off.

– Exchange the MPC card (01A-X0E)

– Exchange the MCC card (01A-X0H)

– Press Power On Reset.

Does the same error appear?

Yes No

007

Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.

008

Suspect the MOSS board 01A.

009

– Press Power Off.

– Exchange the PCC card (01A-X0B).

Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation

2-27

3745 MAPs

Power MAP 3960: Power OFF not Possible in Network Mode

Symptom Explanation

Power OFF is not possible in network mode

Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom

Ÿ The power control is not in network mode

Ÿ The Power Off command is not received from the host

Ÿ PUC

Ÿ PCC

Ÿ Host Cable problem

Ÿ 3745 not able to power OFF in local mode

Attention

Power may be present when nothing is displayed on the control panel.

001

To enter this MAP: The NCP must be running and a network Power Off command must have been issued.

When the power control is in network mode, a 2 is displayed at the control panel.

Is the power control in network mode?

Yes No

003

005

002

– Set the power control to network mode.

Ÿ Using Power Control scroll till the value is 2.

Ÿ Press Validate.

– Re-initiate the Power OFF command from the host.

Continue with Step 003.

Is the Power On indicator lit?

Yes No

004

– The Power OFF command was successful.

Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.

Set the power control in local mode.

Ÿ

Using Power Control scroll till the value is 3.

Ÿ Press validate.

Press Power Off.

Does the Power On indicator go OFF?

Yes No

006

(Step 006 continues)

006 (continued)

Continue at “Power MAP 3945: Power OFF not Possible in Local Mode” on page 2-26.

007

– Set the power control to network mode.

Ÿ Using Power Control scroll till the value is

2.

Ÿ Press Validate.

– Power the 3745 On by pressing Power

On/Reset.

– Select the IFT diagnostics routine AT05.

Is the Power On indicator still lit?

Yes No

008

You have an NCP or network problem.

Contact your support structure if additional assistance is required.

009

– Power the 3745 OFF as follows:

Ÿ Set the power control to local mode:

– Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 3.

– Press Validate.

Ÿ

Press Power Off.

Turn the CB1 OFF.

– Exchange the PCC card (01A-X0B). Refer to

Figure 4-9 on page 4-11.

Turn the CB1 ON.

– Press Power On Reset.

– Set the power control to network mode.

Ÿ Using Power Control scroll till the value is

2.

Ÿ Press Validate.

– Select the IFT diagnostics and run routine

AT05.

(Step 009 continues)

2-28

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

009 (continued)

Is the 3745 still powered ON?

Yes No

010

Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.

011

– Power the 3745 OFF as follows:

Ÿ

Set the power control to local mode:

– Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 3.

– Press Validate.

Ÿ Press Power Off.

Turn the CB1 OFF.

– Re-install the PCC card.

– Exchange the MCC card (01A-X0H). Refer to

Figure 4-9 on page 4-11.

Turn the CB1 ON.

– Press Power On Reset.

– Set the power control to network mode.

Ÿ

Using Power Control, scroll till the value is

2.

Ÿ Press Validate.

– Select the IFT diagnostics and run routine

AT05.

Is the 3745 still powered ON?

Yes No

012

Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.

013

– Power the 3745 OFF as follows:

Ÿ

Set the power control to local mode:

– Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 3.

– Press Validate.

Ÿ Press Power Off.

– Re-install the MCC card (01A-X0H).

– Exchange the PUC card (01G-V).

– Set the power control to network mode.

Ÿ Using Power Control, scroll till the value is

2.

Ÿ

Press Validate.

– Select the IFT diagnostics and run routine

AT05.

(Step 013 continues)

3745 MAPs

013 (continued)

Is the 3745 still powered ON?

Yes No

014

Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.

015

– Re-install the PUC card (01G-V).

You have gone through the entire procedure and the problem is still present. Contact your support structure for further assistance.

Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation

2-29

3745 MAPs

Power MAP 3970: PCC-Detected Error on CCU Reset or on Remote

Power OFF

Symptom Explanation

Incorrect states/sequencing in CCU reset signals.

001

– Power the 3745 OFF as follows:

Ÿ Set the power control to local mode:

– Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 3.

– Press Validate.

Ÿ

Press Power Off.

– Disconnect cable connector 01A-Y0A3 from the

MOSS board. Refer to Figure 4-9 on page 4-11.

– Press Power On Reset.

does the same error appear?

Yes No

002

(From step 008)

– Reconnect the cable connector.

– Exchange the PUC card (01G-V)

– Press Power On Reset.

Does the same error appear?

Yes No

003

Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.

004

– Press Power Off.

– Exchange the PUC card (01G-V)

– Exchange the SCTL card (01G-W)

– Press Power On Reset.

does the same error appear?

Yes No

005

Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.

006

Suspect the cable from 01A-Y0A3 to

01G-A1YP on page 1-52 or the cable

01A-Y0A2 to 01G-A1YR on page 1-52 or

Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom

Ÿ SCTL

Ÿ PUC

Ÿ PCC

Ÿ PS1

Ÿ Cable from 01A-Y0A3 to 01G-A1YP on page 1-52

Ÿ Cable from 01A-Y0A2 to 01G-A1YR on page 1-52

Basic board.

007

– Reconnect the cable connector.

– Disconnect cable connector 01A-Y0-A2 from the

MOSS board. Refer to Figure 4-9 on page 4-11.

– Press Power On Reset.

does the same error appear?

Yes No

008

Go to Step 002

009

– Reconnect the cable connector.

– Press Power Off.

– Exchange the PCC card (01A-X0B)

2-30

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 LAN MAP

MAP 4500: 3745 Models 17A Permanent Console Link Problem

Symptom Explanation

Console not accessible indicator

Console Message

Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom

Ÿ Service processor

Ÿ Ring

Ÿ Service processor access unit

Ÿ MLA card

001

Is there a panel code displayed on the 3745 control panel?

Yes No

002

Go to “3745 Control Panel Symptoms” on page 1-11.

003

Go to “3745 Control Panel Code” on page 2-32 for control panel code interpretation.

3745 MAPs

Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation

2-31

3745 MAPs

3745 Control Panel Code

BB0

BB1

BB2

BB3

BB4

BB5

BB6

BC0

BC1

BC2

B95

B96

B97

B98

B99

B9A

B9B

B9C

B9D

B9E

B9F

Table 2-2. 3745 Control Panel Code

3745 Control

Panel Code

Description

B8F LAN adapter check

B90

B91

B92

B93

B94

Hardware init error

Microcode error

Lobe media test failure

Signal loss while opening

Wire fault while opening

BC3

BC4

BD0

BE0

Open frequency error

Time out while opening

Ring failure while opening

Ring beaconing while open

Duplicate node address

Open request parameters

Open remove received

Open IMPL force received

No monitor for RPL at open

Lobe wire fault at open

Remote station connected

Time out

Link lost

DM/DISC received /acked

FRMR received

SABME received

Ti Timer expired

FMMR sent

Unexpected SABME received

Permanent ring beaconing

Lobe wire fault

Auto-removal while beaconing

Remove received

Auto-removal

FSM time out

Watchdog time out

Action

Exchange the MLA card.

Suspect a hardware problem (see Note 1).

Contact your support structure for assistance.

Suspect a hardware problem (see Note 1).

Suspect a ring problem (see Note 1).

Suspect a hardware problem (see Note 1).

Suspect a ring problem (see Note 1).

Suspect a hardware problem (see Note 1).

Suspect a problem in the service processor or ring problem (see Note 2).

Suspect a ring problem (see Note 1).

Suspect a hardware problem (see Note 1).

Suspect ring problem (see Note 1)

Suspect a hardware problem (see Note 1).

Suspect a problem in the service processor.

(see Note 2)

Notes:

1. Use the Token-Ring Network Problem Determination Guide, SX27-3710.

2. Check the ring and the service processor. Go to the Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual, chapter "Service Processor Problem Determination".

2-32

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 MAPs

3745 RSF MAP

MAP 4510: 3745 Model 17A Manual Call

You are here because there was a problem in connecting the service processor to RETAIN or because you want to test this facility.

Perform a manual call using the 3745 or the 3746-900 facilities to check this connection.

The service processor console must be logged ON. If it is not, go to “Console Use for Maintenance” on page 1-1 (for logging ON) and return here.

Before starting this MAP check the Remote Support facility options using the following procedure:

Ÿ

On the MOSS-E View window. Double-click on the service processor icon.

Ÿ The Service Processor Menu window is displayed.

Ÿ

Click on Configuration Management.

Ÿ Double-click on Manage Remote Operations.

Ÿ

Select Remote operations authorization in the Remote Operation Management window.

Ÿ Click on OK.

Ÿ

Ensure that the two following options are selected in the Remote Support Facility window:

Enable Remote Support Facility

Generate alerts

Ÿ Select them, if not already done, and click on OK.

Ÿ

Click on Cancel to return to the Service Processor Menu.

001

Is there a 3746-900 attached to your 3745?

Yes No

002

Go to Step 006.

003

Ÿ Return to the MOSS-E View window. Double-click on the 3746-900 icon.

Ÿ

Click on Problem Management.

Ÿ Double-click on Report Problem Using Remote Support Facilities.

Ÿ

Enter a short description in the Problem Analysis window. Testing the RSF link Click on OK.

Ÿ Click on OK, in the Report Problem Using RSF window.

Ÿ

Wait for either the alarm Call to RETAIN successful (indicating the normal end of transmission), or the message Call to RETAIN failed.

Ÿ

Write down the alarm number.

Is the alarm Call to RETAIN successful displayed?

Yes No

004

Go to Step 009 on page 2-34.

005

Go top Step 008 on page 2-34.

006

Ÿ Return to the MOSS-E View window. Double-click on the 3745 icon.

Ÿ

Click on Problem Management.

(Step 006 continues)

Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation

2-33

3745 MAPs

006 (continued)

Ÿ

Double-click on Report Problem Using Remote Support Facilities.

Ÿ Enter a short description: in the Problem Analysis window, 'Testing the RSF link'.

Ÿ

Click on OK.

Ÿ Click on OK in the Report Problem Using RSF window.

Ÿ

Wait for either the alarm Call to RETAIN successful (indicating the normal end of transmission), or the message Call to RETAIN failed.

Ÿ

Write down the alarm number.

Is the alarm Call to RETAIN successful displayed?

Yes No

007

Go to Step 009.

008

The connection to RETAIN is successful. The following table contains the alarms generated by this connection.

Select the Alarm

Number

0641

0642

0649

Meaning

Your microcode is up-to-date. Therefore no fix has been downloaded.

A fix has been downloaded automatically. Install the fix.

Call to RETAIN was successful but no downloaded., MCL is too large or there is not enough disk space.

Active and accepts all MCL(s) already received to free space disk and retry the normal call for the new MCL(s). If the problem persists call your support center.

There is a PE problem.

Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.

009

Locate the alarm number in the following table and perform the required action.

Select the Alarm

Number

0643

0644

064C

068C

068D

Action

Go to Step 010 on page 2-35

Call to RETAIN is not authorized. Refer to the

Service Processor Installation and

Maintenance, manual,( step on Recording the Customer Information).

The call to RETAIN has been performed but RETAIN required a disconnection due to a bad product setup. The following information is missing in the RETAIN customer CCPF file or the system registration file.

Ÿ

Customer number

Ÿ

Machine Model xxA

Ÿ Branch office number

Ÿ Area number

Ÿ Warranty/Status

Provide this information to your support before he contacts the RETAIN coordinator for updating.

Suspect a Communication Manager problem. Check the Communication Manager configuration. Refer to the

Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual,

(step on Setting Up Communication Parameters to Allow Remote and Netview

Operations). Re-boot the service processor. If the problem persits contact your support center.

Check the connection between the modem and the line. Check that the telephone number used is correct. Refer to the

Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual (step on Recording the Customer Information).

2-34

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 MAPs

010

Click on OK in the alarm window. A second alarm should be displayed. Locate this second alarm number in the following table and perform the required action.

Select the Alarm

Number

064A

064B

064D

0681

0682

0685

0686

0687

0688

0689

068A

Action

There is a PE problem. Call your support center for assistance.

There is a PE problem. Call your support center for assistance.

The call to RETAIN has not been performed because:

Ÿ The associated data has not been tersed or

Ÿ The associated tersed data has not been written to the service processor disk

(the partition was full). To free space on the disk perform the following steps:

1. Return to the MOSS-E View window.

2. Double-click on the service processor icon.

3. Click on Operation Management in the Service Processor Menu.

4. Double-click on Delete Engineering Data.

5. A Deleting Engineering Data window is displayed, asking you to confirm your choice.

6. Click on YES.

7. Follow the prompts.

8. When this operation is finished retry a call to RETAIN.

If the problem persists, contact your support center for assistance.

Suspect a multiprotocol adapter problem.

Ÿ Run the multiprotocol diagnostic.

Refer to the

Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual (chapter

How to Run the Service Processor Diagnostics).

Ÿ

Check that the Communication Manager has been correctly initialized.

Ÿ If everything is correct, suspect a modem problem. Refer to the modem documentation to run diagnostics.

Suspect a Communication Manager problem. Re-start the Communication Manager or if this fails re-boot the service processor.

The machine is not registered in the RETAIN data base. The following information is missing in RETAIN CCPF.

Ÿ

Machine type

Ÿ

Serial number

Provide this information to your support center before he contacts the RETAIN coordinator for updating.

Check the telephone number and prefix configuration. Refer to the Service

Processor Installation and Maintenance manual (step on Recording the Customer

Information).

Suspect an integrated modem problem.

Ÿ Run the integrated modem diagnostics using the wrap plug.

Refer to the Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual (chapter on How to Run the service processor diagnostics).

Ÿ If the modem is error free and if the problem persists, contact your support center for assistance.

Suspect an integrated modem problem.

Ÿ Run the modem diagnostic using the wrap plug.

Refer to the

Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual (chapter on How to Run the Service Processor Diagnostics).

Ÿ

If the modem is error free and if the problem persists, contact your support center for assistance.

The local modem is already in use. Check that the remote console is not in use.

The integrated modem is already in use. Check that the remote console is not in use.

Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation

2-35

3745 MAPs

Select the Alarm

Number

068B

Action

Suspect a modem problem.

Ÿ If you have an integrated modem, run the modem diagnostic using the wrap plug.

Refer to the Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual (chapter on How to Run the Service Processor Diagnostics).

Ÿ If you have an external modem, refer to the modem documentation to run diagnostics.

Ÿ

If the modem is error free, suspect a line problem. Call the appropriate service representative.

2-36

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745/3746-900/Service Processor MAPs

3745/3746-900/Service Processor MAPs

MAP 5200: 3745/3746-900/Service Processor/Network Node Processor

Icon Color Symptoms

Symptom Explanation

3745, 3746-900, or Network Node

Processor (NNP) problem

The 3745 icon, the 3746-900 icon, and/or the NNP icon in the

MOSS-E View window are not green.

Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom

Ÿ 3745 scanner and/or a CCU has failed.

Ÿ

3745 NCP not loaded.

Ÿ 3746-900 one or more processors, CBC, or ESCC have failed.

Ÿ No link between 3745 and/or 3746-900 with the service processor.

Ÿ No link between NNP and the service processor.

Ÿ

No link between NNP and the 3746-900.

Ÿ NNP has failed.

001

Ÿ The service processor console must be logged ON. If it is not, go to “Console Use for Maintenance” on page 1-1 (for logging ON) and return here.

Ÿ The color of the 3745, 3746-900, NNP, and the service processor icons reflects their status. For example a green icon indicates that the machine is operational. The following table describes the icon color selection.

Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation

2-37

3745/3746-900/Service Processor MAPs

Table 2-3. Icons Color Selection Table

Machine Icon Color

Service

Processor

White

3745

White

Grey

Pink

3746

Yellow

White

Grey

NNP-X

Pink

Red

White

Grey

Pink

Blue

Go to

Step 002 on page 2-38.

Step 003 on page 2-38.

Step 004 on page 2-39.

Step 005 on page 2-39.

Step 006 on page 2-39.

Step 007 on page 2-39.

Ÿ The 3746-900 is not connected to the service processor.

Ÿ Go to “MAP 5600: LAN Problem on the LAN Attached to the Service Processor” on page 2-42.

Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model

900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.

Step 008 on page 2-39.

The control point is starting and the configuration is activating This is a normal state. However if this state stay a too long time suspect a problem. Check if you have alarms at the service processor

Ÿ

There is no connection betweeen the service processor and the network node processor.

Or

Ÿ

The link is not ready between the 3746-9xx and the control point of the network node processor.

Refer to the

IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model

900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.

The control point is waiting for operator start, or no NDF

(Node Definition File). Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.

The connection between the service processor and the network node processor is OK. The network node processor is in standby mode. The control point must be started. Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.

002

The service processor icon is white.

Ÿ

Check if the yellow LED of the service processor (indicating disk access) is active.

Ÿ If the yellow LED is sometimes ON and sometimes OFF, wait a few more minutes. If the symptom persists, contact your support center for assistance.

Ÿ If the yellow LED is always OFF, contact your support center for assistance.

003

The 3745 icon is white.

Ÿ Check the displayed 3745 control panel code or the 3745 status on the service processor:

– On the MOSS-E View window, double-click on the 3745 icon.

– Click on Program (in the action bar).

– Click on Status option.

– The 3745 Controller Status window indicates the CCU status and the associated control code.

Ÿ Note the control code displayed. Then go to “3745 Control Panel Codes” on page 1-15 and follow the procedure.

2-38

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745/3746-900/Service Processor MAPs

004

The 3745 icon is grey.

Ÿ The 3745 is not connected to the service processor.

Ÿ Go to “MAP 5600: LAN Problem on the LAN Attached to the Service Processor” on page 2-42.

005

The 3745 icon is pink.

Ÿ Click on the 3745 icon pink.

Ÿ Click on Program in the action bar.

Ÿ Click on Status.

Ÿ The 3745 Controller Status window indicates the CCU status and if some adapters are unavailable.

Ÿ The normal status of CCU is loaded. If a CCU is not in this state check:

1. If the CCU control program has been loaded.

2. If the control program has started to load but has not terminated successfully. Go to “General

Verbal Symptoms” on page 1-8 and follow the procedure.

Ÿ If an adapter address is displayed in the unavailable adapters part of the 3745 Controller Status, run the diagnostic on the suspected adapter. Go to “3745 Maintenance Actions” on page 1-6 and follow the procedure.

006

The 3746-900 yellow icon is a normal state. Its duration depends on the 3746-900 configuration.

Ÿ On the 3746-900 control panel, check if there is a character displayed on the Service processor not

accessible digit.

Ÿ If a character is displayed, go to “MAP 5600: LAN Problem on the LAN Attached to the Service

Processor” on page 2-42. Otherwise check if the service processor yellow LED (indicating disk access) is active.

Ÿ If the yellow LED is sometimes ON or sometimes OFF, wait a few more minutes. If the symptom persists, contact your support center for assistance.

Ÿ If the yellow LED is always OFF, contact your support center for assistance.

007

The 3746-900 white icon is a normal state. Its duration depends on the 3746-900 configuration.

Ÿ Check either the displayed 3746-900 control panel code or the 3746-900 status on the service processor:

– On the MOSS-E View window double-click on the 3746-900 icon.

– Click on Program (in the action bar)

– Click on Status.

– The 3746-900 Status window indicates the IML steps, the address of any processor, CBC or unavailable ESCC, and the control panel code.

Ÿ Note the control panel code displayed. Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model

900 Service Guide, SY33-2116 for investigation.

008

The 3746-900 icon is red when it is set to Offline mode.

Ÿ To set the 3746-900 to Online mode follow these steps:

– Double-click on the 3746-900 icon.

– On the 3746-9x0 Menu window, click on Problem management.

– Click on Set 3746-9x0 Online/Offline option.

– On the Set 3646-900 Online/Offline window, click on Yes.

– On the next Set 3746-9x0 Online/Offline window, click on YES or NO (according to the current setting).

(Step 008 continues)

Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation

2-39

3745/3746-900/Service Processor MAPs

008 (continued)

– On the next Set 3746-9x0 Online/Offline window, click on OK.

Ÿ Start a general IML in order to set the 3746-900 in Online mode.

Ÿ

At IML completion, the 3746-900 icon must be green.

Ÿ Return to the MOSS-E View window.

Ÿ

Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102 to return the machine to the customer. If the problem persists contact your support center.

2-40

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745/3746-900/Service Processor MAPs

MAP 5205: LAN Checking

You are here because you suspect the LAN cable (WLOB) or the service processor access unit (ACUN) to be faulty.

001

Perform the following steps:

Ÿ Check that the service processor LAN cable is correctly connected to the rear of the service processor and in the service processor access unit.

Ÿ Check that all the LAN cables are correctly connected to the service processor access unit.

Did you find the problem?

Yes No

002

Exchange the suspected FRU.

003

Problem solved. Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.

Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation

2-41

Service Processor MAPs

Service Processor MAPs

MAP 5600: LAN Problem on the LAN Attached to the Service

Processor

Symptom Explanation

Unable to activate or deactivate a ring

Errors occur while ring is running

No connection with the service processor

Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom

Ÿ Service processor or network node processor LAN adapter

Ÿ

Ring

Ÿ Service processor access unit

Ÿ

3746-900 TIC3 or CBSP

Ÿ 3745 MLA card

Service

Processor

MOSS-E

LAN

Adapter

Service

Processor

Access

Unit

(Note 2)

3745

(Note 3)

3746-900

(Note 3)

NNP-B

Network Node

Processor

NNP-A (Note 1)

APPN LAN

Adapter

3746-950

Figure 2-5. LAN Attached to the Service Processor

Notes:

1. The network node processor is an optional feature which is present only when APPN is installed. Up to four network node processors can be installed on the same LAN. A backup network node processor can also be present.

2. The LAN can be made of two service processor access units (8228).

3. Only 37xx units can be connected to the LAN when APPN is installed.

001

You are here because there is a problem on the LAN that is attached to the service processor. The following links can be impacted (one or more):

Ÿ 3745 MOSS/MOSS-E link

Ÿ 3746-900/MOSS-E link

Ÿ 3746-900/APPN link (if present)

Ÿ MOSS-E/APPN link (if present)

(Step 001 continues)

2-42

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Service Processor MAPs

001 (continued)

Is the problem permanent?

Yes No

002

Go to Step 016 on page 2-44.

003

Does the problem appear on all units connected to the service processor?

Yes No

004

Go to Step 011.

005

Is the service processor powered ON?

Yes No

006

Power ON the service processor.

Is the service processor powered ON?

Yes No

007

Go to Step 010.

008

Problem solved.

009

Ÿ Check that the service processor LAN cables are correctly connected to the rear of the service processor

Ÿ Check that the LAN cables are correctly connected to the service processor access unit.

Ÿ

If everything is correct continue with Step 010.

010

Go to Service Processor Problem Determination in the corresponding Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual.

011

Is the problem only on a 3745?

Yes No

012

In the following list, select the unit that has a problem:

Faulty Unit Action:

3746-900

3746-950

Restart the problem determination using the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.

Restart the problem determination using the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 950 Service Guide, SY33-2108.

Network Node Processor

Perform the problem determination on the network node processor using the Network Node Processor Problem Determination in the corresponding Network Node Processor Installation and Maintenance

Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation

2-43

Service Processor MAPs

Other unit

manual.

If you have a unit other than a 3745, 3746-900, or 3746-950 connected to the LAN, refer to the specific documentation of this unit or do the problem determination on the ring using, the Token-Ring

Network Problem Determination Guide, SX27-3710.

013

Is there a panel code displayed on the 3745 control panel?

Yes No

014

Go to “3745 Control Panel Symptoms” on page 1-11.

015

Go to “3745 Control Panel Code” on page 2-32 for control panel code interpretation.

016

You are here because you have transient errors on the service processor LAN .

Does the problem appear on all units connected to the service processor?

Yes No

017

Go to Step 019.

018

Ÿ Check that the service processor LAN cable is correctly connected to the rear of the service processor.

Ÿ Check that all the LAN cables are correctly connected to the service processor access unit.

Ÿ Do the problem determination on the ring using, the Token-Ring Network Problem Determination

Guide, SX27-3710.

Ÿ If you do not identify the problem, contact your support center.

019

Is the problem only on a 3745?

Yes No

020

Faulty Unit

3746-900

3746-950

Network Node Processor

Other unit

Action:

Restart the problem determination using the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.

Restart the problem determination using the

IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 950 Service Guide, SY33-2108.

Perform the problem determination on the network node processor using the Network Node Processor Problem Determination in the corresponding Network Node Processor Installation and Maintenance manual.

If you have a unit other than a 3745, 3746-900, or 3746-950 connected on the LAN, refer to the specific documentation of this unit or do the problem determination on the ring using, the Token-Ring

Network Problem Determination Guide, SX27-3710.

021

2-44

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Service Processor MAPs

Go to Step 022.

022

Ÿ If your are not already logged ON at service processor console, go to “Console Use for Maintenance” on page 1-1 for log ON. Then return here.

Ÿ On the MOSS-E View window, double-click on the desired 3745 icon.

Ÿ Click on MOSS.

Ÿ On the MOSS screen, enter ELD (Event Log Display) and press Enter on the service processor keyboard.

Ÿ On the next MOSS screen, enter 7 (alarm) and press Enter on the service processor keyboard.

Ÿ In the list, check the presence of alarms type 11 (link lost) showing a problem on LAN.

Is there an alarm type 11?

Yes No

023

Perform the problem determination on the ring using the, Token-Ring Network Problem Determination Guide, SX27-3710.

024

Ÿ Record the selection number of each alarm 11. Enter this selection number and press the Enter key on the service processor keyboard.

Ÿ On the next MOSS screen, record the panel code.

Ÿ Repeat the two preceding steps for each alarm type 11. Then go to “3745 Control Panel Code” on page 2-32 to interpret the panel codes and continue the procedure.

Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation

2-45

Service Processor MAPs

2-46

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Diagnostics

Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics

Diagnostic Description

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2

3745 Diagnostics

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2

Errors During Diagnostics

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2

Diagnostic Monitoring

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2

Checkout Diagnostics

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2

CBA Diagnostic

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-3

CBA Diagnostics from 3745 MOSS Console

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-3

Prerequisites to Run the CBA Test from the 3745 MOSS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-3

How to Run MOSS Diagnostics

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4

From the 3745 Console

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4

From the Control Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4

How to Loop MOSS Diagnostics

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-5

How to Run the Console Link Test for 3745 Models 130, 150, 160, and 170

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-6

Local/Remote or Alternate/RSF Link Tests

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-6

How to Run the Control Panel Test

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-8

How to Run Internal Function Tests

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-9

How to Invoke Diagnostics

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-9

How to Select Diagnostics

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-10

Options Menu

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-11

Error Menu

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-12

How to Run the LIC Wrap Test with IFTs

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-13

Install the Wrap Plug

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-13

Start the Diagnostic

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-13

How to Run the Wrap Test (WTT) for TSS, HPTSS, or 3746-900

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-15

Wrap Test Initial Selection for TSS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-16

Wrap Test Initial Selection for HPTSS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-18

Wrap Test Initial Selection for 3746-900

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-19

Available Wrap Options

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-20

Available Wrap Plugs

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-22

How to Run the Channel Wrap Test

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-25

Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997

3-1

Diagnostics

Diagnostic Description

3745 Diagnostics

Two groups of diagnostics run on the 3745:

1. Automatic:

IML/IPL checkout diagnostics including MOSS diagnostics.

2. Controlled:

Ÿ Internal function tests (IFTs)

Ÿ Wrap tests

Ÿ OLTs.

Diagnostics are run during the installation procedure and when a fault is detected to isolate a field-replaceable unit that caused the failure. They are also executed after a repair is performed, to check that the hardware area is working correctly.

They must be run before and after an EC or MES has been installed in the area concerned.

Diagnostics may be run in offline mode when the

3745 is fully available or in concurrent mode. In concurrent mode, the diagnostic must be selected in the specific area and will run only in configured units. These units must be available at that time.

Errors During Diagnostics

When the MOSS diagnostic program detects a failure, a three-digit code is displayed on the control panel.

When the internal function tests detect an error, a reference code is posted on the 3745 console.

Diagnostic Monitoring

The controlled diagnostics are monitored by the diagnostic control monitor (DCM) and the command processor (CP).

The diagnostic control monitor is loaded when the diagnostic utility program is selected from the

3745 function menu.

It automatically restricts the diagnostic testing to the elements that are defined in the configuration data file (CDF) and disconnected from the NCP.

Checkout Diagnostics

The checkout diagnostics are designed to test the hardware of the CCU, IOC, Channel Adapter, CSP part of the line adapter, TIC, and the PCC card.

For the CA, LA, and TIC, diagnostics are part of the microcode and are located in the ROS of the adapter itself. They run automatically at power

ON time before IML.

The cyclic PCC checkouts run when the machine is powered ON and are successful when the power control and service mode indicators are displayed.

For the CCU and IOC, the diagnostics are located on the disk and run during IPL.

For the CA, TSS, HPTSS, and ESS, they are also automatically run when the internal function tests are started.

For the TIC, the token-ring wrap test is automatically run at each TIC Open command from the

NCP. This TIC Internal Lobe Media tests the ring up to the local wiring concentrator (IBM 8228), or up to the point where it is unplugged before the

8228.

If an error is detected, the MOSS analyzes the problem and presents a control panel code or a reference code.

3-2

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

CBA Diagnostic

The link between the 3745 and the 3746-900 is checked via CBA routines invoked from the 3745

MOSS console.

CBA Diagnostics from 3745 MOSS

Console:

New diagnostic sections are provided to test the 3745/3746-900 interface. These sections must be run manually and offline.

Ÿ IOC interface is tested by the new section:

The IDxx section tests the path between the

CCU and IOC Bus.

– ID01: Use of IOC test register.

– ID02: Test of bad parity

– ID03: Interrupt test.

The run time is about 1 minute and 30 seconds.

Ÿ DMA interface is tested by a new section

XAxx.

IOC/DMA Bus

Diagnostics

– XA01: DMA test.

– XA02: Extended DMA test.

The run time is about 6 minutes per coupler.

Prerequisites to Run the CBA Test from the 3745 MOSS

Ÿ The 3745 must be powered ON and in offline mode.

Ÿ The 3746-900 must be powered ON and in online mode.

Ÿ The CBC and the CBSP must not be in concurrent mode.

Ÿ The CBC and the CBSP must be available in the CDF-E.

Ÿ The 3746-900 must be error free.

Refer to Figure 3-1 for the coverage of CBA diagnostics.

CBC

CBA

: Tested by CBA Diagnostics

: Not Tested by CBA Diagnostics

Figure 3-1. CBA Diagnostic Coverage

Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics

3-3

Diagnostics

How to Run MOSS Diagnostics

These tests can be run without stopping the customer's application.

Ÿ Error conditions will result in a control panel code being displayed. Actions for these codes are defined in “3745 Control Panel

Codes” on page 1-15.

or

Ÿ

Some errors will result in a reference code at

IML completion. These types can also be recognized by the panel code displaying F0D.

Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14 for action.

Ensure that the MOSS is offline or alone (look at

MOSS Status Area on the second line of the console screen) and that service mode (panel) is

0 or 1.

From the 3745 Console

1. On the 3745 console, select Menu 1 (see PF key line).

2. In Menu 1, type IML in the selection area for

IML MOSS.

3. After approximately 2 minutes the console will be re-initialized with the Channel

Enable/Disable screen which indicates that a successful run of MOSS diagnostics and the

MOSS IML have been completed.

4. If the console has not been re-initialized, an error was detected.

From the Control Panel

1. Set the function to MOSS IML: a. Press Service until the number 0 or 1 is displayed in the service window. (No bypass of MOSS diagnostics.)

b. Press Validate.

c. Press Function until the number 1 is displayed in the function window.

d. Press Validate.

2. If after approximately 2 minutes the control panel displays code F0F, the MOSS diagnostics and a MOSS IML have been successfully completed. Code F0E can be displayed if the

MOSS was previously alone (that is not in

offline mode).

3. If any other code is displayed, an error was detected.

3-4

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Diagnostics

How to Loop MOSS Diagnostics

If an intermittent MOSS problem is suspected, the

loop MOSS diagnostics facility can be used as follows:

Ensure that the MOSS is offline or alone

(check the MOSS Status Area, on the second line of the console screen).

1. Set the service mode to Maintenance 1: a. Press Service until the number 1 is displayed in the service window.

b. Press Validate.

2. Set the function to loop on MOSS diagnostics: a. Press Function until the digit A is displayed in the function window.

b. Press Validate.

3. The MOSS diagnostics will run continuously unless an error is detected. Usually 5 to 10 minutes of error free operation are sufficient to determine whether the MOSS is working satisfactorily. If an error is detected, a panel code will be permanently displayed. Therefore, go to “3745 Control Panel Codes” on page 1-15.

Gentle vibration of the MOSS cables and cards (while the test is running), will locate most loose connection problems.

If no error is detected:

4. Set the function to MOSS IML: a. Press Function until 1 is displayed in the function window.

b. Press Validate.

5. When the control panel displays F0F (or F0E if the MOSS was previously alone), perform a

MOSS online. Refer to “How to Put the

MOSS Online” on page 4-105.

Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics

3-5

Diagnostics

How to Run the Console Link Test for 3745 Models 130, 150, 160, and

170

This function is available for 3745 Models 130,

150, 160, and 170 only.

This function tests the customer's console ports with wrap plugs which may be installed at the end of the cable. They are attached to either the local console, the remote console modem, or the RSF link modem. The wrap plugs can also be installed at the connectors for these cables in the 3745 (not possible with the 3727 console cable).

This test can be run without stopping the customers application.

Local/Remote or Alternate/RSF

Link Tests

1. Ensure that the customer is not using any of the 3745 consoles and also confirm the availability of MOSS.

2. Set the power control to local: a. Press Power Control until 3 is displayed in the power control window.

b. Press Validate.

3. Set Service mode to Maintenance 1: a. Press Service until the number 1 is displayed in the service window.

b. Press Validate.

RSF

J1

Remote

J2

Local

J3

01R

Figure 3-2. Console Output

4. We advise you to start the wrap plugging from the far end of the DCE interface cable. Refer to Figure 3-3 on page 3-7 for the different cable configurations.

5. Remove the DCE interface cable from the console, modem, or console switch (the DCE interface cable may be connected directly to the DCE, or to an intermediate "adapter". In

the second case remove the the DCE inter-

face cable from the "adapter").

6. Connect the appropriate wrap plug to the end of the cable.

Wrap plug to be used according to the DCE interface cable and to the console:

Ÿ DCE interface cable between the 3745 and the console/modem without an intermediate "adapter" (

.A/

in Figure 3-3).

Use wrap plug PN 6398697.

Ÿ DCE interface cable between the 3745 and the console/modem with an intermediate "adapter" (

.B/

in Figure 3-3).

Use the wrap plug PN 2667737.

Ÿ DCE interface cable between the 3745 and the console switch (7427) (

.C/

in

Figure 3-3).

Use the wrap plug PN 2667737.

Ÿ DCE interface cable between the console with the (7427) and the console/modem

(

.D/

in Figure 3-3).

Use the wrap plug PN 6398697 for a console 31XX or the wrap plug PN

2667737 for a 3727 console.

Important:

The cable connecting to the alternate console must be tested on the Local output with the test option 8.

OR

Open the rear cover of the 3745 base frame.

Remove the appropriate cable (if installed) from the output and connect the wrap plug PN

6398697. See Figure 3-2.

7. Set the function to the link test required: either remote/alternate, RSF, or local: a. Press Function until 6, 7 or 8 is displayed in the function window.

Ÿ

6 (remote/alternate)

Ÿ 7 (RSF)

Ÿ

8 (Local).

b. Press Validate.

8. After a partial MOSS IML the following panel codes will be displayed:

a. LOCAL.

1B1: Start of test

1B2: Successful completion of test.

b. REMOTE/ALTERNATE

1B3: Start of test

1B4: Successful completion of test.

c. RSF

1B5: Start of test

1B6: Successful completion of test.

3-6

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

If any other panel code is displayed, disconnect the wrap plug. Go to “3745 Control

Panel Codes” on page 1-15 and follow the instructions.

9. Disconnect the wrap plug and reconnect the cable.

10. Set service mode to NORMAL: a. Press Service until 0 is displayed in the function window.

b. Press Validate.

3745

External Cable

(DCE Interface Cable)

MOSS

Board

Tailgate

Internal Cable

A

Console or

Modem

3745

MOSS

Board

External Cable

(DCE Interface Cable)

Adapter

Console or

Modem

Tailgate

Internal Cable

B

Diagnostics

11. Set the function to MOSS IML: a. Press Function until 1 is displayed in the function window.

b. Press Validate.

12. When the control panel displays F0F or F0E if the MOS was previously alone), perform a

MOSS online. Refer to “How to Put the

MOSS Online” on page 4-105.

13. The console link test has completed with no error detected.

3745

External Cable

(DCE Interface Cable)

External Cable

(DCE Interface Cable)

MOSS

Board

Tailgate

Internal Cable

Figure 3-3. Cable Configurations

C

7427

D

Console or

Modem

Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics

3-7

Diagnostics

How to Run the Control Panel Test

This test can be run without stopping the customers application.

This test is not a sequential test and can be cancelled at any time by pressing Exit.

Notes:

1. Any inactivity (during the panel test), of approximately 60 seconds will result in the test being automatically cancelled and the panel will return to operational mode.

2. During this test, the control panel audible alarm will sound for each action.

The special character can be described as when every possible segment of the window is being lit:

1. Set the power to local: a. Press Power Control until 3 is displayed in the power control window.

b. Press Validate.

If the above action cannot be performed, go to Step 11.

2. Set Service mode to Maintenance 1: a. Press Service until the number 1 is displayed in the service window.

b. Press Validate.

If the above action can not be performed go to Step 11.

3. Set Function to panel test: a. Press Function until 5 is displayed in the function window.

b. Press Validate.

If the above action can not be performed go to Step 11.

Observe the display: All 10 special characters will be displayed.

If the pattern is not identical for each figure, go to Step 11.

Note: If during the following steps the function window displays the digit 5. The the control panel has detected its own failure.

Continue at Step 11.

4. Press Function.

Observe the display: The Function window

special character will be displayed. Repetitive action will scroll through the Code window sequentially and wrap around.

If this does not occur, go to Step 12.

5. Press Service.

Observe the display: The Service window

special character will be displayed. Repetitive action will scroll through the Power

Control window and wrap around.

If this does not occur, go to Step 12.

6. Press Power Control.

Observe the display: The Console in Use window special character will be displayed.

Repetitive action will scroll through the All CA

Disabled MOSS Inop and the MOSS Msg windows sequentially and wrap around.

If this does not occur, go to Step 12.

7. Press Power On Reset.

Observe the display: The digit 8 will be displayed in the Function window.

If this does not occur, go to Step 12.

8. Press Power Off.

Observe the display: The display will be completely blank.

If this does not occur, go to Step 12.

9. Press Exit.

Observe the display: The display will present the Power Control and Service Mode indicating that the test is complete, and the panel has returned to operational mode.

If this does not occur, go to Step 12.

10. The control panel test has completed with

no error detected. Discard Steps 11 and

12 . Return to the procedure where you come from.

11. Exchange the FRU group 35. Go to “3745

FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.

12. Exchange the FRU group 10. Go to “3745

FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.

3-8

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Diagnostics

How to Run Internal Function Tests

How to Invoke Diagnostics:

On the 3745 console, press F5 in Menu 1 to display the maintenance function Menu (Menu 3).

à

CUSTOMER ID:

CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-OFFLINE

3745

X71:ð2ð415

X72:ðððð85

SERIAL NUMBER:

-------------------------------------------------------------- ð1/12/87 ð4:29

MENU 3

MISUSE OF MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS MAY LEAD TO UNPREDICTABLE RESULTS

BER CORRELATION..: BRC MODULE DISPLAY...: MDD TSS SERVICES.....: TSS

CADS SERVICES....: CAS

CONCURRENT DIAGS.: CDG

DUMP DISPLAY/DEL.: DDD

MOSS STORE DSPLY.: MSD

OFFLINE DIAGS....: ODG

POWER SERVICES...: POS

TRSS SERVICES....: TRS

ENTER OFF TO LOG OFF

===>

ð

F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM

á

F4:MENU1 F6:RULES

ñ

Figure 3-4. Maintenance Functions Menu

See Figure 3-4.

In this menu, two options are available to run diagnostics:

Notes:

2. ODG to run diagnostics in offline mode when the 3745 is fully available for maintenance.

1. CDG to run diagnostics in concurrent diag-

nostics mode.

Selected diagnostics will run whatever the

Selected diagnostics will run if the adapter is available (ask the customer to disconnect the related resources), and only the sections or routines allowed to run in concurrent mode will be called without interfering the 3745 operation.

status of the adapter.

For channel diagnostics, all the channel interfaces must be disabled.

ODG must be used if conditions for concurrent maintenance mode are not met (no NCP or

CCU running).

For channel diagnostics:

Diagnostics must be used in CDG mode if more than one CA is present and if CCU +

NCP are running. If it is not the case, use

ODG.

Ÿ Based on the previous notes, Type ODG or CDG after ===> and press SEND.

Ÿ Continue with “How to Select Diagnostics” on page 3-10.

Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics

3-9

Diagnostics

How to Select Diagnostics

à

CUSTOMER ID:

CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-OFFLINE

3745

X71:ð2ð415

X72:ðððð85

SERIAL NUMBER:

-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð7/87 ðð:21

FUNCTION ON SCREEN: OFFLINE DIAGS

GROUP :ADP# :LINE :

1 ALL : : :

2 CCU : A- B:

3 IOCB: 1- 4:

4 CA : 1-16: :

5 TSS : 1-32: ð-31:

:

:

6 TRSS: 1- 6: 1- 2:

7 HTSS: 1- 8: :

8 OLT : 1-16:

9 ESS : 1- 8:

:

:

Xð CBA : 1- 2:

OPT= Y IF MODIFY :

DIAGNOSTICS INITIALIZATION

ð

OPTION REQUIRED :

: ENTER REQUEST ACCORDING TO THE DIAG MENU

: DIAG==> ADP#==> LINE==> OPT==>

===>

F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM

á ñ

Figure 3-5. How to Select Diagnostics

After entering ODG or CDG in Menu 3, the diagnostic menu is displayed. See Figure 3-5.

Four input fields are available in this menu:

Ÿ DIAG==> Diagnostic group (1-10), IFT, section, or routine to be run.

Example:

2 (full set of CCU IFTs)

K (section K of IOC diagnostics)

AC01 (specific routine of CCU diagnostics)

Note

If you select 3 (IOCB) with no adapter installed, a warning will be reported (invalid request).

Ÿ ADP#==> Adapter number

Ÿ LINE==> Line number for TSS, TRSS,

HPTSS, or ESS. The line number is obtained from the LID function (in Menu 1) by entering the line address.

Ÿ OPT==> Y to display the option menu.

If the ALL option is entered, diagnostics will be run on all adapters in the CDF and disconnected from the NCP.

Note

Do not select ALL when a channel adapter and an Ethernet adapter are installed. An error will be reported on the Ethernet adapter.

Type your request in the input fields and press

SEND.

If OPT==>Y is entered, the option menu is displayed. See Figure 3-6 on page 3-11. If not, the diagnostic is started and the diagnostic result is displayed in this frame.

3-10

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Diagnostics

Options Menu

à

CUSTOMER ID:

CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-OFFLINE

3745

X71:ð2ð415

X72:ðððð85

SERIAL NUMBER:

-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð6/87 ðð:15

FUNCTION ON SCREEN: OFFLINE DIAGS

:

R RERUN REQUEST :

A ABORT ROUTINE :

C CANCEL REQUEST :

G GO :

M MODIFY OPTIONS: :

S/LS/AL/ALS/B/DM :

NW/W : START ð9:58:15

C1/CNNN/C

R1/RNNN

BR/NBR

: REQUEST: CCU

: OPTIONS: S

:

NW C1 R1 BR

DIAGNOSTICS INITIALIZATION

: ENTER REQUEST ACCORDING TO THE DIAG MENU

: ==>M R2

===>

ð

F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM

á ñ

Figure 3-6. How to Enter Options

When the OPT field is set to Y in the diagnostic menu, the options menu is displayed. See

Figure 3-6.

The default options are automatically displayed.

Options: Meaning

S

LS

Stop on first error.

Loop on first error with stop.

AL

ALS

B

DM

NW

W

Automatic loop on error.

Automatic loop on error with new error stop.

Bypass error stop.

Display multiple errors.

No wait before execution of each routine.

Wait before execution of each routine.

C1/CNNN/C Cycle request option.

R1/RNNN Repeat routine option.

BR/NBR BER recording option.

1. Enter or modify the option using the M function followed by the option or options needed

(for example : M C5 DM will cause your request to cycle 5 times and display multiple errors).

Only one option per line of the menu can be selected. If more than one option is entered, only the last one is accepted.

2. Press SEND

Restart the same procedure to enter the other options if needed.

3. Enter G

4. Press SEND.

The diagnostic is started and the diagnostic result is displayed on this frame.

If an error is detected, an error message is displayed. See Figure 3-7 on page 3-12.

Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics

3-11

Diagnostics

Error Menu

à

CUSTOMER ID:

CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-OFFLINE

3745

X71:ð2ð415

X72:ðððð85

SERIAL NUMBER:

-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/87 1ð:17

FUNCTION ON SCREEN: OFFLINE DIAGS

: \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

R RERUN REQUEST : \RH B3ð322ð8 \

FRU REMOVAL ==> POWER OFF

A ABORT ROUTINE : \RAC 8ð5ðAðððð \ ERR BIT FFFFFFð2

ERROR COUNT ðððð1 C CANCEL REQUEST : \ ERC ACð1ð7ð1 \

GO : \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

M MODIFY OPTIONS: :

ð

S/LS/AL/ALS/B/DM :

NW/W : START 1ð:13:46 STOP 1ð:18:ð2

C1/CNNN/C

R1/RNNN

BR/NBR

: REQUEST: AC

: OPTIONS: S

:

NW C1 R1 NER

CCU DIAG RUNNING

ROUTINE ACð1 ADP ðA

===>

: ENTER REQUEST ACCORDING TO THE DIAG MENU

: ==>

\\\ERROR FOUND\\\

F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM

á ñ

Figure 3-7. Error Menu

Note: The RH field contains the reference code.

3-12

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Diagnostics

How to Run the LIC Wrap Test with IFTs

Install the Wrap Plug:

Ÿ

For HPTSS

Install the wrap plug PN 58X9349 for V35 or

PN 58X9354 for X.21 on the tailgate connector.

Ÿ

For ESS

Install the wrap plug PN 70X8670 on the tailgate connector.

Ÿ

For LIC Types 1 and 4

Install the wrap plug PN 65X8927 on the LIC connector. See Figure 3-8 and Figure 3-10 on page 3-23.

Ÿ

For LIC Type 3

Install the wrap cable PN 65X8928 between the two sockets. See Figure 3-9 and

Figure 3-10 on page 3-23.

Notes:

1. To fully test the port (all control leads) install the wrap cable and run the test.

2. Reverse the wrap cable ends (between the DCE and direct attach connector).

3. Repeat the test.

Ÿ

For LIC Types 5 and 6

1. Unplug the line cable at the customer wall frame.

2. Install the appropriate wrap plug (see following list) at the end of the cable or unplug the line cable from both ends.

3. Install the wrap plug PN 11F4815 at the tail gate connector (the line cable must be unplugged from wall frame for line loading reasons.). See Figure 3-11 and

Figure 3-12 on page 3-24.

LIC Types 5 and 6 Wrap Plug Country Part

Number

Country

Austria

Belgium

France

Germany

Hong Kong

Israel

Italy

Japan

Luxemburg

Part Number

6162946

6162950

6162955

6162950

65X8070

66X1954

6162957

6124644

6162950

Netherlands

Switzerland

U.K.

U.S.A./Canada

6162948

66X0748

65X8069

66X0807

Start the Diagnostic

Ÿ

For HPTSS

1. Update the CDF to indicates that the lines to be tested have wrap plugs installed.

Refer to

IBM 3745 Service Functions.

2. Using “How to Run Internal Function

Tests” on page 3-9, enter the following: a. Diagnostic group 7 in the DIAG==> area.

b. Adapter number in the

ADP#==> area.

3. Press SEND.

Ÿ

For ESS

1. Using “How to Run Internal Function

Tests” on page 3-9 enter the following: a. Diagnostic group 9 in the DIAG==> area.

b. Adapter number in the

ADP#==> area.

2. Press SEND.

Ÿ

For LIC Types 1, 3, and 4

Using “How to Run Internal Function Tests” on page 3-9, enter the following:

1. Routine number RC01 in the

DIAG==> area.

2. Adapter number in the

ADP#==> area.

3. Line number in the LINE==> area. You may obtain the line number from the LID function (in Menu 1) by entering the line address.

4. Press SEND.

Ÿ

For LIC Types 5, and 6

Using “How to Run Internal Function Tests” on page 3-9 enter the following :

1. Routine number RH59 in the

DIAG==> area.

2. Adapter number in the ADP#==> area.

Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics

3-13

Diagnostics

3. Line number in the LINE==> area. You may obtain the line number from the LID function

(in Menu 1) by entering the line address.

4. Press SEND.

3-14

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

How to Run the Wrap Test (WTT) for TSS, HPTSS, or 3746-900

Attention: The MOSS must be online to start this procedure.

1. Select Menu 1.

2. Type WTT

3. Press SEND/ENTER.

The Wrap Test Initial Selection screen is displayed:

à

CUSTOMER ID:

CCA-A

RESET

PROCESS MOSS-ALONE

BYP-IOC-CHK STOP-CCU-CHK

3745-xxx

X71:ðAð8ðð

X72:ðBC8ðð

SERIAL NUMBER:

ð

-------------------------------------------------------------- mm/dd/yy hh:mm

FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST

WRAP TEST INITIAL SELECTION

- SELECT THE COMMUNICATION SUBSYSTEM (1, 2, 3) ==>

1 = TSS

2 = HPTSS

3 = 3746-9ðð

THEN PRESS ENTR

===>

F1:END F2:MENU2

á ñ

If you select:

Ÿ 1 = TSS: Go to “Wrap Test Initial Selection for TSS” on page 3-16

Ÿ 2 = HPTSS: Go to “Wrap Test Initial Selection for HPTSS” on page 3-18

Ÿ 3 = 3746-900: Go to “Wrap Test Initial Selection for 3746-900” on page 3-19

Diagnostics

Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics

3-15

Diagnostics

Wrap Test Initial Selection for TSS

Follow the instructions in the following screen.

à

CUSTOMER ID:

CCA-A

RESET

PROCESS MOSS-ALONE

BYP-IOC-CHK STOP-CCU-CHK

3745-xxx

X71:ðAð8ðð

X72:ðBC8ðð

SERIAL NUMBER:

-------------------------------------------------------------- mm/dd/yy hh:mm

FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST

WRAP TEST INITIAL SELECTION FOR TSS

- SELECT ONE OPTION (1,2) ==> (A)

1 = AUTOMATIC WRAP TEST ON LIC UNIT

2 = WRAP TEST AT ANY LEVEL

ð

THEN PRESS SEND

===>

F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM

á

(A)

Enter 1 or 2 here to select the wrap test option.

Option 1: Follow the instructions in the following screen.

ñ

à

CUSTOMER ID:

CCA-A

RESET

PROCESS MOSS-ALONE

BYP-IOC-CHK STOP-CCU-CHK

3745-xxx

X71:ðAð8ðð

X72:ðBC8ðð

SERIAL NUMBER:

-------------------------------------------------------------- mm/dd/yy hh:mm

FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST

AUTOMATIC WRAP TEST ON LIC UNIT

ð

- ENTER A LINE ADDRESS OF THE LIC (ðððð-ð895) ==> (B)

WARNING: ALL LINES OF THE LIC MUST BE DISABLED/DEACTIVATED

===>

F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM

á

F4:WRAP TEST INITIAL SELECTION

(B)

Enter the line address here.

ñ

3-16

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Diagnostics

Option 2: Follow the instructions in the following screen and select the wrap level 4 (tailgate).

à

CUSTOMER ID:

CCA-A

RESET

PROCESS MOSS-ALONE

BYP-IOC-CHK STOP-CCU-CHK

3745-xxx

X71:ðAð8ðð

X72:ðBC8ðð

SERIAL NUMBER:

-------------------------------------------------------------- mm/dd/yy hh:mm

FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST

WRAP TEST INITIAL SELECTION FOR TSS

ð

F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM

á

- ENTER LINE ADDRESS (ðððð-ð895) ==> (B)

- ENTER WRAP TYPE (1 to 2) ==>

1 = DATA

2 = CONTROL LEADS

- ENTER WRAP LEVEL (1 to 4) ==> (C)

1 = LOCAL MODEM

2 = NTT CABLE (TSS ONLY)

3 = LIC (DATA WRAP ONLY)

4 = TAILGATE

LINE(S) TO BE TESTED MUST BE DISABLED/DEACTIVATED

===>

F4:INITIAL SELECTION

ñ

(B)

Enter the line address here.

(C)

Enter 4 here to select the tailgate level

Ÿ

For LIC Types 1, and 4

Install the wrap plug PN 65X8927 on the LIC connector. See Figure 3-8 on page 3-23 and

Figure 3-10 on page 3-23.

Ÿ

For LIC Type 3

Install the wrap cable PN 65X8928 between the two sockets. See Figure 3-9 on page 3-23 and Figure 3-10 on page 3-23.

Notes:

1. The test must be run a second time with the wrap cable reversed end to end.

2. If you are working on a line adapter with one line at 256 kbps connected to and at least one other line, and if these lines are initialized at the NCP activation, you are not allowed to run the WTT on these lines.

Ÿ

For LIC Types 5, and 6

1. Unplug the line cable at the customer wall frame.

2. Install the appropriate wrap plug (see following list) at the end of the cable or unplug the line cable from both ends.

3. Install the wrap plug PN 11F4815 at the

LIC connector (the line cable must be unplugged from the wall frame when necessary for telephone line loading reason).

See Figure 3-11 on page 3-24 and

Figure 3-12 on page 3-24.

LIC Types 5 and 6 Wrap Plug Country Part

Number

Country

Austria

Part Number

6162946

Belgium

France

Germany

6162950

6162955

6162950

Hong Kong

Israel

Italy

Japan

Luxemburg

Netherlands

Switzerland

U.K.

U.S.A./Canada

65X8070

66X1954

6162957

6124644

6162950

6162948

66X0748

65X8069

66X0807

Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics

3-17

Diagnostics

Wrap Test Initial Selection for HPTSS

Follow the instructions in the following screen.

à

CUSTOMER ID:

CCA-A

RESET

PROCESS MOSS-ALONE

BYP-IOC-CHK STOP-CCU-CHK

3745-xxx

X71:ðAð8ðð

X72:ðBC8ðð

SERIAL NUMBER:

-------------------------------------------------------------- mm/dd/yy hh:mm

FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST

WRAP TEST INITIAL SELECTION FOR HPTSS

ð

F1:END F2:MENU2

á

- ENTER LINE ADDRESS (1ð24-1ð39) ==> (B)

- ENTER WRAP TYPE (1 to 2) ==>

1 = DATA

2 = CONTROL LEADS

- ENTER WRAP LEVEL (1 to 4) ==> (C)

1 = LOCAL MODEM (DATA WRAP ONLY) 4 = TAILGATE

2 = REMOTE MODEM (DATA WRAP ONLY)

3 = INTERNAL

LINE(S) TO BE TESTED MUST BE DISABLED/DEACTIVATED

===>

F4:INITIAL SELECTION

ñ

(B)

Enter the line address here.

(C)

Enter 4 here to select the tailgate level.

For HPTSS

Install the wrap plug PN 58X9349 for V.35 or PN 58X9354 for X.21 on the tailgate connector.

3-18

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Diagnostics

Wrap Test Initial Selection for 3746-900

Follow the instructions in the following screen.

à

CUSTOMER ID:

CCA-A

RESET

PROCESS MOSS-ALONE

BYP-IOC-CHK STOP-CCU-CHK

3745-xxx

X71:ðAð8ðð

X72:ðBC8ðð

SERIAL NUMBER:

-------------------------------------------------------------- mm/dd/yy hh:mm

FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST

WRAP TEST INITIAL SELECTION FOR 3746-9ðð

ð

F1:END F2:MENU2

á

- ENTER LINE ADDRESS (2112-3135) ==> (A)

- ENTER WRAP TYPE (1 to 2) ==> (B)

1 = DATA

2 = CONTROL LEADS

CCU (A, B) ==>

- ENTER WRAP LEVEL (1 to 5) ==> (C)

1 = LOCAL MODEM 4 = NTT CABLE

2 = REMOTE MODEM (DATA WRAP ONLY) 5 = WRAP PLUG

3 = INTERNAL

LINE(S) TO BE TESTED MUST BE DISABLED/DEACTIVATED

===>

F4:INITIAL SELECTION

ñ

(A)

Enter the line address here.

(B)

Select the required option.

Notes:

1. The control leads option is not valid when requesting the local and remote modem wrap level on LIC12.

2. On LIC16 the control leads option is not available.

(C)

Enter the desired wrap option

(see “Available Wrap Options” on page 3-20).

Ÿ The following screens prompt you:

– To enter the numbers of wraps.

– To install (if necessary) the wrap plug according to the entity tested (see “Available Wrap Plugs” on page 3-22).

Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics

3-19

Diagnostics

Available Wrap Options

Wrap Option Available on LIC11

3745

3746-900

LIC11

LCB

ARC

(1)

Local

Modem

(2) (3)

Line

Remote

Modem

(4)

DTE

Ÿ (1) Internal level wrap

Ÿ (2) NTT cable wrap

Ÿ (3) Local modem level wrap

Ÿ (4) Remote modem level wrap

3745

3746-900

LIC11

LCB

ARC

W

(5)

Ÿ (5) ARC Wrap plug for testing the ARC and its cable. Select the appropriate ARC wrap plug according to the type of ARC (see Table 3-1 on page 3-22).

ARC Assembly A

ARC Assembly B

Note: With ARC assembly B (with a detachable cable) an additional wrap plug allows testing of the ARC only (see Table 3-3 on page 3-22).

3-20

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Wrap Option Available on LIC12

3745 3746-900

LIC12

(1)

Local

DSU/CSU

NCTE

(2)

Line

Remote

DSU/CSU

NCTE

(3)

DTE

Ÿ (1) Internal level Wrap

Ÿ (2) Local DSU/CSU or NCTE wrap

Ÿ (3) Remote DSU/CSU or NCTE wrap

3745 3746-900

LIC12 W

(4)

Local

DSU/CSU

NCTE

Line

Remote

DSU/CSU

NCTE

DTE

Ÿ

(4) LIC12 wrap plug

Wrap Option Available on LIC16

3745 3746-900

LIC16 W

(1)

(2)

Ÿ (1) LIC16 internal level wrap

Ÿ

(2) LIC16 wrap plug

Diagnostics

Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics

3-21

Diagnostics

Available Wrap Plugs

Table 3-1. Wrap Plugs for Testing ARC Assembly

A and ARC Assembly B (with Cable)

ARC Type Wrap Plug

PN

ARC V.24 DTE

ARC V.24 DCE

ARC V.35 DTE

61F4523

61F4522

61F4527

ARC V.35 DCE

ARC/3745 V.24 DTE

ARC/3745 V.24 DCE

ARC/3745 V.35 DTE

ARC/3745 V.35 DCE

61F4526

61F4525

61F4525

61F4578

61F4528

Table 3-2. Wrap Plugs for LIC Testing

LIC Type Wrap Plug

PN

LIC11 58G9425

LIC12 for X.21

LIC12 for V.35

LIC16

58X9354

58X9349

57G8097

Table 3-3. Wrap Plugs for Testing ARC Assembly

B (without Cable)

ARC Wrap Plug

PN

ARC V.24

ARC V.35 non 3745

ARC V.35 3745

ARC X.21

58G5660

58G5661

58G5659

58G5662

3-22

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Diagnostics

Figure 3-8. LICs Type 1 and 4 (Wrap Plug PN

65X8927)

Figure 3-9. LIC Type 3 (Wrap Cable PN 65X8928)

Figure 3-10. LIC Types 1, 3, and 4

Note: On LIC4B, only the port 0 is used.

Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics

3-23

Diagnostics

Figure 3-11. LICs Type 5 and 6 (Wrap Plug PN 11F4815)

Port 0

W

X

Y

Lever

Switch

Z

Port 1

TYPE Knob Color

LIC5 Black

Figure 3-12. LIC Types 5 and 6

Port 0

W

X

Y

TYPE Knob Color

LIC6 Black

3-24

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Diagnostics

How to Run the Channel Wrap Test

Note: Do not start the IFT L001 with the wrap plug already installed. Install or remove the wrap plug when directed by the MOSS console.

1. Ask the customer to disable the channel

related to the channel adapter to be tested with the Channel Wrap Test.

2. Select option ODG or CDG from the maintenance function menu.

3. Enter the following:

Ÿ Routine number LO01 in the

DIAG==> area.

Ÿ Channel adapter number in the ADP#==> area.

4. Press SEND.

5. Two models of wrap plugs can be used for this test:

Ÿ

Bus PN 03F4301 and Tag PN 03F4300 or

Ÿ Bus PN 26F1755 and Tag PN 26F1754

You will be asked for the wrap tools P/N you are using.

6. Messages on the screen will prompt you for the required actions.

7. Refer to Figure 4-27, Figure 4-28 and to

Table 4-8 on page 4-25 to remove the interface cables.

8. When you requested by the diagnostic, remove the interface cables and install the wrap plugs.

In order to allow the customer to use the channel during test time, you have to connect the cables together or to the terminators.

9. Ensure that the 'Select Out Bypass' switch is in the 'NORMAL' position.

Depending the wrap plugs used, follow one of these two actions:

Ÿ

If using the channel wrap plugs:

PN 03F4300 (for Tag) and PN 03F4301 (for Bus)

Install them for interface A in the IN ROW

(dark grey) and the CA terminators:

PN 2282676 (for Tag) and PN 2282675 (for Bus)

In the OUT ROW (light grey).

Ÿ If using the channel wrap plugs :

PN 26F1754 (for Tag) and PN 26F1755 (for Bus)

Two installations must be done, one after the other (when requested by messages on the screen):

Step 1 - Install the wrap plugs for interface A in the IN ROW (dark grey), and the CA terminators:

PN 2282676 (for Tag) and PN 2282675 (for Bus)

In the OUT ROW (light grey).

Step 2 - Install the wrap plugs in the

OUT ROW (light grey) and leave the IN ROW (dark grey) free

(CA terminators have not to be used).

10. You will be asked to install the wrap plugs on the interface connectors B if the TPS feature is installed on this channel. In this case repeat the action as for interface A.

Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics

3-25

Diagnostics

3-26

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

FRU Exchange

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

This chapter is to be used to exchange a defined FRU. Use all section from the begining to the end, to determine:

1. Where the FRU is physically located

2. How to properly exchange FRUs

3. How to test the machine

4. What else must be done before returning the machine to the customer.

Exchange Precautions

1. Most of the 3745 FRUs can be exchanged in concurrent maintenance. Thus, it is very important that these procedures be followed when replacing any FRU in the machine.

2. The control panel has voltage present even with the machine Powered OFF.

3. Ensure that the 3745 is powered OFF before replacing any FRUs, except for hot-pluggable FRUs

(LIC,MUX) and the separated power-controlled FRUs (FDD and HDD).

4. Before starting the FRU exchange, ensure that the involved area has been disabled by the customer.

5. The 3745 Communication Controller contains cards that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD).

Use the ESD kit and store all cards in their protective packaging when you are not actually exchanging them.

6. Procedures for exchanging FRUs are listed on the next pages. Use the list in alphabetical order.

7. After the 3745 FRU exchange, go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.

Attention

Do not disassemble or attempt to remove FRUs from the 3745 until you have read the Safety Infor-

mation manual, GA33-0400.

Very important

Ensure that the required area has been disabled before any FRU exchange if not, go to start page and follow the appropriate procedure.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997

4-1

FRU Exchange

List of 3745 FRUs

MSC/MSC2

PCC

PPB

PS1

PS2

PUC

SCTL

SMUXA/B

STO4

STO8

TERMC

TERMD

TERMI

TERMR

TIC2

TRM

DFA

DMUX

EAC

EPO Box

ESS Tailgate

Fan1

Fan2

FDD

FESH

HDD

LIC

MAC

MCC

MLA

MPC/MPC2

Basic BOARD

LIC BOARD type 1 and 3

LIC BOARD type 2

MOSS BOARD

BPC

Battery

CADR

CAL6

CAL7

Channel Tailgate

Control Panel

CSC

CSP

DCREG

Use the “Basic Board Exchange Procedure” on page 4-77.

Use the “LIC Board Type 1 and 3 Exchange Procedure” on page 4-84.

Use the “LIC Board Type 2 Exchange Procedure” on page 4-88.

Use the “MOSS Board Exchange Procedure” on page 4-92.

Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.

Use the “Battery Exchange Procedure” on page 4-48.

Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.

Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.

Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.

Use the “Channel Tailgate Exchange Procedure” on page 4-96.

Use the “Control Panel Exchange Procedure” on page 4-46.

Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.

Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.

Use the “DCREG Exchange Procedure” on page 4-38.

Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.

Use the “DMUX Exchange Procedure” on page 4-39.

Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.

Use the “EPO Exchange Procedure” on page 4-73.

Use the “ESS Tailgate Exchange Procedure” on page 4-64.

Use the “Fan 1 Exchange Procedure” on page 4-50.

Use the “Fan 2 Exchange Procedure” on page 4-51.

Use the “FDD Exchange Procedure” on page 4-52.

Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.

Use the “HDD Exchange Procedure” on page 4-56.

Use the “LIC Exchange Procedure” on page 4-44.

Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.

Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.

Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.

Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.

Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.

Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.

Use the “PS2 and Primary Power Box Exchange Procedure” on page 4-69.

Use the “PS1 Exchange Procedure” on page 4-67.

Use the “PS2 and Primary Power Box Exchange Procedure” on page 4-69.

Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.

Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.

Use the “SMUXA/B Exchange Procedure” on page 4-41.

Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.

Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.

Use the “TERMC/TERMR Exchange Procedure” on page 4-61.

Use the “TERMD/TERMI Exchange Procedure” on page 4-62.

Use the “TERMD/TERMI Exchange Procedure” on page 4-62.

Use the “TERMC/TERMR Exchange Procedure” on page 4-61.

Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.

Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.

4-2

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

FRU Physical Locations

3745 Frame

Locat i on: 01

FRU Exchange

a b

Figure 4-1. 3745 Frame (Front)

A

B

C

D

E

MOSS board (01A-X0 and 01A-Y0)

FDD

Panel

HDD

Fan2 (for logic)

Basic board test points

MOSS board test points

H

K

F

G

PS1

Basic board (01G-A1)

Primary power box + PS2

Fan1 (for powers)

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-3

FRU Exchange

Locat i on: 01

R

Cons ol e

M

L

N

W

Grounding

Area

Q

T R S S

H P T S S

E S S

S

E P O

P

CA' S

Rear

Customer Access

B1

B2

A1

A2

Figure 4-2. 3745 Frame (Back)

A1

A2

LIC board type 2

LIC board type 2 or

LIC board type 1

Connectors

Connectors

LIC board type 1

LIC board type 1 or

LIC board type 3

(Lines 80-95)

(Lines 64-79)

(Lines 128-159)

(Lines 32-63)

(Lines 00-31)

(Lines 00-15)

N

P

Q

R

S

W

Rear board access (01G-A1)

CA tailgate

TRSS, HPTSS & ESS tailgate

TRSS (Lines 1088 - 1091)

HPTSS (Lines 1028 - 1031)

ESS (Lines 1060 - 1063)

Console operator tailgate

See Figure 4-29 on page 4-26 and

Figure 4-30 on page 4-26 for details.

EPO

Grounding area

4-4

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Basic Board, Cards, Connectors, and Crossovers

┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐

│ A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S T U V W X │

├───────┬────┬────────────────────────────────────────────────┤

│ │ │ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

│ CCU │

│ │

│ CA

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X X X

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

│ 5 │ . . . . . . X X . . . . . . . . . . .

│ 6 │ . . . . X X . . . . . . . . . . . . .

│ 7 │ . . X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

│ 8 │ X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

│ │ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

│ TPS │ 5 │ . . . . X X X . . . . . . . . . . .

│ │ 7 │ X X X . . . . . . . . . . .

│ │ │

│ TRSS │ 1 │

. . . . . . . . . . .

X X X . . . . . . . .

│ 2 │

│ │

│ TSS │ 3 │

│ │ 4 │

│ 9 │

│ 1ð │

X X X . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . X .

. . . . X . . .

. . . X . . . .

. . X . . . .

│ 11 │

│ 12 │

│ HPTSS │

3 │

. X

X

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . X X

X X │ /ESS │ 4 │

│ │ │

├───────┴────┴────────────────────────────────────────────────┤

│ A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S T U V W X │

└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 4-3. Card Locations

Table 4-1. TIC Position and Ring Address

TRM TIC Position Ring Address

TRM-1 TIC2-1 1088

TRM-2

TIC2-2

TIC2-3

TIC2-4

1089

1090

1091

FRU Exchange

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-5

FRU Exchange

The following table and figures are configuration examples.

Table 4-2. Basic Board Configurations

Model TPS HPTSS/ESS

130 no yes

130

150

160 yes no no yes yes yes

17x

17x

17x

17x no no yes yes no yes no yes

Figure Available

Figure 4-6 on page 4-8

Figure 4-7 on page 4-9

Figure 4-8 on page 4-10

Figure 4-4

Figure 4-5 on page 4-7

Figure 4-4. 3745 Model 17X Basic Board (without TPS, HPTSS, or ESS)

.1/

Terminators TERMC and TERMR are present on 3745 model 17A only.

Note 1: STO may be STO4 (4MB) or STO8 (8MB).

Note 2: CAL may be CAL6 (for CADS feature) or CAL7 (for BCCA feature).

4-6

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

FRU Exchange

Figure 4-5. 3745 Model 17X (Basic Board with TPS and HPTSS or ESS)

.1/

Terminators TERMC and TERMR are present on the 3745 Model 17A only.

Note 1: When TPS-5 is installed a Bypass card 1 (BPC1) is needed in location E (if CADR-7 is present).

Note 2: STO may be STO4 (4MB) or STO8 (8MB).

Note 3: CAL may be CAL6 (for the CADS feature) or CAL7 (for the BCCA feature).

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-7

FRU Exchange

Figure 4-6. 3745 Model 130 (Basic Board with TPS)

Note 1: When TPS-5 is installed, a Bypass card 1 (BPC1) is needed in location E (if CADR-7 is present).

Note 2: STO may be STO4 (4MB) or STO8 (8MB).

Note 3: CAL may be CAL6 (for the CADS feature) or CAL7 (for the BCCA feature).

4-8

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Locati on 01G-A1

FRU Exchange

Figure 4-7. 3745 Model 150 (Basic Board)

Note: STO may be STO4 (4MB) or STO8 (8MB).

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-9

FRU Exchange

Locati on 01G-A1

Figure 4-8. 3745 Model 160 (Basic Board)

Note: STO may be STO4 (4MB) or STO8 (8MB).

4-10

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

MOSS Board, Cards, and Connectors

XO

Location: 01A

A

B

YO

C

D E

1

A B C D E F G H

2

P

C

C

M

L

A

M

P

C

D

F

A

M

C

C

3

1

2

3

4

5

M

S

C

4

5

A B C D

E

Figure 4-9. 3745 Models 130, 150, 160, and 170 (MOSS Board, Cards, and Connectors)

FRU Exchange

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-11

FRU Exchange

XO

Location: 01A

A B

YO

C

D

E

1

A B C D E F G H

2

P

C

C

M

L

A

M

P

C

D

F

A

M

A

C

3

1

2

3

4

M

S

C

4

5

A

B

C

D E

Figure 4-10. 3745 Model 17A (MOSS Board, Cards, and Connectors)

5

4-12

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

LIC Board Type 1

Locat i on: 01M- A1. 01M- A2. 01L- A2

GND

Addr es s i ng

A B C D

W

E F G H J K

Power

Connect

Y

Z

FRU Exchange

GND

Customer Access Area

Figure 4-11. 3745 LIC Unit Type 1 Board and Connectors (for LIC Types 1,3, and 4 in Models 150, 160, and 170)

LIC Board Type 2

Locat i on: 01L-A1. 01L- A2

GND

Addr es s i ng

A B C D

W

E F G H J K

Power

Connect

Y

Z

GND

Customer Access Area

Figure 4-12. 3745 LIC Unit Type 2 Board and Connectors (for LIC Types 5 and 6 in Models 150 and 170)

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-13

FRU Exchange

LIC Board Type 3

Locat i on: 01M- A2

Figure 4-13. 3745 LIC Unit Type 3 Board and Connectors (for LIC Types 1,3, and 4 in Model 150)

DMUX and SMUX Packaging

Table 4-3. DMUX Packaging

DMUX

Id

DMUX

Location

1 or 2

3 or 4

9 or 10

01M-A2B

01M-A1B

01L-A2B

Table 4-4. SMUX Packaging

SMUX

Type

SMUX-A

SMUX

Id

5

SMUX-B 7

SMUX

Location

01L-A2B

01L-A1B

4-14

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

LIC Board Type 1 Packaging for LICs Type 1 to 4

A

B

C D E F G H J K

U

X

D

M

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08

LIC Locations in Board 01M-A2

FRU Exchange

00 04

08

12 16 20 24 28

01 05 09 13 17 21

25

29

U

X

D

M

02 06

10

14 18 22 26 30

Line Locations in Board 01M-A2

(for LICs 1 and 4)

03

07

11 15 19 23 27 31

D

M

U

X

00 04 08 12 16 20 24 28

Line Locations in Board 01M-A2

(for LIC 3)

Figure 4-14. 3745 LIC Board 01M-A2 Packaging

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-15

FRU Exchange

A

B

C D E F G H J K

U

X

D

M

09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

LIC Locations in Board 01M-A1

32 36 40

44 48

52 56 60

33

37 41 45 49 53 57 61

U

X

D

M

34

38 42 46 50 54 58 62

Line Locations in Board 01M-A1

(for LICs 1 and 4)

35 39 43 47 51 55 59 63

D

M

U

X

32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60

Line Locations in Board 01M-A1

(for LIC 3)

Figure 4-15. 3745 LIC Board 01M-A1 Packaging

4-16

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

A

B

C D E F G H J K

U

X

D

M 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

LIC Locations in Board 01L-A2

128

132 136 140

144 148 152 156

129 133 137 141 145 149 153

157

U

X

D

M

130

134 138 142 146 150 154 158

Line Locations in Board 01L-A2

(for LICs 1 and 4)

131 135 139 143

147 151

155 159

D

M

U

X

128 132 136 140 144

148

152 156

Line Locations in Board 01L-A2

(for LIC 3)

Figure 4-16. 3745 LIC Board 01L-A2 Packaging

FRU Exchange

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-17

FRU Exchange

LIC Board Type 2 Packaging for LIC Type 5

A

B

C D E F G H J K

S

M

U

X

A

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

LIC Locations in Board 01L-A2

A

B C D E F G H J K

S

M

U

X

A

64 66 68 70 72

74

76

78

65 67 69 71 73

75

77 79

Line Locations in Board 01L-A2

Figure 4-17. 3745 LIC Board 01L-A2 Packaging (LICs Type 5)

A

B

C D E F G H J K

S

M

U

X

A

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

LIC Locations in Board 01L-A1

A

B C D E F G H J K

S

M

U

X

A

80 82 84 86 88 90 92

94

81 83 85 87 89

91

93 95

Line Locations in Board 01L-A1

Figure 4-18. 3745 LIC Board 01L-A1 Packaging (LIC type 5)

4-18

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

LIC Board Type 2 Packaging for LIC Type 6 (Low Speed)

A

B C D E F G H J K

S

M

U

X

A

33

34

35 36 37 38 39 40

LIC Locations in Board 01L-A2

FRU Exchange

A

B

C D E F G H J K

S

M

U

X

A

64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78

Line Locations in Board 01L-A2

Figure 4-19. 3745 LIC Board 01L-A2 Packaging (LICs Type 6 Low Speed)

A

B

C D E F G H J K

S

M

U

X

A

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

LIC Locations in Board 01L-A1

A

B C D E F G H J K

S

M

U

X

A

80 82 84 86 88 90 92

94

Line Locations in Board 01L-A1

Figure 4-20. 3745 LIC Board 01L-A1 Packaging (LICs Type 6 Low Speed)

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-19

FRU Exchange

LIC Board Type 2 Packaging for LIC Type 6 (High Speed)

A

B C D E F G H J K

S

M

U

X

A

33

34

35 36 37 38 39 40

LIC Locations in Board 01L-A2

A

B

C D E F G H J K

S

M

U

X

A

64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78

Line Locations in Board 01L-A2

Figure 4-21. 3745 LIC Board 01L-A2 Packaging (LIC Type 6 High Speed)

A

B

C D E F G H J K

S

M

U

X

A

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

LIC Locations in Board 01L-A1

A

B C D E F G H J K

S

M

U

X

A

80 82 84 86 88 90 92

94

Line Locations in Board 01L-A1

Figure 4-22. 3745 LIC Board 01L-A1 Packaging (LIC Type 6 High Speed)

4-20

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

LIC Board Type 3 Packaging for LIC Types 1 to 4

A

B

C D E F G H J K

U

X

D

M

01 02 03 04

LIC Locations in Board 01M-A2

FRU Exchange

00 04

08

12

01 05 09 13

U

X

D

M

02 06

10

14

03

07

11 15

Line Locations in Board 01M-A2

(for LICs 1 and 4)

D

M

U

X

00 04 08 12

Line Locations in Board 01M-A2

(for LIC 3)

Figure 4-23. 3745 LIC Board 01M-A2 Packaging

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-21

FRU Exchange

Ethernet Lines Tailgate

Locati on: 01Q

C0 D 0

J1 J1

J 2 J 2

E S S 3

E S S 4

Figure 4-24. 3745 Ethernet Lines Tailgate

Table 4-5. 3745 Ethernet Line Locations

Line Location ELA

1060 01Q-C0J1 3

1061

1062

1063

01Q-C0J2

01Q-D0J1

01Q-D0J2

3

4

4

Pi n

15

Pi n

8

Pi n

9

Pi n

1

4-22

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

High Speed Lines Tailgate

Locati on: 01Q

C0 D 0

J1 J 2 J1 J 2

Pi n 1

Pi n 18

P i n 3 4

FRU Exchange

Figure 4-25. 3745 High-Speed Lines Tailgate

Table 4-6. 3745 High-Speed Line Locations

Line Location LA

1028 01Q-C0J2 3

1029

1030

1031

01Q-C0J1

01Q-D0J2

01Q-D0J1

3

4

4

Pi n 17

P i n 5 0

P i n 3 3

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-23

FRU Exchange

Token-Ring Tailgate

Locat i on: 01Q- A0

L ocat i on: 01Q- B0

Figure 4-26. 3745 Token-Ring Tailgate

Table 4-7. 3745 Token-ring Line Locations

Line Location TRA

1088 01Q-A0J1 1

1089

1090

1091

01Q-A0J2

01Q-B0J1

01Q-B0J2

1

2

2

4-24

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Channel Tailgate

Locat i on: 01P

Locati on: 01G

FRU Exchange

Figure 4-27. 3745 Channel Tailgate

Tag

Sel ect out

B y pas s S wi t ch

B y p a s s

B u s

Figure 4-28. 3745 Channel Tailgate Details. For more details see YZ052 Sheet 2.

Nor mal

Table 4-8. Channel Interface. Channel Interface A and Channel Interface B (TPS) Distribution Chart.

Basic Board

Rear Position

Tailgate CA (Interface A or Interface B)

01G-H

01G-F

01G-D

01G-B

01P-1

01P-2

01P-3

01P-4

CA5-A

CA6-A or CA5-B

CA7-A

CA8-A or CA7-B

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-25

FRU Exchange

Console Operator Tailgate For 3745 Models 1X0

Locat i on: 01R - A0

J1 J 2 J 3

Figure 4-29. 3745 Models 1X0 Console Operator Tailgate

Console Operator Tailgate for 3745 Model 17A

Locat i on: 01R - A0

P I N S I D E

CONS OL E

PI N 1

Figure 4-30. 3745 Models 17A Console Operator Tailgate

EPO Tailgate

4-26

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Locat i on: 01S

Figure 4-31. 3745 EPO

FRU Exchange

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-27

FRU Exchange

3745 Control Panel

Locati on 01C

Contr ol Keyboar d

Di s pl ay

A1

L E D

(Power on onl y)

B1

R E D

B L ACK

1 2 4

+ -

Connector 01C-D1J1

B1

J1

C1

E P O

C1

S wi t ch OF F

D1

B a t t e r y

Front Vi ew

A1

D1

B a t t e r y

Rear View

Figure 4-32. 3745 Control Panel

1 3

J1

L E D

Detai l B 01C-B1J1

For Model s

130 t o 170

E P O

4

5

6

1

2

3

Wi r i ng Si de

1

2

3

For Model

17A

D C B A

Detail C 01C-C1SW1

4-28

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Flexible Diskette Drive

Locat i on: 01B-A1

FRU Exchange

Figure 4-33. 3745 Flexible Diskette Drive

Hard Disk Drive

Locati on: 01D-A1

1

Figure 4-34. 3745 Hard Disk Drive

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-29

FRU Exchange

Primary Power Box

Locat i on: 01H

Figure 4-35. 3745 Primary Power Box Components

4-30

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Power Supply 1

Locat i on: 01F

J 2

J 4

J 3

J1

T B 1

T B 3

5V

T B 2

T B 4

T 0

01H-A1J1

Fr ont vi ew

Figure 4-36. 3745 Power Supply 1 Components

3745 Power Supply Cross Reference

Table 4-9. 3745 Power Supply Cross Reference

Power Supply Location Area Supplied

PS1 01F

PS2 01H

Basic board

MOSS board

FDD and HDD

LIC board 01M-A1

LIC board 01M-A2

LIC board 01L-A1

LIC board 01L-A2

Fans

PCC

Panel

J 5

J 6

J 7

J 8

5V

T B 5

T B 6

Rear vi ew

FRU Exchange

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-31

FRU Exchange

Power Supply 2

Locat i on: 01H

K 2

C2

C3

J 6

R1

CR1

C R 2

C1

T 1

C V T

T B 1

F 1

CP3

J 3

SW1

Figure 4-37. 3745 Power Supply 2 Components

4-32

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Fan 1

Figure 4-38. 3745 Fan 1 Components

Fan 2

FRU Exchange

Figure 4-39. 3745 Fan 2 Components

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-33

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

3745 FRU Exchange Procedures

Card Exchange Procedure

1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be

powered OFF.

2. Press Power Off on the control panel.

3. Open the front door.

4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-40.

Figure 4-40. CB1 Location.

5. Check for the physical location.

a. For the physical board location, refer to

Figure 4-1 on page 4-3 b. For the physical card location:

Ÿ

On the Basic board refer to Figure 4-4 on page 4-6, Figure 4-5 on page 4-7, or Figure 4-6 on page 4-8 or

Figure 4-7 on page 4-9.

Ÿ

On the MOSS board, refer to

Figure 4-9 on page 4-11.

6. Remove the following covers, (refer to

Figure 4-41 on page 4-35): Cover

.1/

for the basic board (loosen the 2 screws

.2/

and lift up the cover), and covers

.3/

for the MOSS board (remove the 7 screws

.4/

).

7. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.

8. If the card to be replaced is a CADR, go to

Step 24 on page 4-36.

9. If the card to be replaced is an MLA, go to

Step 33 on page 4-37.

10. Remove the crossover connectors (if installed) from the card exchanged.

11. Remove the line cable(s), if any (cards FESH,

TIC2, or EAC).

12. If the card to be exchanged is on the MOSS board, remove the shipping springs that secure the extractor levers by sqeezing them together. Refer to Figure 4-42 on page 4-35.

13. If the card to be exchanged is a CAL or a

STO, ensure that the new card is identical with the previous one (for STO there are two types of cards: STO4 for 4MB and STO8 for

8MB. For CAL there are two types of cards:

CAL6 for CADS feature and CAL7 for BCCA feature).

14. Exchange the card, re-install the crossover connectors (if installed) and re-install the ship-

ping springs (if you have exchanged a card on the MOSS board).

15. Replace the board covers.

16. Switch CB1 ON.

17. Close the front door.

18. If the replaced card is the PCC, go to step 21.

19. Power the 3745 ON.

20. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745

Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic in ODG that you ran before you exchanged the FRU. Go to “Action to Take

After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.

PCC Replacement

21. From Step 18: Power the 3745 ON. Ignore the BERs that are logged, (they are due to the

time-of-day clock not being set).

22. Set the time-of-day clock. Refer to the IBM

3745 Communication Controller Service

Function, SY33-2069.

23. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745

Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic in ODG that you ran before you exchanged the FRU. Go to “Action to Take

After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.

4-34

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

Figure 4-41. Covers

Front Vi ew

S p r i n g

Figure 4-42. Shipping Springs

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-35

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

CADR Exchange

24. From step 8 on page 4-34: At the Channel

Tailgate set the Select Out Bypass switch to

bypass (refer to Figure 4-27 on page 4-25, to

Figure 4-43, and to Figure 4-44) according to the CADR to be replaced (refer to

Table 4-10).

25. Remove the crossover connectors from the card to be exchanged.

26. Exchange the card and re-install the crossover connectors.

27. Replace the board cover.

28. Set the Select Out Bypass switch to normal

29. Switch CB1 ON.

30. Close the front door.

31. Power the 3745 ON.

32. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745

Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic in ODG that you ran before you exchanged the FRU. Go to “Action to Take

After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.

Table 4-10. Select Out Switches According to

CADR Cards

Select Out Switch CADR Card

01P-4

01P-3

01P-2

01P-1

01G-A1B

01G-A1D

01G-A1F

01G-A1H

Rear

Channel

Tail Gate

Figure 4-43. Channel Tailgate Location

Sel ect out

B y pas s S wi t ch

B y p a s s

Tag

B u s

Figure 4-44. Select Out Switch

Nor mal

4-36

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

MLA Exchange.

33. From step 9 on page 4-34: Obtain the service processor maintenance password from the customer in order to logon at the service processor console.

34. If the logon is already done, go to Step 36. If it is not done, proceed with Step 35.

35. To log on: a. In the MOSS-E View window, click on

Program (in the action bar).

b. Click on Log on MOSS-E.

c. Enter the password.

36. In the MOSS-E View window, locate the serial number of the machine that contains the MLA card.

37. Click on the associated icon. The serial number is displayed on the bottom line of the

MOSS-E View window.

38. In the MOSS-E View window double-click on

Service Processor icon.

39. In the Service Processor Menu window, click on the Configuration Management option.

40. Double-click on the Manage 3745/3746-9x0

Installation option.

41. In the Controller Installation window select the machine by clicking on the 3745 serial number for which your are called and click on

Repair.

42. On the Repairs Action for 3745 window select the Change 3745 MOSS LAN Adapter option and click on OK.

43. The Controller Repair Message window is displayed. Perform the following steps before clicking on OK.

a. Locate the card (refer to Figure 4-10 on page 4-12).

b. Disconnect the cable attached to the card.

c. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.

d. Loosen the two thumbscrews and remove the card.

e. Install the new card and tighten the two thumbscrews.

f. Reconnect the cable to the card.

g. Replace the board cover(s).

h. Switch CB1 ON.

i. Close the front door.

j. Power ON the 3745.

Note: This action will also run MOSS diagnostics and complete a MOSS IML. A successful completion will result in a code

F0E, F0F, or 000. If any other code is displayed, an error was detected. See

“3745 Control Panel Codes” on page 1-15.

44. On the Controller Repair Message window of the MOSS-E, click on OK.

45. On the Controller Installation window, click on Save.

46. A new window prompts you to install the installation diskette in the service processor.

47. Click on OK when it is done, a Controller

Saving Message is displayed.

48. Remove the diskette, and click on OK.

49. The Controller Installation window is again displayed, click on Cancel.

50. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-37

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

DCREG Exchange Procedure

Removal Procedure

1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be

powered OFF.

2. Press Power OFF on the control panel.

3. Open the front door.

4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-45.

5. Locate the basic board. Refer to Figure 4-45.

6. Remove the basic board cover (loosen the two screws then lift up the cover).

7. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.

8. At the channel tailgate set all the Select Out

Bypass switches to bypass (refer to

Figure 4-43 and to Figure 4-44 on page 4-36).

9. Remove all the cards.

10. Release the retainer at the bottom of the board (one screw must be loosened).

11. Remove the DCREG card in position E-F or

G-H of row Z. Refer to Figure 4-5 on page 4-7, Figure 4-6 on page 4-8, or

Figure 4-7 on page 4-9.

Figure 4-45. Basic Board and CB1 Locations

Installation Procedure

1. Install the new DCREG card.

2. Re-install the retainer.

3. Re-install the cards.

4. Replace the basic board cover.

5. Set all the Select Out Bypass switches to

normal.

6. Switch CB1 ON.

7. Close the front door.

8. Press Power On on the control panel.

9. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745

Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic in ODG that you ran before you exchanged the FRU.

10. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.

4-38

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

DMUX Exchange Procedure

Since the DMUX is hot-pluggable, there is no need to power OFF.

Removal Procedure

1. Open the rear door.

2. For the board location refer to Figure 4-46.

3. Remove the related DMUX cover (refer to

Figure 4-47). Two screws must be removed

.1/

. (Two types of DMUX cover exist according to the board location.)

4. For the DMUX location, refer to Figure 4-48 on page 4-40. The thumb screw color of the

DMUX is white.

5. Refer to Figure 4-49 on page 4-40. Note the

DMUX cables locations then remove them.

6. Unfasten the thumb screw holding the DMUX cassette to the board.

7. Remove the DMUX cassette.

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

Figure 4-46. Location of the LIC Boards

Figure 4-47. DMUX Cover

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-39

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

DMUX

A B

W

C D E F G H J K

Cable 2

W

X

Y

Z

Figure 4-48. DMUX Location

Installation Procedure

1. Install the new DMUX cassette.

2. Fasten the thumb screw holding the DMUX cassette to the board. Finger strengh is enough. Do not use tools.

3. Replace the DMUX cables in their proper positions.

Y

Z

Cable 1

Figure 4-49. DMUX

4. Re-install the DMUX cover with the two screws. Refer to Figure 4-47 on page 4-39.

5. Close the rear door.

6. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745

Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic that you ran before you exchanged the

FRU. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.

Note

If exchanging the DMUX does not solve the problem, you should test the voltage levels at the DMUX

test points. If voltage levels are not correct, suspect the Power Supply 1.

For test point pin locations, see page YZ738.

For voltage tolerances, see IBM 3745 Hardware Maintenance Reference, SY33-2066.

4-40

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

SMUXA/B Exchange Procedure

Removal Procedure

Since the SMUX is hot-pluggable, there is no need to power OFF.

1. Open the rear door.

2. For the board location, refer to Figure 4-50.

3. Remove one of the SMUX covers. Refer to

Figure 4-51 (two screws must be removed

.1/

).

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

Figure 4-50. Location of the LIC Boards Type 2

Figure 4-51. SMUX Cover

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-41

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

4. For the SMUX location, refer to Figure 4-52.

Refer to Figure 4-53 and do the following:

5. Remove the serial link cable (if installed) from the SMUX (this cable is absent on SMUXB when SMUXA and the flat cable

.2/

are present).

6. Remove the flat cable

.2/

(if installed) which connects the two SMUXs, (if two LIC boards type 2 are present in the machine). This cable may be absent in spite of the presence of the two boards.

7. Unfasten the thumb screw holding the SMUX cassette to the board.

8. Remove the SMUX cassette.

A B C D

E F G H J K

Figure 4-53. SMUX Link and Cable

Figure 4-52. SMUX Location

4-42

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

Installation Procedure

5. Re-install the SMUX cover with the 2 screws.

Refer to Figure 4-51 on page 4-41.

1. Install the new SMUX cassette.

6. Close the rear door.

2. Fasten the thumb screw holding the SMUX cassette to the board. Finger strength is enough. Do not use tools.

3. Replace the SMUX cables.

7. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745

Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic you ran before you exchanged the

FRU, then go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.

3

4. Set the XMIT level according to the table below. Refer to Figure 4-53 on page 4-42 for the sliding switches.

┌────────────────────┬──────────┬───────────────────────────┐

Country

|XMIT Level|Sliding Switches |

(leased lines) |(in dBm) | |

├────────────────────┼──────────┼───────────────────────────┤

│ 1 2 3 4 │

├──────┬──────┬──────┬──────┤

│Canada, Greece,

│Ireland, U.S.A.,

│and other

│AP/APG countries

ð │

├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤

│ │ - 1 │ ON │ │ │ │

├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤

│ │ - 2 │ │ ON │ │ │

├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤

│ │ - 3 │ ON │ ON │ │ │

├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤

│ │ - 4 │ │ │ ON │ │

├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤

│ │ - 5 │ ON │ │ ON │ │

├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤

│Chile, and other │ - 6 │ │ ON │ ON │ │

│E.M.E.A.

│countries

├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤

│ │ - 7 │ ON │ ON │ ON │ │

├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤

│ │ - 8 │ │ │ │ ON │

├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤

│Hong-Kong │ - 9 │ ON │ │ │ ON │

├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤

│Denmark, Finland │ -1ð │ │ ON │ │ ON │

│Iceland, Italy,

│Sweden

├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤

│ │ -11 │ ON │ ON │ │ ON │

├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤

│ │ -12 │ │ │ ON │ ON │

├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤

│Australia, U.K.

│ -13 │ ON │ │ ON │ ON │

├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤

│ │ -14 │ │ ON │ ON │ ON │

├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤

│France, Japan │ -15 │ ON │ ON │ ON │ ON │

└────────────────────┴──────────┴──────┴──────┴──────┴──────┘

Note

Push

ON

────5┌──┐

────5┌──┐

┌────┴──┴┐

OFF

Push

┌──┐%────

┌┴──┴────┐

│ │

If exchanging the SMUX does not solve the problem, you should test the voltage levels at the SMUX

test points. If the voltage levels are not correct, suspect the Power Supply 1.

For test point pin location, see page YZ739.

For voltage tolerances, see IBM 3745 Hardware Maintenance Reference, SY33-2066.

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-43

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

LIC Exchange Procedure

Removal Procedure:

Since the LIC is hotpluggable, there is no need to power OFF.

1. For physical locations, refer to Figure 4-54,

Figure 4-56, and to Figure 4-57 on page 4-45.

2. Open the rear door.

3. Remove the line cables from the

PTT/Common carrier wall socket if you deal with LIC 5 or 6.

4. Remove the line cables from the LIC. Note their positions.

5. If you are working with LIC 5 or 6, check if the

LIC configuration is available.If it is not, use the PKD (Refer to the Connection and Integration Guide, SA33-0141).

6. Unfasten the thumb screw holding the LIC cassette to the board.

7. Remove the LIC cassette.

Line

Speed Switch

W

X

Y

Figure 4-54. Location of the LIC Boards

4-44

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

BPS

19200

9600

(V24)

BPS

56000

(V35)

Figure 4-55. LIC 6

Installation Procedure

1. If you are working with a LIC type 6 (refer to

Figure 4-55), note the position of the line speed switch, then set the line speed switch of the new LIC accordingly.

2. Install the new LIC cassette.

3. Fasten the thumb screw holding the LIC cassette to the board. Finger strength is enough.

Do not use tools.

4. If a LIC 5 or 6 has been installed, configuration must be done with the PKD (refer to the

Connection and Integration Guide,

SA33-0141).

5. Replace the line cables in their proper positions on the LIC.

6. Reconnect the line cable(s) to the

PTT/Common carrier wall socket if you are working with LIC 5 or 6.

7. Close the rear door.

8. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745

Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic that you ran before you exchanged the

FRU. Go to “Action to Take After a Diag-

nostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.

GND

Addr es s i ng

A B C D

W

E F G H J K

Power

Connect

Y

Z

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

GND

Figure 4-56. LIC Board Type 1 and 2

Customer Access Area

Figure 4-57. LIC Board Type 3

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-45

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

Control Panel Exchange Procedure

Removal Procedure

1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be

powered OFF.

2. Press Power Off on the control panel.

3. Open the front door.

4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-58.

5. Locate the control panel and the MOSS.

Refer to Figure 4-58.

6. Open the control panel door (one screw must be removed).

7. Remove the MOSS right cover (three screws must be removed

.1/

). Refer to Figure 4-59.

8. Refer to Figure 4-58 and to Figure 4-60 on page 4-47, then remove (from the MOSS board) the cable going to the control panel

(Y0-D1).

9. Release the cable from its securing points.

Refer to Figure 4-61 on page 4-47 and do the following:

Figure 4-58. Panel, MOSS, and CB1 Locations

Figure 4-59. MOSS Right Cover

4-46

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

10. Remove the panel cover (three screws must be removed

.2/

).

11. Remove the five screws holding the panel to the door

.3/

.

12. Withdraw the panel with the cable.

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

Installation Procedure

1. Install the new panel on the panel door and attach it with the five screws

.3/

.

2. Re-install the panel cover with the three screws

.2/

.

3. Re-install the cable in its path and reconnect it to the MOSS board.

4. Re-install the MOSS right cover with the three screws

.1/

.

5. Close the control panel door with one screw.

6. Switch CB1 ON.

7. Close the front door.

8. Press Power On on the control panel.

9. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745

Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic in ODG that you ran before you exchanged the FRU. Go to “Action to Take

After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.

Figure 4-60. Panel Cable Location on MOSS Board

J 1

Figure 4-61. Panel

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-47

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

Battery Exchange Procedure

It is the Service Personnels responsibility to exchange the battery.

The 3745 will automatically send an alert to the operator console when there is a need to exchange the battery.

Removal Procedure

1. Locate the control panel. Refer to

Figure 4-62.

2. Open the front door.

3. Open the control panel door (one screw must be removed).

4. Locate the battery

.1/

. Refer to Figure 4-63.

5. Remove the tie wrap on the battery and disconnect the battery plug

.2/

.

J 1

Figure 4-62. Panel Location

Installation Procedure

1. Insert the new battery and reconnect the plug.

2. Fasten the tie wrap to the battery.

3. Close the control panel door with the screw.

4. Close the front door.

Figure 4-63. Battery Location

5. Battery disposal must be performed

according to the instruction on the battery case.

Reporting:

Update the battery exchange record as follows:

Ÿ

Using the 3745 console, type POS on any displayed screen selection area for Power Ser-

vices Screen.

Ÿ

Press SEND.

Ÿ

The Power Services Screen is displayed.

Refer to Figure 4-64 on page 4-49. If a

MOSS console function is in process, press the F1 key to terminate.

Ÿ Type 2 in the selection area for Battery

change acknowledge.

Ÿ Press SEND.

Ÿ The Battery Change Screen is displayed.

Refer to Figure 4-65 on page 4-49.

Ÿ Type Y in the CONFIRM THAT THE

BATTERY HAS BEEN CHANGED (Y/N) ==> field.

Ÿ

Press SEND.

A successful command message will appear.

Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102 for the time update.

Note: If the code 007 is displayed on the 3745 control panel, a MOSS IML (function 1) should be performed to reset this code.

4-48

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

à

CUSTOMER ID:

CCA-A

RESET

PROCESS MOSS-ALONE

BYP-IOC-CHK STOP-CCU-CHK

3745

X71:ðAð8ðð

X71:ðBC8ðð

SERIAL NUMBER:

-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/87 ð1:2

FUNCTION ON SCREEN: POWER SERVICES

ð

- SELECT ONE OPTION, THEN PRESS ENTER ==>

1 = POWER DUMP

2 = BATTERY CHANGE ACKNOWLEDGE

===>

F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM

á

Figure 4-64. Power Services Screen

F6:QUIT

ñ

à

CUSTOMER ID:

CCU-A

RUN

PROCESS MOSS-ALONE

BYP-IOC-CHK STOP-CCU-CHK

3745

X71:ðAð8ðð

X72:ðBC8ðð

SERIAL NUMBER:

-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/87 ð1:2

FUNCTION ON SCREEN: POWER SERVICES

ð

CONFIRM THAT THE BATTERY HAS BEEN CHANGED (Y/N) ==>

===>

F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM

á

Figure 4-65. Acknowledge Screen

F6:QUIT

ñ

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-49

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

Fan 1 Exchange Procedure

Removal Procedure

1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be

powered OFF.

2. Press Power Off on the control panel.

3. Open the front door.

4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-66.

5. Locate Fan 1. Refer to Figure 4-66.

6. At Fan 1, disconnect the air flow detector cable and the power cable. Refer to

Figure 4-67.

7. Remove the screw

.1/

which maintains Fan 1 to the frame.

8. Slide the Fan 1 assembly out.

Installation Procedure

1. Install the new Fan 1 in the frame and fasten it with the screw

.1/

.

2. Reconnect the air flow detector cable and the power cable to Fan 1.

3. Switch CB1 ON.

4. Close the front door.

5. Press Power On on the control panel.

6. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745

Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic in ODG that you ran before you exchanged the FRU. Go to “Action to Take

After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.

Figure 4-66. Fan 1 and CB1 Locations

Figure 4-67. Fan 1 Air Flow Detector and Power

Cables

4-50

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Fan 2 Exchange Procedure

Removal Procedure

1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be

powered OFF.

2. Press Power OFF on the control panel.

3. Open the front door.

4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-68.

5. Locate Fan 2. Refer to Figure 4-68.

6. At Fan 2, disconnect the air flow detector cable and the power cable. Refer to

Figure 4-69.

7. Remove the two screws

.1/

which maintain

Fan 2 on the frame.

8. Slide the Fan 2 assembly out.

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

Installation Procedure

1. Install the new Fan 2 in the frame and fasten it with the two screws

.1/

.

2. Reconnect the air flow detector cable and the power cable to Fan 2.

3. Switch CB1 ON.

4. Close the front door.

5. Press Power On on the control panel.

6. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745

Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic in ODG that you ran before you exchanged the FRU. Go to “Action to Take

After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.

Figure 4-68. Fan 2 and CB1 Locations

Figure 4-69. Fan 2 Air Flow Detector and Power

Cables

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-51

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

FDD Exchange Procedure

Removal Procedure:

For physical locations, refer to Figure 4-70.

Important

The MOSS must be loaded from the Disk. If you are not sure, execute a MOSS IML from the Disk.

Refer to “How to Perform 3745 Control Panel

Operations” on page 1-82.

Check that the Power Control display is set to local 3 on the control panel. If yes, go to Step 3.

If not, proceed with Step 1.

1. Press power Control until 3 (Local mode) is displayed in the power control window.

2. Press Validate.

3. Press Service until 1 (Maintenance 1) is displayed in the service window.

4. Press Validate.

5. Disable the MOSS area as follows (if NCP is running in the 3745): a. Invoke Menu 2 (See PF key line).

b. In Menu 2, type MOF in the selection area for MOSS OFFLINE.

c. Press SEND.

d. MOSS OFFLINE is displayed.

6. Open the front door.

7. Before exchanging the FDD, check the voltages as follows:

Note: The voltages are not permanently applied on the FDD and, to have them available for measurement for approximately 15 minutes, a MOSS IML is required.

a. Press Function key on the control panel until the MOSS IML function 1 is displayed.

Figure 4-70. FDD and CB1 Location

4-52

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Table 4-11. Voltage Test Points

Connector Pin Voltage

01B-A1J2

(FDD)

1

2

3

4

+12 V

GND

GND

+ 5 V

PS1-J1

Voltage

Test Points

2

5

12

+12 V

+ 5 V

GND

Maximum

+13.00 V

+ 5.25 V

+13.00 V

+ 5.25 V

Minimum

+11.00 V

+ 4.85 V

+11.00 V

+ 4.85 V

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

b. Press Validate.

c. Using Table 4-11, measure the voltages on the voltage test points of PS1 (refer to

Figure 4-71). If the voltages are incorrect, exchange PS1.

8. Remove the power as follows: a. Invoke the menu 1 (see PF key line).

b. In menu 1 type DIF in the selection area for Disk Function.

c. Press SEND.

d. The Disk Function Screen is displayed.

e. Type 8 the in selection area for Power

OFF Disk/Diskette Driver.

f. Press SEND.

g. If DISK/DISKETTE DRIVES CONCUR-

RENT MAINTENANCE ENTERED is displayed, go to Step 9 on page 4-54.

h. If DISK/DISKETTE DRIVES CONCUR-

RENT MAINTENANCE CANCELLED is displayed, procede as follows:

1) Inform the customer that the 3745

is to be powered OFF.

2) Press Power Off on the control panel.

3) Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to

Figure 4-70 on page 4-52.

4) Go to Step 9 on page 4-54.

Figure 4-71. PS1

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-53

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

9. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.

10. Refer to Figure 4-72. Remove the MOSS board covers

.1/

(seven screws must be removed

.2/

).

11. Refer to Figure 4-73 .

12. Locate the FDD

.3/

.

13. Remove the two cables

.4/

at the back of the

FDD.

14. Remove the four securing screws from the assembly

.5/

.

15. Slide the FDD assembly out.

Figure 4-73. FDD Removal

Figure 4-72. MOSS Covers

4-54

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

Installation Procedure

1. Check that the new FDD has a jumper in position 0 (refer to Figure 4-74).

Figure 4-74. FDD Connectors

2. Install the new FDD assembly with the four screws

.5/

. Refer to Figure 4-73 on page 4-54.

3. Reconnect the two cables at the back of the

FDD

.4/

. Refer to Figure 4-73 on page 4-54.

4. Re-install the covers of the MOSS board

.1/ with the seven screws

.2/

. Refer to

Figure 4-72 on page 4-54.

Note: In the remaining steps, it is assumed that the microcode is at the same level on both the diskette and the hard disk.

5. Re-apply power as follows: a. If you powered OFF the machine, go to

Step 12.

b. If you did not power OFF the machine, then go to Step 6.

6. Install the primary diskette in the FDD.

7. Press Function on the control panel until 9

(Load from Diskette) is displayed in the function window.

8. Press Validate.

Note: This action will also run MOSS diagnostics and complete a MOSS IML. A successful completion will result in a code F0E,

F0F, or 000. If any other code is displayed, an error was detected. See “3745 Control

Panel Codes” on page 1-15

9. Remove the primary diskette from the FDD.

10. Close the front door.

11. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745

Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic that you ran before you exchanged the

FRU. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.

12. Install the primary diskette in the FDD.

13. Switch CB1 ON.

14. Power the 3745 ON with function 9 (Load from Diskette).

15. A successful completion will result in a code

F0E, F0F, or 000. If any other code is displayed, an error was detected. See “3745

Control Panel Codes” on page 1-15

16. Remove the primary diskette from the FDD.

17. Close the front door.

18. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745

Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic that you ran before you exchanged the

FRU. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-55

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

HDD Exchange Procedure

Removal Procedure:

For physical locations, refer to Figure 4-75.

Important

Check that the Power Control display is set to local 3 on the control panel. If yes, go to Step 3.

If not, proceed with Step 1.

1. Press power Control until 3 (Local mode) is displayed in the power control window.

2. Press Validate.

3. Press Service until 1 (Maintenance 1) is displayed in the service window.

4. Press Validate.

5. For the 3745 Model 130 to 170 go to Step 9.

For Model 17A continue, with Step 6

6. You should be logged ON on the service processor console. If not, go to “Console Use for Maintenance” on page 1-1 for logging ON and return here.

7. In the MOSS-E View window, double-click on your 3745 icon.

8. In the 3745 Menu window, double-click on the

MOSS Console option.

9. Disable the MOSS area as follows: a. Call Menu 2.

b. Type MOF on the selection line.

c. Press SEND.

d. MOSS OFFLINE is displayed.

10. Open the front door.

11. Remove power as follows: a. Invoke Menu 1 (see PF key line).

b. In Menu 1 type DIF in the selection area for Disk Functions.

c. Press SEND.

d. The Disk Functions Screen is displayed.

e. Type 7 in the selection area for Power

OFF Disk/Diskette Drive.

f. Press SEND.

g. If POWER OFF SUCCESSFUL. CON-

CURRENT MAINTENANCE ACCEPTED

is displayed, go to Step 12 on page 4-57.

h. If POWER OFF UNSUCCESSFUL. CON-

CURRENT MAINTENANCE REJECTED

is displayed, do the following:

1) Inform the customer that the 3745

is to be powered OFF.

2) Press Power Off on the control panel.

3) Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to

Figure 4-75

4) Go to Step 12 on page 4-57.

Figure 4-75. HDD and CB1 Locations

4-56

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

12. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.

13. Open the control panel door.

14. Refer to Figure 4-76:

15. Locate the HDD

.1/

.

16. Remove the three cables (and the ground wire if any) from the drive

.2/

.

17. Unfasten the HDD assembly

.3/

from the frame. Two screws

.4/

must be removed.

18. Slide the HDD assembly out

.3/

.

19. Remove the four screws

.5/

which maintain the HDD to the assembly bracket.

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

Figure 4-76. HDD Removal

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-57

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

Installation Procedure

1. Identify the HDD that you received using

Figure 4-77 (several types of HDD are available).

2. If you receive a new HDD assembly similar to the HDD shown (see Figure 4-77) continue with Step 3. Otherwise, go to Step 8.

Figure 4-77. New Type of HDD

3. Ensure that the jumpers are present in position J3 and J4. See Figure 4-77.

4. Install the new HDD on the assembly bracket with the four screws

.5/

.

5. Slide in the HDD assembly and fasten it to the frame with the two screws

.4/

.

6. Reconnect the three cables

.2/

.

Note: After HDD exchange, it will be necessary to IML from the diskette.

7. Go to Step 13.

Figure 4-78. HDD Installation

8. Ensure that there is a jumper in position 1 of the new HDD. Refer to Figure 4-80 or to

Figure 4-79 on page 4-60 according to the

HDD type.

4-58

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

9. Install the new HDD on the assembly bracket with the four screws

.5/

.

10. Slide in the HDD assembly and fasten it to the frame with the two screws

.4/

.

11. Reconnect the three cables and the ground wire

.2/

.

Note: After HDD exchange, it will be necessary to IML from the diskette.

12. Continue with Step 13.

13. Re-apply power as follows: a. If you powered OFF the 3745, then go to

Step 28 on page 4-59.

b. If you did not power OFF the 3745, go to

Step 14

14. Install the primary backup diskette in the FDD.

15. At the control panel, select Service Mode

.1/ or

.2/

and press Validate.

16. Press Function on the control panel until 9

(Load from Diskette) is displayed in the function window.

17. Press Validate.

Note: This action will also run MOSS diagnostics and complete a MOSS IML. A successful completion will result in a code F0E,

F0F, or 000. If any other code is displayed, an error was detected. See “3745 Control Panel

Codes” on page 1-15.

18. For 3745 Model 130 to 170 go to Step 20.

For Model 17A, continue with step 19.

19. Check that the 3745 icon in the MOSS-E

View window has changed from grey to pink and perform the following bullet otherwise check your installation. If problem persists call your support.

Ÿ

In the MOSS-E View window, double-click on your 3745 icon.

Ÿ

In the 3745 Menu window, double-click on the MOSS Console option.

20. Inform the customer that the 3745 will be powered OFF during the following steps.

21. Refer to the IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service Function, SY33-2069 to:

Ÿ Initialize the disk.

Ÿ Restore the disk from the backup diskettes, follow the prompt screens until

Disk correctly restored is displayed.

Ÿ Press Power Off on the control panel.

When these actions are completed, a MOSS

IML from the HDD will have been executed.

Note: This action will also run MOSS diagnostics and complete a MOSS IML. A successful completion will result in a code F0E,

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

F0F, or 000. If any other code is displayed, an error was detected. See “3745 Control Panel

Codes” on page 1-15

22. Press Service until 2 is displayed in the service window.

23. Press Validate.

24. Press Function. until 1 is displayed in the power control window.

25. Press Validate.

26. Press Power On on the control panel.

27. Go to Step 42.

28. Install the primary backup diskette in the FDD.

29. Switch CB1 ON.

30. At the control panel select Service Mode

.1/ or

.2/

and press Validate.

31. Press Function on the control panel until 9

(Load from Diskette) is displayed in the function window.

32. Press Validate.

33. Press Power On on the control panel.

34. For 3745 Model 130 to 170 go to Step 36.

For Model 17A, continue with step 35.

35. Check that the 3745 icon in the MOSS-E

View window has changed from grey to pink and perform the following bullet otherwise check your installation and if problem persists call your support.

Ÿ In the MOSS-E View window, double-click on your 3745 icon.

Ÿ In the 3745 Menu window, double-click on the MOSS Console option.

36. Refer to the IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service Function, SY33-2069 to:

Ÿ Initialize the disk.

Ÿ Restore the disk from the backup diskettes. Follow the prompt screens until

Disk correctly restored is displayed.

Then power OFF the 3745.

When these actions are completed, a MOSS

IML from the HDD will have been executed.

Note: This action will also run MOSS diagnostics and complete a MOSS IML. A successful completion will result in a code F0E

,F0F, or 000. If any other code is displayed, an error was detected. See “3745 Control

Panel Codes” on page 1-15

37. Press Service until 2 is displayed in the service window.

38. Press Validate.

39. Press Function until 1 is displayed in the power control window.

40. Press Validate.

41. Press Power On on the control panel.

42. Close the control panel door.

43. Close the front door.

44. For 3745 Model 130 to 170 continue with Step

45. For model 17A, go to Step 47.

45. Refer to the Installation Guide SY33-2067, and enter the customer default password.

Then update and activate the maintenance password.

46. Ask the customer to update the customer password if needed.

47. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745

Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic that you ran before you exchanged the

FRU.

48. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-59

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

┌─┐

│ │ ð1D-A1J2

│ │ Data

│ │

└─┤

│ o o %── Position 1

│ o o

│ o o

│ o o

│ o o

│ o o

┌─┤

│ │

│ │

│ o o

│ o o %── Position 8

│ │

│ │

│ │ ð1D-A1J1

│ │ Control

│ │

│ │

└─┤

├─┐

│O│

│O│ ð1D-A1J3

│O│ Power

│O│

└─┘

┌─┐ ð1D-A1J4

└─┘ Frame Ground

Figure 4-79. HDD Connectors and Jumpers

┌─┐

│ │

ð1D-A1J2 │ │

Data │ │

└─┤

│ ┌─┤

│ │ │

│ │ │

│ o o %── Position 1

│ o o

│ o o

│ o o

│ o o %── Position 5

│ │ │

│ │ │

│ │ │ ð1D-A1J1

│ │ │ Control

│ │ │

│ │ │

│ └─┤

├─┐

│O│

│O│ ð1D-A1J3

│O│ Power

│O│

└─┘

┌─┐ ð1D-A1J4

└─┘ Frame Ground

Figure 4-80. HDD Connectors and Jumpers

4-60

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

TERMC/TERMR Exchange Procedure

Removal Procedure

1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be

powered OFF.

2. Press Power Off on the control panel.

3. Open the front door.

4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-81.

5. Locate the basic board. Refer to Figure 4-81.

6. Remove the basic board cover (two screws must be loosened). Then lift up the cover.

7. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.

8. At the Channel Tailgate set all the Select Out

Bypass switches to bypass (refer to

Figure 4-43 and to Figure 4-44 on page 4-36).

9. Remove all the cards.

10. According to the card terminator that is to be exchanged continue with Step a or b.

a. For TERMC:

Release the retainer at the bottom of the board (one screw must be loosened).

Then remove the TERMC card from row

Z. Refer to Figure 4-4 on page 4-6 or

Figure 4-5 on page 4-7

b. For TERMR:

Remove the TERMR card from row Y.

Refer to Figure 4-4 on page 4-6 or

Figure 4-5 on page 4-7.

Figure 4-81. Basic Board and CB1 Locations

Installation Procedure

1. Install the new terminator card.

2. Re-install the retainer if removed.

3. Re-install the cards.

4. Replace the basic board cover.

5. Set all the Select Out Bypass switches to

normal

6. Switch CB1 ON.

7. Close the front door.

8. Press Power On on the control panel..

9. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745

Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic in ODG that you ran before you exchanged the FRU. Go to “Action to Take

After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-61

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

TERMD/TERMI Exchange

Procedure

Removal Procedure

1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be

powered OFF.

2. Press Power Off on the Control panel.

3. Open the front door and the rear door.

4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-82.

Rear

Figure 4-83. Basic Board Grid

B a s i c

Boar d

Gr i d

Figure 4-82. CB1 Location

5. Remove the grid of the basic board. (four screws must be removed). Refer to

Figure 4-83.

6. Remove the retainer which holds the terminator card to the board (one screw must be removed).

7. Remove the suspected terminator card. Refer to Figure 4-84.

Figure 4-84. Terminator Card Locations

4-62

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Installation Procedure

1. Install the new terminator card.

2. Re-install the retainer.

3. Install the grid of the Basic board.

4. Close the rear door.

5. Switch CB1 ON.

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

6. Close the front door.

7. Press Power Off on the Control panel.

8. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745

Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic in ODG that you ran before you exchanged the FRU.

9. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-63

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

ESS Tailgate Exchange Procedure

Removal Procedure

1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be

powered OFF.

2. Press Power Off on the control panel.

3. Open the front door and the rear door.

4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-85.

c. Locate the related EAC card. Refer to

Figure 4-87 on page 4-65.

d. Remove the three non-polarized top card connector from positions W, X, and Y.

Refer to Figure 4-89 on page 4-65.

e. Disconnect the two cable ground wires from the board.

f. Withdraw the EAC card until the line cable

(J1) on the component side is accessible.

Disconnect the cable.

g. Unclamp the cable connected to the tailgate.

h. Remove the external cable from the related connector.

i. Unscrew the connector (two screws) and remove it with its internal cable.

Figure 4-85. CB1 Location

5. For physical locations, refer to Figure 4-86 and to Figure 4-87 on page 4-65.

6. Referring to Figure 4-89 on page 4-65 and to

Figure 4-88 on page 4-65 remove the cable from EAC to tailgate as follow: a. Remove the cover of the basic board.

Loosen the two screws and lift up the cover.

b. Attention: Use the ESD kit and proce-

dures.

E S S

Tail Gate

Rear

Figure 4-86. ESS Tailgate Location

4-64

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Tailgate 01Q

CO D0

Basic Board 01G-A1

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

ELA1 ELA2

Figure 4-87. ESS Tailgate and Basic board

Car d CSP Card EAC

W

X

Y

J1

Figure 4-89. EAC Card

Figure 4-88. ESS Cables

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-65

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

Installation Procedure

1. Install the new connector with its internal cable into the tailgate. Two screws must be used.

2. Clamp the internal cable to the EAC card.

3. Replug the cable to the EAC card connector

(J1).

4. Replug the two cable ground wires to the board.

5. Replug the EAC card.

6. Replace the three top card connectors.

7. Reconnect the external cable on the tailgate connector.

8. Reinstall the cover of the Basic board.

9. Close the rear door.

10. Switch CB1 ON.

11. Close the front door.

12. Press Power On on the control panel.

13. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745

Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic in ODG that you ran before you exchanged the FRU.

14. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.

4-66

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

PS1 Exchange Procedure

Removal Procedure

1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be

powered OFF.

2. Press Power Off on the control panel.

3. Open the front door.

4. Open the rear door.

5. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-90.

6. Locate the PS1 and Primary power box. Refer to Figure 4-90.

7. Remove the DMUX/PS1 cover. Refer to

Figure 4-91. Two screws must be removed

.1/

.

Refer to Figure 4-93 and to Figure 4-92 on page 4-68 and do the following:

8. At the Primary power box, remove the power cable going to PS1

.2/

.

9. Remove the cover which protects TB1 to TB4

(two screws must be removed).

10. Remove the cover which protects TB5 and

TB6 (two screws must be removed).

11. Verify that on each side of the PS1, the power cables are labeled according to their positions.

If not done, label them.

12. Remove the cables from the PS1.

13. Remove the two screws

.3/

which hold PS1 to the frame.

14. Remove the cable between Fan1 and the primary power box (J7).

15. Slide the PS1 out.

Figure 4-90. Power Supply 1 (PS1) and CB1

Locations

Figure 4-91. Power Supply 1 (PS1) Cover

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-67

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

Installation Procedure

1. Install the new PS1 in the frame and fasten it with the two screws

.3/

.

2. Reconnect the cable between the Fan1 and the primary power box (J7).

3. Reconnect the power cables in their proper positions on the PS1 front and rear sides.

4. Re-install the cover which protects TB1 to TB4 with two screws. Refer to Figure 4-93.

5. Re-install the cover which protects TB5 and

TB6 with two screws. Refer to Figure 4-93.

6. Re-install PS1 cover with the 2 screws

.1/

.

7. At the primary power box, reconnect the PS1 power cable

.2/

.

.

8. Switch CB1 ON.

9. Close the front and the rear door.

10. Press Power On on the control panel.

11. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745

Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic in ODG that you ran before you exchanged the FRU.

12. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.

Figure 4-92. Primary Power Box

Figure 4-93. Power Supply 1

4-68

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

PS2 and Primary Power Box Exchange Procedure

Removal Procedure

1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be

powered OFF.

2. Press Power Off on the control panel.

3. Open the front door and the rear door.

4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-94.

5. Set OFF the Customer power supply

switch related to the 3745. Install the appropriate safety panel which indicates that the supply should not be turned ON

6. Locate the PS2 and the primary power box.

Refer to Figure 4-94.

7. Refer to Figure 4-95 and to Figure 4-96 on

page 4-70 .

8. Disconnect the main power cable from outlet

J3.

9. Release the ground wire

.1/

from the frame.

10. At the front and rear sides of the primary power box, verify that the cables are labeled according to their positions. If they are not, label them. Then remove all the cables.

11. Remove the four screws

.2/

which secure the primary power box to the frame.

12. Slide the primary power box out and place it

in a safe working area.

13. Remove the six screws

.3/

which secure the

PSs covers

.4/

.

14. Remove the PSs covers

.4/

.

15. Remove the two screws

.5/

which secure the

DC/DC converter cover

.6/

.

16. Remove the DC/DC converter cover

.6/

.

Figure 4-94. Primary Power Box, Power Supply 2, and

CB1 Locations

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-69

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

Figure 4-95. Cable Locations on Primary Power Box

Figure 4-96. PS2 in Primary Power Box

4-70

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

17. Refer to Figure 4-97.

18. Disconnect the three cables

.7/

and remove the ground wire from the DC/DC converter connector

.9/

.

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

19. Remove the five screws

.8/

which maintain the PS2 onto the primary power box.

20. Remove the PS2.

Figure 4-97. PS2 and Primary Power Box Assembly

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-71

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

Installation Procedure

1. If you are exchanging:

Ÿ The PS2 install the new PS2 in the primary power box.

Ÿ The primary power box, install the PS2 in the new primary power box.

Use the five screws

.8/

.

2. Reconnect the three cables

.7/

and re-install the ground wire at the DC/DC converter connector

.9/

.

3. Re-install the DC/DC converter cover

.6/

with the two screws

.5/

.

4. Re-install the PSs covers

.4/

with the six screws

.3/

.

5. Slide the primary power box in the frame and fasten it with the four screws

.2/

.

6. Reconnect the ground wire

.1/

to the frame.

7. Reconnect all the cables in their proper position, at the front and rear sides of the primary power box.

8. Reconnect the main power cable in outlet J3.

9. Set ON the Customer power supply switch related to the 3745 and remove the safety panel installed previously.

10. Switch CB1 ON.

11. Close the front door and the rear door.

12. Press Power On on the control panel.

13. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745

Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic in ODG that you ran before you exchanged the FRU.

14. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.

4-72

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

EPO Exchange Procedure

Removal Procedure

1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be

powered OFF.

2. Press Power Off on the control panel.

3. Open the front and rear door.

4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-98.

5. Set OFF the Customer power supply

switch related to the 3745 Install the appropriate safety panel which indicates that the supply should not be turned ON

6. Locate the primary power box and the EPO.

Refer to Figure 4-98 and to Figure 4-99.

7. Refer to Figure 4-100 and to Figure 4-101

on page 4-74:

8. Disconnect the main power cable from the outlet J3.

9. At the front side and at the rear side of the primary power box, verify that the cables are labeled according to their positions. If they are not, label them. Remove all the cables.

10. Release the ground wire

.1/

from the frame.

11. Remove the four screws

.2/

which secure the primary power box to the frame. Refer to

Figure 4-100 on page 4-74 and Figure 4-101 on page 4-74.

Figure 4-98. Primary Power Box and CB1 Locations

E P O

Rear

Figure 4-99. EPO Location

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-73

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

12. Slide the primary power box out and place it

in a safe working area.

13. Remove the four screws

.3/

which secure the

PS2 cover.

14. Remove the PS2 cover

.4/

.

Figure 4-100. Cables on Primary Power Box

Figure 4-101. Primary Power Box and PS2 Cover Removal

4-74

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

15. Refer to Figure 4-102:

16. Disconnect the cable

.7/

from the PS2.

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

17. Remove the four screws

.8/

which secure the

EPO plate to the frame. Remove the EPO assembly

.9/

.

Figure 4-102. EPO Assembly

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-75

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

Installation Procedure

1. Install the new EPO assembly and fasten it with the four screws

.8/

.

2. Reconnect the cable

.7/

.

3. Re-install the PS2 cover

.4/

with the four screws

.3/

.

4. Slide the primary power box in the frame and fasten it with the four screws

.2/

.

5. Reconnect the ground wire

.1/

to the frame.

6. Reconnect all the cables to their proper position at the front side and at the rear side of the primary power box.

7. Reconnect the main power cable in outlet J3.

8. Set the Customer power supply switch to ON, and remove the safety panel previously installed. panel.

9. Switch CB1 ON.

10. Close the front and rear door.

11. Press Power On on the control panel.

12. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745

Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic that you ran before you exchanged the

FRU.

13. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.

4-76

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

Basic Board Exchange Procedure

Removal Procedure

1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be

powered OFF.

2. Press Power Off on the control panel.

3. Open the front and rear door.

4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-103.

5. Locate the board. Refer to Figure 4-103.

6. Refer to Figure 4-104 on page 4-78 .

7. Remove the basic board cover

.1/

(loosen the two screws

.2/

and lift up the cover).

8. remove the 2 MOSS board covers

.3/

(seven screws must be removed

.4/

).

9. Remove the basic board grid (four screws must be removed). Refer to Figure 4-105 on page 4-78.

10. At the channel tailgate, set all the select out switches to bypass (if any channel adapter is installed).

11. At the PS1 remove the cover of the four FDS cables (two screws must be removed).

Disconnect these four cables and the multivoltage cable going to the basic board. Refer to

Figure 4-106 on page 4-78.

Figure 4-103. Basic Board, MOSS Board, and CB1

Locations

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-77

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

Front Vi ew

Figure 4-104. Basic Board and MOSS Covers

Rear

Figure 4-105. Basic Board Grid

B a s i c

Boar d

Gr i d

4-78

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Figure 4-106. FDS and Multivoltage Cable Locations on the PS1

12. At Fan2, disconnect the air flow detector cable and the power cable. Refer to Figure 4-107.

13. Remove the two screws

.1/

which maintain

Fan2 to the frame.

14. Slide the Fan2 assembly out.

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

Figure 4-107. Fan2 Air Flow Detector and Power Connectors

15. At the MOSS board disconnect the four cables going to the basic board. Refer to

Figure 4-108.

16. Open the clamps which secure these cables to the basic board enclosure.

17. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.

18. Remove the cross-over connectors.

19. Verify that the cards and the cables from the cards are labeled according to their positions.

if they are not, label them. Unplug the cables from the cards, then remove the cards and store them in a safe place (do not remove the horizontal cards in row Z, they will be removed later).

20. At the rear side of the board, remove the channel tailgate cables if a channel adapter is installed.

21. Remove the five screws

.5/

which maintain the enclosure to the frame (refer to

Figure 4-109). Slide the enclosure out of the machine taking care not to damage the cables.

22. Place the enclosure in a safe working area.

Figure 4-108. MOSS to Basic Cable Locations

Figure 4-109. Basic Board Enclosure

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-79

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

23. Refer to Figure 4-110 .

24. Remove the 10 screws

.6/

which secure the retainers that hold the cables and the terminator cards in rows Y and Z. Remove the retainers.

25. Remove the terminator cards and store them in a safe place.

26. Remove the two screws

.7/

which hold the two ground FDS cables in the rack assembly.

27. Disconnect the cables and remove them with the retainer.

28. At the front side of the board, remove the retainer at the bottom of the board, (row Z one screw must be removed).

29. Remove the DCREG cards (if they are present).

Retai ner

Figure 4-110. Basic Board Cables

Ter mi nat or

Car ds

Rack

As s embl y

4-80

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

30. Remove the six screws

.8/

which secure the board assembly to the rack assembly. Refer to Figure 4-111.

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

31. Remove the board assembly.

Boar d As s embl y

Figure 4-111. Basic Assembly 1

Rack As sembl y

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-81

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

32. Remove the 14 screws

.9/

which hold the stiffener to the board (refer to Figure 4-112).

33. Remove the stiffener.

34. Remove the four screws

.1ð/

which hold the board to the ASM gate (refer to Figure 4-112).

35. Remove the board.

Figure 4-112. Basic Assembly 2

4-82

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

Installation Procedure

1. Place the new board on the ASM gate and fasten it with the four screws.

.1ð/

. Refer to

Figure 4-112 on page 4-82.

2. Install the stiffener on the board and fasten it with the 14 screws.

.9/

Refer to Figure 4-112 on page 4-82.

3. Install the DCREG cards (if present) in the board and tighten them with the retainer.

4. Install the board assembly on the rack assembly and fasten it with the six screws

.8/

. Refer to Figure 4-111 on page 4-81.

5. Reconnect the two ground FDS cables and fasten them to the rack assembly with the two screws

.7/

. Refer to Figure 4-110 on page 4-80.

6. Reconnect the other cables. Refer to

Figure 4-110 on page 4-80 and to

Figure 4-113.

Ÿ Reconnect the cables located in the upper

Y row.

Ÿ Install on the upper retainer (with four screws) on these cables.

Ÿ Reconnect the cables located in the lower

Y row.

Ÿ Install on retainer (with three screws) on these cables.

Ÿ

Reconnect the cable in the Z row.

Ÿ

Install on the retainer (with one screw) on the cable.

7. Press Power Off on the control panel.

Y Row Upper

Y Row Upper

Z Row

Figure 4-113. Y and Z Rows

8. Install the terminator cards and tighten them with the two retainers (one screw per retainer). Refer to Figure 4-110 on page 4-80.

9. Slide the enclosure intoe the machine frame taking care not to damage the cables.

10. Fasten the enclosure to the frame with the five screws

.5/

.Refer to Figure 4-109 on page 4-79.

11. If a channel adapter is installed, reconnect the channel tailgate cables tot the rear side of the board.

12. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.

13. Install the cards into their correct location according to their labels. If you have suspicions about the locations, refer to Figure 4-4 on page 4-6, to Figure 4-5 on page 4-7, or to

Figure 4-6 on page 4-8.

14. Install the cross-over connectors and cables.

If you have suspicions about the cross-over location, refer to Figure 4-4 on page 4-6,

Figure 4-5 on page 4-7, or Figure 4-6 on page 4-8.

15. At the MOSS board, reconnect the four cables from Basic board and close the clamps which maintain them. Refer to Figure 4-108 on page 4-79.

16. Install the Fan2 assembly in the frame and fasten it with the two screws

.1/

. Refer to

Figure 4-107 on page 4-79.

17. Reconnect the air flow detector cable and the power cable at Fan2.

18. At the PS1 reconnect the four FDS cables and the multivoltage cable (from basic board) and close the clamps which maintain them.

19. Reinstall the cover with the two screws. Refer to Figure 4-106 on page 4-78.

20. Replace the grid of the base board with the four screws. Refer to Figure 4-83 on page 4-62.

21. At the channel tailgate, set all the select out bypass switches to normal (if any channel adapter is installed).

22. Close the rear door.

23. Re-install the MOSS board covers with the seven screws

.4/

.

24. Re-install the Basic board cover with the two screws

.2/

.

25. Switch CB1 ON.

26. Close the front door.

27. Press Power On on the control panel.

28. Run all diagnostics,

29. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-83

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

LIC Board Type 1 and 3 Exchange Procedure

Removal Procedure

1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be

powered OFF.

2. Press Power Off on the control panel.

3. Open the front and rear door.

4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-114.

5. Locate the board to be exchanged. Refer to

Figure 4-115.

Figure 4-114. CB1 Location

Figure 4-115. LIC Board Type 1 Locations

4-84

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

6. Remove one of the DMUX covers. Refer to

Figure 4-116.

7. Two screws must be removed

.1/

. Two kinds of DMUX cover exist according to the LIC board location.

Figure 4-116. DMUX Cover

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-85

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

8. Refer to Figure 4-117

9. Verify that the serial link cables on the DMUX are labeled according to their positions. If they are not, label them.

10. Remove the serial link cables.

11. Verify that the LIC cables are labeled according to their positions. If they are not, label them. Then remove the LIC cables.

12. Note the type and locations of the LICs.The

LIC type is indicated by the color of the thumb screw.

Figure 4-117. LIC Locations

LIC Board

Location

01L-A1

01M-A2

01L-A2

Address Switches

5 to 1

00011

00000

00010

LIC Type

LIC type 1

LIC type 3

LIC type 4A

LIC type 4B

DMUX

Thumb Screw

Color

Brown

Blue

Green

Green

White

4-86

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

13. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.

Remove the LICs and the DMUX by unfastening the thumb screws holding them to the board. (See “LIC Exchange Procedure” on page 4-44 and “DMUX Exchange Procedure” on page 4-39 for more details about removals).

14. Refer to Figure 4-117 on page 4-86,

Figure 4-118 .

15. Disconnect the power cable

.2/

from the LIC board.

16. Remove the four screws

.3/

holding the board assembly on the frame.

17. Remove the LIC board assembly.

18. Note the board address for later use.

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

Installation Procedure

1. Refer to Figure 4-117 on page 4-86 and set the same board address as you noted during the board removal.

2. Refer to Figure 4-118. Mount the new LIC board assembly in place and secure it with the four screws

.3/

.

3. Refer to Figure 4-117 on page 4-86. Reconnect the flat power cable

.2/

.

4. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.

Install the LICs and DMUX into their proper positions and fasten the thumb screws holding them to the board. Finger strength is enough.

Do not use tools.

Figure 4-118. LIC Board Assembly

5. Install the LIC cables in the LICs.

6. Install the serial link cables on the DMUX.

7. Refer to Figure 4-116 on page 4-85. Install the DMUX cover with two screws

.1/

.

8. Close the rear door.

9. Switch CB1 ON.

10. Close the front door.

11. Press Power On on the control panel.

12. Run all diagnostics.

13. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-87

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

LIC Board Type 2 Exchange Procedure

Removal Procedure:

1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be

powered OFF.

2. Press Power Off on the control panel.

3. Open the front door and the rear door.

4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-119

5. Locate the board to exchange. Refer to

Figure 4-121 on page 4-89

6. Remove the SMUX covers. Refer to

Figure 4-120 (four screws must be removed

.1/

).

Figure 4-119. CB1 Location

Figure 4-120. SMUX Cover

4-88

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

7. Refer to Figure 4-122 .

8. Remove the serial link cable (if installed) from the SMUX: (this cable may be absent on

SMUXB if SMUXA and the flat cable

.2/

are present).

9. Remove the flat cable

.2/

(if installed) which connects the two SMUXs, (if two LIC boards

Type 2 are present in the machine): These cable may be absent in spite of the presence of the two boards.

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

Figure 4-121. LIC Board Type 2 Locations

Figure 4-122. SMUX Link and Cable

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-89

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

10. Refer to Figure 4-123 .

11. Verify that the LIC cables are labeled according to their positions. If they are not, label them. Then remove the LIC cables from the LICs.

Figure 4-123. LIC Locations

LIC Board

Location

Address Switches

7 to 1

01L-A1

01L-A2

0000010

0000011

12. Note the types and locations of the LICs.

13. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.

Remove the LICs and the SMUX by unfastening the thumb screws holding them to the board.

14. Refer to Figure 4-123 and Figure 4-124 .

15. Disconnect the power cables

.3/

from the LIC board, and remove the screw and washer keeping ground strap to the frame

.7/

.

16. Remove the four screws

.4/

holding the board assembly to the frame.

17. Remove the LIC board

.5/

and the ground bracket

.6/

.

18. Note the board address for later use.

Figure 4-124. LIC Board Assembly

4-90

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

Installation Procedure

1. Refer to Figure 4-123 on page 4-90 and set the same board address as you noted during the board removal.

2. Refer to Figure 4-124 on page 4-90.

3. Mount the new LIC board

.5/

and the ground bracket

.6/

in place and secure them with the four screws

.4/

.

4. Refer to Figure 4-123 on page 4-90.

5. Reconnect the flat power cables

.3/

.

6. Refer to Figure 4-124 on page 4-90.

7. Mount the ground strap onto the LIC board to the frame with the screw and a washer

.7/

.

8. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.

Install the LICs and SMUX into their proper positions and fasten the thumb screws holding them to the board. Finger strength is enough.

Do not use tools.

9. Install the LIC cables on the LICs.

10. Refer to Figure 4-122 on page 4-89.

11. Install the serial link cable (if any) on the

SMUX.

12. Install the flat cable (if any) between the two

SMUXs.

13. Refer to Figure 4-120 on page 4-88.

14. Install the SMUX cover with two screws

.1/

.

15. Close the rear door.

16. Switch CB1 ON.

17. Close the front door.

18. Press Power On on the control panel.

19. Run all diagnostics.

20. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-91

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

MOSS Board Exchange Procedure

Removal Procedure

1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be

powered OFF.

2. Press Power Off on the control panel.

3. Open the front door.

4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-125.

5. Locate the board. Refer to Figure 4-125.

6. Remove the covers of the MOSS board

.1/

.

(seven screws must be removed

.2/

). Refer to Figure 4-126.

8

Figure 4-126. MOSS Board Covers

Figure 4-125. MOSS Board and CB1 Locations

4-92

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

7. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.

8. Refer to Figure 4-127 .

9. Check if the cassettes are labelled according to their positions. If they are not, label them.

10. Remove the cassettes and store them in a safe place.

11. Verify that the cables are labeled according to their position. If they are not, label them.

12. Remove all the cables from the board.

Figure 4-127. MOSS Board Cards and Cables

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-93

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

13. Remove the eight screws

.3/

which maintain the MOSS board enclosure in the frame.

Refer to Figure 4-128. Remove the enclosure and place it in a safe working place.

14. Remove the 12 screws

.4/

which hold the

MOSS board on the stiffener. Refer to

Figure 4-128. Remove the MOSS board.

S t i f f e n e r

Boar d

Chas s i s As s embl y

Figure 4-128. MOSS Board Enclosure

4-94

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Installation Procedure

1. Place the new board on the stiffener and fasten it with the 12 screws

.4/

. Refer to

Figure 4-128 on page 4-94.

2. Replace the MOSS board enclosure in the machine frame and fasten it with the eight screws

.3/

. Refer to Figure 4-128 on page 4-94.

3. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.

4. Reconnect the cables and the cassettes in their correct location according to their labels.

Refer to Figure 4-127 on page 4-93.

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

5. Install the covers of the MOSS board with the

7 screws

.2/

.

6. Switch CB1 ON.

7. Close the front door.

8. Press Power On on the control panel.

9. Run all diagnostics.

10. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-95

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

Channel Tailgate Exchange Procedure

Removal Procedure

1. Ask the customer to disable the channel

related to the suspected channel tailgate connector. Also inform him that the 3745 is to be powered OFF.

2. Press Power Off on the control panel.

3. Open the front and rear door.

4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-129.

5. Locate the channel tailgate. Refer to

Figure 4-131 on page 4-97.

6. Remove the basic board grid. (two screws must be removed). Refer to Figure 4-131 on page 4-97.

7. At the channel tailgate connectors, set all the select out bypass switches to Bypass. Refer to Figure 4-130.

8. Disconnect the channel bus and tag cables from the channel tailgate connector to be removed.

9. In order to allow the customer to use the channel during the repair time, you must connect the cables together or to the terminators.

10. Remove the two screws which maintain the channel tailgate connector. See note. 1

11. At the Basic board rear side disconnect the corresponding flat cables by loosening the retention screw. These parts are fragile.

Handle them with care.

12. Remove the connector flat cables assembly from the channel tailgate rack.

Figure 4-129. CB1 Location

Sel ect out

B y pas s S wi t ch

B y p a s s

Tag

B u s

Figure 4-130. Select Out Switch

Nor mal

1 An easier access to a lower located channel tailgate connector can be obtained by removing the upper one(s). For each channel tailgate connector use the steps 10 to 12. Do not disconnect the channel bus and tag cables from the connectors.

4-96

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

B a s i c

Boar d

Gr i d

Rear

Channel

Tail Gate

Figure 4-131. Channel Tailgate and Basic Board Grid

Locat i on: 01P

Locati on: 01G

Figure 4-132. Channel Tailgate, Cables, and Basic Board

Installation Procedure

1. Install the new connector flat cables assembly in the channel tailgate rack.

2. Connect the flat cables to the basic board rear side. Ensure that the connector is fully

plugged before securing the screw. The retention screw is not designed to achieve the connection.

3. Hold the channel tailgate connector with the two screws.

4. If the customer has restarted the channel ask

him to disable this channel again.

5. Reconnect the channel bus and tag cables onto the channel tailgate connector.

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-97

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

6. Set all the select out bypass switches to

normal.

7. Replace the basic board grid with the two screws.

8. Close the rear door.

9. Switch CB1 ON.

10. Close the front door.

11. Press Power On on the control panel.

12. Run the channel wrap test on each channel.

Refer to “How to Run the Channel Wrap Test” on page 3-25.

13. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.

4-98

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange

Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000

001

007 (continued)

This procedure analyzes the results of the diagnostics or an FRU exchange and explains what must be done afterwards.

Did the diagnostic detect a failure?

Yes No

008

When MOSS diagnostics detect an error, a hex code is set on the control panel. The code can be decoded by using “3745 Control Panel Codes” on page 1-15.

009

– Go to Step 018 on page 4-100.

When ODG/CDG diagnostics detect an error, a reference code is given on the diagnostic screen.

See Figure 3-7 on page 3-12.

Was the failure other than 'unexpected error'?

Yes No

010

From Menu 3, select the BRC function. Enter the reference code. The action to be taken is displayed. See “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.

Was the diagnostic running in CDG mode?

Yes No

Did diagnostics initialization completed and the diagnostics start to run?

Yes No

011

002

Start the MOSS diagnostics. Refer to “How to Run MOSS Diagnostics” on page 3-4.

Run the previous diagnostic for the upper level in the 'run all' diagnostics.

For example, TRSS > IOC Bus >

CCU. Go to “3745 Diagnostic

Requirement” on page 1-60

012

003

Did the diagnostics run without a message for manual intervention?

Yes No

Analyse the reference code. Refer to “Using

Reference Codes” on page 1-14. Continue with Step 013.

004

Follow the instructions given by the diagnostics. Go back to this procedure according to the result.

005

Was the diagnostic result obtained before any

FRUs were exchanged?

Yes No

006

Go to Step 025 on page 4-100.

007

(Step 007 continues)

013

You may have started this service call to exchange FRUs called by a reference code or panel code.

Is the first FRU called by the diagnostics different from the FRU you were going to exchange?

Yes No

014

Perform FRU exchange using Chapter 4,

“3745 FRU Exchange” on page 4-1.

015

(Step 015 continues)

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-99

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

015 (continued)

Is there a common FRU given by both lists?

Yes No

016

– If you do not have the first FRU called by the diagnostics, obtain it.

If you have the FRU or when you obtain the

FRU, go to “3745 FRU List” on page 1-53 and follow the instructions to exchange it.

017

Consider that it is the first FRU of the list and perform FRU exchange using Chapter 4, “3745

FRU Exchange” on page 4-1.

018

Were HPTSS diagnostics being run for a suspected FESH card?

Yes No

019

Go to Step 022.

020

– In 3745 frame 01 (at tailgate location 01Q), remove the cables from the HPTSS lines to be tested. Refer to Figure 4-2 on page 4-4.

– Install wrap plugs in the sockets of 01Q for the lines to be tested.

– Update the CDF to show that the lines to be tested have wrap plugs installed. Refer to the

IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service

Function (CDF chapter).

– Run one of the following HPTSS diagnostic routines:

Ÿ VI and VK if V.35 wrap plug is installed

Ÿ VJ and VK if X.21 wrap plug is installed

Ÿ VI, VJ, and VK if both types of wrap plugs are installed.

Refer to “How to Run Internal Function Tests” on page 3-9.

Did the diagnostics run free of error?

Yes No

021

Go to Step 013 on page 4-99.

022

(Step 022 continues)

022 (continued)

Is the FRU you were processing the last FRU called for the error?

Yes No

023

You have an intermittent error or an error not detected by this diagnostic.

Continue using this manual for the next

FRU called. Go to “3745 FRU List” on page 1-53.

024

All parts of the machine required for FRU exchange will now be available for service.

Change all FRUs called (use, Chapter 4, “3745

FRU Exchange” on page 4-1).

025

Have you been told to exchange all FRUs for an intermittent problem?

Yes No

026

Go to Step 032.

027

Did the diagnostics run error free or power successfully ON?

Yes No

028

You have a problem with the new FRU. Try another one or put the original back in.

Refer to Chapter 4, “3745 FRU Exchange” on page 4-1 and continue with next Step.

029

Have all the FRUs called been exchanged?

Yes No

030

Go to Chapter 4, “3745 FRU Exchange” on page 4-1 for next FRU called.

031

Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.

032

(Step 032 continues)

4-100

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

3745 FRU Exchange Procedure

032 (continued)

Was the FRU other than a power supply?

Yes No

033

Has the power supply successfully powered up?

Yes No

034

Go to Step 046.

035

Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.

036

Did the last run of the diagnostics or IML detect an error?

Yes No

037

Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.

038

Is the error the same as before?

Yes No

039

Go to Step 044.

040

– As the problem is not solved by changing this

FRU, you must put the original back in. Refer to

“Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1. Continue with the next step.

Have all the FRUs called been changed?

Yes No

041

In “3745 FRU List” on page 1-53 check if the next FRU and the FRU you have just exchanged have the same 'Diagnostic' and

'Area'.

Do both have the same 'Diagnostic' and

'Area'.

Yes No

042

(Step 042 continues)

042 (continued)

Follow the “3745 FRU List” on page 1-53.

043

Go to “Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1 for the next FRU called.

044

– Check what you have done:

Ÿ Cards correctly installed

Ÿ

Cables correctly plugged

Ÿ Crossovers correctly located and oriented

Ÿ

Switches in correct position.

– Run the diagnostics again, IML or any other action you were asked after FRU exchange.

Was a failure detected?

Yes No

045

Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.

046

During your path through the MIP, have you recorded an Other Action or MAP to use?

Yes No

047

You may have a defective new FRU, or multiple problems. Try to determine if restarting the full procedure, or if another symptom may help you.

Also suspect cables, boards and voltages.

It may also be necessary to run diagnostics with the ALL option in offline mode. In any case, contact your support structure for further assistance.

048

Go there now.

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-101

CE leaving procedure

CE Leaving Procedure

The maintenance package has determined that the 3745 is ready to be returned to normal operation.

001

Did you work on the 3745 Model 17A?

Yes No

002

Go to Step 004.

003

Ÿ In the MOSS-E View window, double click on the service processor icon.

Ÿ The Service Processor Menu window is displayed.

Ÿ Click on the Configuration Management option.

Ÿ Double click on the Manage Remote Operations option.

Ÿ In the Remote Operation Management window, select the Remote operations authorization option and click on OK.

Ÿ On the Remote Support Facility window, select the two following options:

Enable Remote Support Facility

Generate alerts

Ÿ Click on OK.

Ÿ Click on Cancel to return to Service Processor Menu.

Ÿ Click on Function and Exit to return to the MOSS-E View window.

Ÿ In the MOSS-E View window, click on Program in the action bar.

Ÿ Click on Log Off MOSS-E.

Ÿ Continue with Step 004.

004

You should use the following list to ensure that the machine is in suitable condition for customer operation and that all call information is recorded.

1. Replace any cables removed.

2. Check the battery voltage and exchange it if necessary.

3. Do all the actions that apply in the following list:

If You Have

Exchanged all the FRUs that were identified for an intermittent problem or a problem not detected by the diagnostics (tentative repair which can be unsuccessful).

Exchanged a Board

Exchanged a LIC Board

What You Should Do

Use the manual BER correlation (BRC, refer to the IBM

3745 Service Functions) to point out some additional potentially failing FRUs.

1. Find, in the Error Log Display the alarm with the Reference Code that you used to exchange the FRUs.

2. Select the BER range which occurs in the same time frame as the alarm.

3. Type BRC in the Menu 3.

4. Enter the most recent and the oldest BER in the range you have selected.

5. Press SEND.

6. Note the extra FRUs, if any, provided by the BER correlation and inform the HSC/HCS or update the PMH in case of problem reoccurence.

If the new board has a different part number with regard to the old one, you have to update the 'Board Level' label located on the front door.

Check the address plugging.

4-102

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

CE leaving procedure

Exchanged a FRU with a Different PN

Used the MIP for an Installation

Exchanged the PCC Card or Battery with Power OFF

Exchanged the HDD

Run the Wrap Diagnostic on the CA

Upgrade the CDF. Refer to the IBM 3745 Communication

Controller Service Function (CDF chapter) to upgrade or verify the CDF.

Go back to the installation procedure in the Installation

Manual.

Inform the customer that the TOD-clock and scheduled

power ON services will have to be recreated.

1. Inform the customer that he will have to refresh the

NCP on this disk if he uses HDD to load the control program.

2. Update the password.

Ensure that the wrap plug is removed

and replaced by the normal cable.

4. IML the MOSS as follows:

Ÿ

Set service to 0 (normal mode).

Ÿ

Set function to 1 (MOSS IML).

5. Do all actions that apply in the following list:

If you Have

Been working on the channels area in

Concurrent Diagnostic mode

Been working on the TSS, HPTSS, or

ESS adapter area in concurrent diagnostic mode

Been working with TRSS in concurrent diagnostic mode

What you Should Do

Restore the adapters back to NCP, using the channel service screen. Refer to “CA Restore Procedure” on page 4-105.

Ÿ Remove all wrap plugs installed during this service call.

Ÿ

Replace all modem and line cables removed during this service call.

Ÿ If you have altered CDFs during this service call, check CDFs and update, if necessary. Refer to the

IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service Function

(CDF chapter).

Ÿ IML the scanners disconnected from NCP during this call. This can be done by selecting IMS from Menu

1. When IML is complete, the adapters will automatically be connected to NCP.

Ÿ Ask the customer to reactivate the lines that were stopped during the maintenance.

Ÿ Connect the TRAs you disconnected during this service call back the to NCP. Refer to “TRA Reconnect Procedure” on page 4-105.

Ÿ

Ask the customer to reactivate the lines stopped during the maintenance.

6. Log Off the console by typing OFF on any displayed screen.

7. Set the console in use according to customer requirements.

8. Restore the power mode as it was before your intervention.

9. Do all the actions that apply in the following list:

If you Have What you Should Do

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-103

CE leaving procedure

Had the whole configuration

Disabled some channels

Ask the customer to IPL and load the NCP into the CCU.

Verify that IPL completes whithout errors.

If the system is not available to load the NCP into the

CCU, return the console to maintenance mode and IPL the CCU, one step at a time. At the beginning of phase 4

(IPL stop with phase 4 displayed) , verify that the message 'SCANNER(s) not IMLED xxxx' is not displayed.

Continue to end of phase 4.

Ask the customer to:

Ÿ Re-enable the channels using the CID screen.

Ÿ

Put the channels online from the host.

Put the 3746-900 to online mode.

Use the CDF-E display function to check that the replaced/tested FRUs are available or active.

Put the 3746-900 Offline

Been working on the 3746-900 in concurrent maintenance mode on processors or couplers.

10. Replace all covers and close the doors.

11. Leave the machine in a safe condition.

12. Record the actions taken and the FRUs replaced during the call.

If the origin of the intervention was an alarm A5, report it as preventive maintenance (Service Code

08).

13. Update the PMH record for this call.

14. Return parts to the stock room.

4-104

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

CE leaving procedure

CA Restore Procedure

1. On the 3745 console, invoke Menu 3 and type CAS in the selection area for channel adapter services.

2. Press SEND.

3. Type 4 for concurrent maintenance commands.

4. Press SEND.

5. Type the channel adapter number corresponding to this FRU in the CA number ===> field.

6. Press SEND

7. Type RES in the command ===>field.

8. Press SEND.

9. Re-initiate the same procedure from Step 5 for the associated CA, if any.

How to Put the MOSS Online

Note: MOSS can only be put online if the NCP is running.

1. Using the console, invoke Menu 2 (See PF key line).

2. In Menu 2, type MON in the selection area.

3. Press SEND.

4. MOSS ONLINE will be displayed on the screen.

TRA Reconnect Procedure:

For this procedure you may wish to refer to Figure 1-6 on page 1-67, Figure 1-8 on page 1-68, and Figure 1-7 on page 1-67.

1. On the 3745 console, invoke Menu 3 (See PF key line).

2. In Menu 3 type TRS in the selection area for TRSS services.

3. Press SEND.

4. The TRSS Function Selection Screen is displayed.

5. Type 1 in the selection area for TRA Selection Screen.

6. Press SEND.

7. The TRA Selection Screen is displayed.

8. Type the TRA number in the TRA # ==> field.

9. Press SEND

10. The TRSS Function Selection Screen is displayed.

11. Type 2 in the selection area for Connect/Disconnect.

12. Press SEND.

13. The TRA Connect/Disconnect Selection Screen is displayed.

14. Type CT in the input area to connect the selected adapter to the NCP.

15. Press SEND.

16. Re-initiate the same procedure from Step 5 for the associated TRA, if any.

Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange

4-105

CE leaving procedure

4-106

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Maintenance Aids

Appendix A. Maintenance Aids

Contacting Support

You may wish to record your support center telephone number here.

You may be directed to call support for various reasons. When support is called you may be asked to perform specific tasks. On the following pages you will find information about why you call support and references to where you will find information about the tasks you may have to perform.

Ÿ “Control Program Maintenance Aids.”

Ÿ “MOSS Microcode Maintenance Aids” on page A-2.

Ÿ “Scanner Microcode Maintenance Aids” on page A-2.

Ÿ “Special Tools” on page A-3.

Ÿ “Shipping Group Tools” on page A-4.

Ÿ “PKD (Portable Keypad Display) Maintenance Aids for LIC 5 and 6” on page A-5.

Control Program Maintenance Aids

The following list gives some possible causes of control program errors.

Ÿ A hardware configuration change has been performed and there is a difference between the hardware configuration and the control program generation.

Ÿ

The customer has made some software changes.

Ÿ

A PTF has been incorrectly applied.

Ÿ A PTF exists for the problem but has not been applied.

The following table shows where to find useful information in case of a suspected control program error.

Information

Customer procedures for diagnosis

How to perform control program procedures

How to execute NCP functions

Line interface display (LID)

Port swap

LIC swap

Stand-alone link test (SALT)

Cataloged procedures (CP1 to CP6)

LIC internal wrap test

LIC wrap test with wrap plugs

NetView* program alerts

Where to Find It

ACF/SSP Diagnosis Reference

IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide, SA33-0097

IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide, SA33-0097

IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide, SA33-0097

IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide, SA33-0097

IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide, SA33-0097

IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide, SA33-0097

IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide, SA33-0097

IBM 3745 Problem Determination Guide

IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide, SA33-0097

NetView Bibliography.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997

A-1

Maintenance Aids

MOSS Microcode Maintenance Aids

The following table shows where to find useful information in case of a suspected microcode error.

Information

How to apply an MCF

How to display and delete a MOSS dump

How to save, restore, and format the MOSS hard disk drive

How to dump a MOSS

Where to Find It

IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service

Function, SY33-2069

IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service

Function, SY33-2069

IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service

Function, SY33-2069

IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service

Function, SY33-2069

Scanner Microcode Maintenance Aids

The following table shows where to find useful information in case of a suspected scanner microcode error.

Information

MCF

Patches

Where to Find It

IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service

Function, SY33-2069

IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service

Function, SY33-2069

A-2

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Maintenance Aids

Special Tools

Maintaining the 3745 requires using tools in addition to those in the IBM service representative's tool kit.

The tools needed include:

General Purpose Tools

Tool

PT2-220 V or

PT2-110 V

PT3-220 V or

PT3-110 V

PT3-TPAM Acc. kit

TPLM

Display

Digital voltmeter

EIA breakout panel

Qty Part Nbr.

1 1749268

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

One of the following oscilloscope 1

Tektronix 454**

Tektronix 475**

Tektronix 2235**

Tektronix 2465 A**

High voltage probes 2

1749269

6406001

6406000

83X9300

1749290

1749270

8309874 or

8496278

453637

459559

453215

6428880

8309847

453698

ESD Kit

Part Name

ESD kit

This kit contains:

ESD mat

Wristband (small size)

(large size)

ESD ground cord

Part Nbr.

6428316

6428274

6428167

6428169

6428166

Appendix A. Maintenance Aids

A-3

Maintenance Aids

Shipping Group Tools

The following tools are shipped with the machine:

Tool

Segment board

Console wrap plug (31XX)

Console wrap plug (3727)

Console wrap plug (PC*/PS2*)

LIC 1-4 wrap plug

CA bus wrap plug (old) or

CA bus wrap plug (new)

CA tag wrap plug (old) or

CA tag wrap plug (new)

CA bus terminator

CA tag terminator

EPO plug

Cover keys

Bypass card type 1 (BPC1)

Bypass card type 2 (BPC2)

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

Qty Part Nbr.

1

1

2

1

1

1

5997533

6398697

2667737

26F0320

65X8927

03F4301

1

1

26F1755

03F4300

26F1754

2282675

2282676

8482303

1643894

03F4372

66X0965

The following tools are shipped when an HPTSS is installed in the machine:

V.35 Wrap Plug

X.21 Wrap Plug

ESS Wrap Plug

1

1

1

58X9349

58X9354

70X8670

The following tool is shipped when a LIC3 is installed in the machine:

LIC3 wrap cable 1 65X8928

The following tools are shipped when a LIC5 or LIC6 is installed in the machine:

PT2 adapter cable

LIC5/LIC6 wrap plug (tailgate)

2

1

One of the following tools is also shipped:

11F4816

11F4815

LIC-5/6 wrap block (cable end) P/N according to the country.

Austria

Belgium

France

Germany

Hong Kong

Israel

Italy

Japan

Luxemburg

Netherlands

Switzerland

U.K.

U.S.A./Canada

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

6162946

6162950

6162955

6162950

65X8070

66X1954

6162957

6124644

6162950

6162948

66X0748

65X8069

66X0807

The following tools are shipped when a

3746-900 is installed in the machine:

ESCON wrap plug

TIC-3 wrap plug

Filler (dummy card)

LIC11 wrap plug

LIC12 wrap plug for X.21

LIC12 wrap plug for V.35

LIC16 wrap plug

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

5605670

6165899

2733278

58G9425

58X9354

58X9349

57G8097

Wrap plugs for testing ARCs and cables (these wrap plugs must be installed on ARC cables):

ARC V.35 DTE wrap plug

ARC V.35 DCE wrap plug

ARC V.24 DTE wrap plug

ARC V.24 DCE wrap plug

ARC V.24 DCE/DTE 3745 wrap plug1

ARC V.35 DCE 3745 wrap plug 1

ARC V.35 DTE 3745 wrap plug

ARC X.21 DTE wrap plug

1

1

ARC X.21 DCE wrap plug 1

ARC X.21 DCE/DTE 3745 wrap plug 1

1

1

1

1

61F4527

61F4526

61F4523

61F4522

61F4525

61F4528

61F4578

61F4530

61F4529

65X8927

Wrap plugs for testing ARCs assembly B (these wrap plugs must be installed at the rear of the ARCs):

ARC V.24 wrap plug

ARC V.35 Non 3745 wrap plug

ARC V.35 DTE 3745 wrap plug

ARC V.35 DCE 3745 wrap plug

ARC X.21 wrap plug

1

1

1

1

1

58G5660

58G5661

58G5658

58G5659

58G5662

The following tool is shipped with the service processor, which has an integrated modem installed:

Integrated modem wrap plug 1 74F4508

The following tools are shipped with the IBM controller expansion rack containing the service processor and/or the network node processor:

Spare fuse 2 58G5782

A-4

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Maintenance Aids

PKD (Portable Keypad Display) Maintenance Aids for LIC 5 and 6

Configuration:

On a LIC type 5 or 6, the configuration parameters are set from the PKD.

Refer to the "3745 Connection and Integration Guide" for the detailed procedure.

On a LIC type 5, the following configuration parameters are "service representative only":

MODE (native or CCITT), CD SENSIT (normal or low), and L XMIT LEVEL.

They must be set by using the 'B' command as follows:

1. Enter the B 300 at the PKD.

2. Press GO several times to get the desired option message.

3. Press ERASE and enter the new value if applicable.

4. Press GO to validate the new value.

B Commands (Only for LIC Type 5):

The following other B commands can be used by the CE for miscellaneous actions:

Ÿ

B 100 Reload default configuration.

Ÿ

B 555 Address a remote modem (using the modem serial number) to change some parameters.

Ÿ

B 666 Increase the time out from 30 seconds to 10 minutes.

Ÿ

B 703/704/705 CO/CS functions (allows remote commands).

Ÿ B 730 Send a 1004 Hz tone on telephone line.

Manual Tests:

The following manual tests can be executed on a LIC type 5:

Ÿ Local self-test

Ÿ

Remote self-test

Ÿ

Local status report

Ÿ

Remote status report

Ÿ

Analog test (line analysis)

Ÿ Digital test (transmit/receive test)

Ÿ Manual loopback.

The following manual tests can be executed on a LIC type 6:

Ÿ

Local self-test

Ÿ

Digital test (transmit/receive test)

Ÿ

Manual loopback.

Refer to the "3745 Connection and Integration Guide" for detailed procedures.

Appendix A. Maintenance Aids

A-5

Maintenance Aids

A-6

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Bibliography

Appendix B. 3745 Bibliography

Service Personnel Definitions

Definition

Product trained CE (PT CE).

Hardware CE also able to fix problems in the microcode.

Also called:

CE1

1st Level CE

CE Phase 1

Uses

RETAIN console

3745 control panel

3745 console

3746-900 control panel

Service Processor

MIP

Service Functions Guide

Installation Guide

Parts Catalog

Basic Operations Guide

Problem Determination Guide

Connection and Integration Guide

Advanced Operations Guide

Wiring Diagrams (YZ Pages)

Same as PT CE, plus:

Hardware Maintenance Reference

Diagnostic Descriptions

Principles of Operation

Product support trained CE (PST CE).

Hardware CE also able to determine and fix problems in the microcode

Also called:

CE2

2nd Level CE

CE Phase 2

Specialist

Support

Hardware Central Service (HCS) may include:

Dispatchers

PT CEs

PST CEs

Program service representative (PSR): Also called:

Program support CE

Software CE

All 3745 tools and books

Operating systems, access methods, and NCP/EP library

Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997

B-1

Bibliography

Customer Documentation for the 3745 (Models 130, 150, 160, 170, and

17A) and 3746 (Model 900)

Table B-1 (Page 1 of 4). Customer Documentation for the 3745 Models 130 to 17A and 3746 Model 900

This customer documentation has the following formats:

B o o k s

Onli ne

B o o k s and

Di s k e t t es

Books and

CD-ROM

Finding Information

SA33-0142

Evaluating and Configuring

GA33-0138

GA33-0180

GA33-0183

IBM 3745 Communication Controller

Models 130, 150, 160, 170, and 17A

IBM 3746 Expansion Unit Model 900

Customer Master Index

ñ

Provides references for finding information in the customer documentation library.

IBM 3745 Communication Controller

Models 130, 150, and 170

Introduction

Gives an introduction about the IBM Models 130 to 170 capabilities, including

Model 160. For Model 17A refer to the Overview, GA33-0180.

IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models A

ò

IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller

Models 900 and 950

Overview

Gives an overview of connectivity capabilities within SNA, APPN, and IP networking.

IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models A

ò

IBM 3746 Expansion Unit Model 900

Migration and Planning Guide

Prepares 3745 Models A and 3746 Model 900 planning for:

Ÿ

Field upgrades

Ÿ Network integration (NCP control)

Ÿ Physical installation.

B-2

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Bibliography

Table B-1 (Page 2 of 4). Customer Documentation for the 3745 Models 130 to 17A and 3746 Model 900

Preparing Your Site

GC22-7064

GN22-5490

Input/Output Equipment

Installation Manual-Physical Planning

Technical News Letter

Provides information on physical installation for the 3745 Models 130 to 610.

For 3745 Models A and 3746 Model 900, refer to the Migration and Planning

Guide, GA33-0183.

GA33-0140

IBM 3745 Communication Controller

Models 130, 150, 160, and 170

Preparing for Connection

Helps for preparing the 3745 Models 130 to 170 cable installation. For 3745

Model 17A refer to the Connection and Integration Guide, SA33-0129.

Preparing for Operation

GA33-0400

IBM 3745 Communication Controller All Models

ó

IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller

Models 900 and 950

Safety Information

ñ

Provides general safety guidelines.

SA33-0129

IBM 3745 Communication Controller All Models

ó

IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900

Connection and Integration Guide

ñ

Contains information for connecting hardware and integrating network of the

3745 and 3746-900 after installation.

SA33-0416

SA33-0158

Line Interface Coupler Type 5 and Type 6

Portable Keypad Display

Migration and Integration Guide

Contains information for moving and testing LIC types 5 and 6.

IBM 3745 Communication Controller All Models

ó

IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900

Console Setup Guide

ñ

Provides information for:

Ÿ Installing local, alternate, or remote consoles for 3745 Models 130 to 610,

Ÿ

Configuring user workstations to remotely control the service processor for

3745 Models A and 3746 Model 900, using:

– DCAF program

– Telnet Client program

Customizing Your Control Program

SA33-0178

Guide to Timed IPL and Rename Load Module

Provides VTAM procedures for:

Ÿ Scheduling an automatic reload of the 3745,

Ÿ

Getting 3745 load module changes transparent to the operations staff.

Appendix B. 3745 Bibliography

B-3

Bibliography

Table B-1 (Page 3 of 4). Customer Documentation for the 3745 Models 130 to 17A and 3746 Model 900

Operating and Testing

SA33-0098

IBM 3745 Communication Controller

All Models

ô

Basic Operations Guide

ñ

Provides instructions for daily routine operations on the 3745 Models 130 to

610.

SA33-0177

SA33-0097

IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models A

ò

IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900

Basic Operations Guide

ñ

Provides instructions for daily routine operations on the 3745 Models 17A to

61A and 3746 Model 900 operating as an SNA node (NCP), APPN/HPR

Network Node, and IP Router.

IBM 3745 Communication Controller

All Models

ó

Advanced Operations Guide

ñ

Provides instruction for advanced operations and testing, using the 3745

MOSS console.

On-line Information

SH11-3081

Controller Configuration and Management Application

Provides a graphical user interface for configuring and managing a 3746

APPN/HPR Network Node and IP Router, and its resources.

Is also available as a stand-alone application, using an OS/2 workstation.

Defines and explains all the 3746 Network Node and IP Router configuration parameters through its on-line help.

IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller

Models 900 and 950

Controller Configuration and Management: User's Guide

õ

Explains how to use CCM and gives examples of the configuration process.

B-4

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Bibliography

Table B-1 (Page 4 of 4). Customer Documentation for the 3745 Models 130 to 17A and 3746 Model 900

Managing Problems

SA33-0096

IBM 3745 Communication Controller

All Models

ó

Problem Determination Guide

ñ

A guide to performing problem determination on the 3745 Models 130 to 61A.

On-line Information

Problem Analysis Guide

An on-line guide to analyze alarms, events, and control panel codes on:

Ÿ IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models A ò

Ÿ IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Models 900 and 950.

SA33-0175

IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models A

ò

IBM 3746 Expansion Unit Model 900

IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 950

Alert Reference Guide

Provides information about events or errors reported by alerts for:

Ÿ IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models A ò

Ÿ IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Models 900 and 950.

CD-ROM Bibliography

SK2T-6012

IBM Networking

Softcopy Collection Kit

Allows customer manuals consulting via CD-ROM viewer.

ñ Documentation shipped with the 3745.

ò

3745 Models 17A to 61A.

ó

3745 Models 130 to 61A.

ô Except 3745 Models A.

õ Documentation shipped with the 3746-900.

Appendix B. 3745 Bibliography

B-5

Bibliography

Service Documentation for the 3745 (Models 130, 150, 160, 170, and

17A) and 3746 (Model 900)

Table B-2 (Page 1 of 3). Service Documentation for the 3745 Models 1x0 and 17A, and 3746 Model 900

This service documentation has the following formats:

B o o k s

Onli ne

Books and

CD-ROM

SY33-2079

SY33-2067

SY33-2114

SY33-2116

SY33-2069

SY33-2070

IBM 3745 Communication Controller

Models 130, 150, 160, 170, and 17A

Service Master Index

ñ

Provides references for finding information in the IBM 3745 Models 1X0 and

17A shipping group documentation.

IBM 3745 Communication Controller

Models 130, 150, 160, 170, and 17A

Installation Guide

ñ

Provides instructions for installing or relocating the IBM 3745 Models 1X0 and

17A.

IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900

Installation Guide

ò

Provides instructions for installing or relocating the IBM 3746 Model 900.

IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900

Service Guide

ò

Provides procedures for isolating and fixing the IBM 3746 Model 900 problems.

IBM 3745 Communication Controller

Models 130, 150, 160, and 170

Service Functions

ñ

Describes MOSS functions using the IBM 3745 Models 1X0 and 17A consoles.

IBM 3745 Communication Controller

Models 130 to 17A

Maintenance Information Procedures

ñ

Provides procedures for isolating and fixing the IBM 3745 Models 1X0 and

17A problems.

B-6

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Bibliography

Table B-2 (Page 2 of 3). Service Documentation for the 3745 Models 1x0 and 17A, and 3746 Model 900

SY33-2115

IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models A

IBM 3746 Expansion Unit Model 900

ó

IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 950

Service Processor Installation and Maintenance

ô

(Based on the 3172, 9585, and 9577)

Provides information on installing and maintaining the service processor based on the PS/2 Types 3172, 9585, and 9577.

SY33-2112

SY33-2066

IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller

Models 900 and 950

Network Node Processor Installation and Maintenance

ô

(Based on the 3172)

Provides information on installing and maintaining the network node processor based on the PS/2 Type 3172.

IBM 3745 Communication Controller

Models 130, 150, 160, and 170

Hardware Maintenance Reference

ñ

Provides in-depth hardware reference information on the IBM 3745 Models

1X0 and 17A. Also valid for the 3745 Model 17A.

On-line Information

Hardware Maintenance Reference

õ

Provides in-depth hardware reference information on the 3746 Model 900.

SY33-2075

SY33-2117

IBM 3745 Communication Controller

All Models

ö

External Cable References

ñ

Provides references to console and line cables used for connecting the IBM

3745 Models 130 to 61A.

IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller

Models 900 and 950

External Cable Reference

÷

Provides references to console and line cables used for connecting the IBM

3746 Models 900 and 950.

S135-2015

S135-2012

IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller

Models 900 and 950

Parts Catalog

÷

Provides reference information for ordering parts for the IBM 3746 Models 900 and 950.

3745 Communication Controller

Models 130 to 17A

Parts Catalog

ñ

Provides reference information for ordering IBM 3745 Models 1X0 and 17A parts.

Appendix B. 3745 Bibliography

B-7

Bibliography

Table B-2 (Page 3 of 3). Service Documentation for the 3745 Models 1x0 and 17A, and 3746 Model 900

S135-2014

IBM Controller Expansion

Parts Catalog

Provides reference information for ordering parts for the controller expansion attached to the IBM 3746 Model 900 and 950.

CD-ROM Bibliography

ZK2T-8214

ZK2T-8187

IBM Networking

Softcopy Collection Kit

Allows service manuals consulting via CD-ROM viewer. EMEA version.

IBM Networking

Softcopy Collection Kit

Allows service manuals consulting via CD-ROM viewer. US version.

ñ Documentation shipped with the 3745.

ò Documentation shipped with the 3746-900.

ó

3745 Models 17A to 61A.

ô Documentation shipped with the processor.

õ Product integrated information.

ö 3745 Models 130 to 61A.

÷ Documentation shipped with the 3746 Models 900 and 950.

B-8

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Bibliography

Related Signal Converter Product Information

The following publications relate to IBM signal converter products and are currently available:

Ÿ

7861 Description and Planning Guide, GA33-0122.

Ÿ

7861 Setup, User's Guide, and Problem Determination, SA33-0123.

Ÿ

7861 Maintenance Information and Parts Catalog, SY33-2062.

Ÿ 7868 Guide to Operation, GA33-0134.

Ÿ 5822-10 Guide to Operation, GA33-0118.

Ÿ 5822-18 Guide to Operation, GA33-0136.

Ÿ 5858 Guide to Operation, GH11-3027.

Ÿ 5858 Maintenance Information and Parts Catalog, SY12-8246.

Ÿ Link Problem Determination Aid, SY33-2064.

Ÿ

Power Supply and Telecommunication Connections, GA33-0054.

Ÿ

7855 Guide to Operation, GA33-0160.

Ÿ

IBM 7857 Modem, Guide to Operation, GA13-1839.

Ÿ

IBM Asynchronous/SDLC V.32 Modem/A: Installation, Operation, and Problem Determination Guide,

SA27-3955.

Appendix B. 3745 Bibliography

B-9

Bibliography

Related NCP Service Information

NCP and EP Reference Summary and Data Areas (LY30-3196 for V4R3.1 only)

NCP and EP Reference Summary and Data Areas (LY30-5603 for V5 only)

These manuals are for system programmers and IBM program service representatives. They provide quick access to often-used diagnostic and debugging information about NCP and EP in the PEP environment.

NCP, SSP, and EP Diagnosis Guide (LY30-5591)

This manual is designed to help customers and IBM program service representatives isolate and define problems in NCP Version 3, NCP Version 4, NCP V4 Subset, NCP Version 5, and EP in the PEP environment using SSP Version 3. The primary purpose of the manual is to help the user interact with the IBM

Support Center to resolve a problem. Procedures in these manuals describe how to:

Ÿ Determine whether the problem is in NCP

Ÿ Use relevant information to describe the problem

Ÿ

Gather appropriate documentation about the problem

Ÿ

Report the problem to the IBM Support Center

In addition, it includes detailed descriptions of how to use the programming tools available with NCP and

SSP.

NCP and EP Reference (LY30-5569 for V4R3.1 only)

NCP and EP Reference (LY30-5605 for V5 only)

These manuals contain reference material describing the internal organization and function of the NCP and the EP in the PEP environment. These manuals provide information for customization and diagnosis.

World Wide Web

You can access the latest news and information about IBM network products, customer services and support via the internet, at the Universal Resource Locator (URL): http://www.ibm.com

B-10

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Abbreviation

bps

BRC

BSC

CA

CAB

CADR

AUI

BASA

BASB

BASC

BAT

BATRY

BCCA

BCLE

BER

BPC1

List of Abbreviations

A

AC

ACK

ACPW

ACUN

AC1

AC2

AFD

AIO

ARC

ASCII

BPC2

CADS

CAL

CBC

CBSA

ampere

1) alternating current

2) address compare affirmative acknowledgment (BSC) ac power box access unit (token ring access unit such as the IBM 8228) ac power box (ACPW) installed in position 1 of the 3746-900 ac power box (ACPW) installed in position 2 of the 3746-900 airflow detector adapter-initiated operation active remote connector

American National Standard Code for

Information Interchange access unit interface basic board A basic board B basic board C basic assurance test

FRU name of the battery

Buffer chaining channel adapter buffer control list element box event record

FRU name of the bus propagation card to replace the CAL card bus propagation card to replace the TRM card bits per second

BER reference code binary synchronous communication channel adapter channel adapter board

FRU name of the channel adapter driver receiver card

Channel adapter data streaming

FRU name of the channel adapter logic card controller bus coupler controller bus and service adapter

CSC

CSCE

CSCW

CSG

CSGH

CSGL

CSP

CSR

CBP

CBTRA

CBx

CCITT

CCU

CCW

CD

CDF

CDG

CDS

CE

CEPT

CID

CLDP

CLP

CNM

CO/CS

CPN

CP

CPx

CRP

CRU

CS

Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997 controller bus and service processor controller bus and token-ring adapter

FRU name of circuit breaker number x

Comite Consultatif International

Telegraphique et Telephonique central control unit channel command word carrier detector (signal) configuration data file concurrent diagnostic configuration data set (NCP/EP) customer engineer

Comite Europeen des Postes et Telecommunications channel interface display function controller load/dump program communication line processor communication network management contact operate / contact sense customer problem number

1) communication processor

2) control program

FRU name of circuit protector number x check record pool customer replaceable unit

1) cycle steal

2) communication scanner

3) connectivity switch

1) FRU name of the scanner for medium-

/low-speed lines

2) connectivity switch cable connectivity switch cable extension cycle steal control word cycle steal grant cycle steal grant high cycle steal grant low

FRU name of the communication scanner processor associated with the

FESH card for high speed lines

(CSC scanner for the medium-/low-speed lines) cycle steal request

X-1

Abbreviation

CSRH

CSRL

CSS

CTS

dc

DCAF

DCE

DCDP

DCPW

DCREG

DE

DFA

DIF

DMA

DMUX

cycle steal request high cycle steal request low control subsystem clear to send (signal) direct current

Distributed Console Access Facility data circuit-terminating equipment dc distribution and protection box dc power box

FRU name of the dc regulator card device end (channel status)

FRU name of the disk file adapter card disk function direct memory access

FRU name of the double multiplex card

DRS

DSI

DTE

DTR

EAC

EC

EIA

ELA

data rate select data store interface data terminal equipment data terminal ready (signal)

Ethernet adapter card engineering change

Electronic Industries Association

Ethernet line adapter

ENQ

EPO

ERC

ESCA

enquiry (BSC) emergency power-OFF error reference code

ESCON channel adapter. An ESCA consists of an ESCON channel processor

(ESCP) and an ESCON channel coupler

(ESCC)

ESCC

ESS

ESCON channel coupler. A communication controller hardware unit which is the interface between the ESCON channel processor and the ESCON fiber optic cable

ESCON channel coupler type 2

ESCC2

ESCON channel A channel having an Enterprise

System Connection* channel-control-unit interface that uses optical cables as a transmission medium

ESCP

ESCON channel processor. A communication controller hardware unit which provides the channel data link control for the

ESCON channel adapter

Ethernet sub-system

IPL

IR

IRR

ISO

IFT

IML

in.

INN

IOC

IO

IOH

IOHI

HSB

HSS

HW

Hz

IBE

ID

IEEE

ETG

FAN1

FAN2

FCC

FDD

FE

FESH

FRU

ft

GPT

GTF

HCS

HDD

HDR

hex

HLIR

HPP bus

HPTSS

Ethernet tail gate

FRU name of the power supply box fan

FRU name of the logic box fan

Federal Communications Commission

FRU name of the flexible disk drive field engineering

FRU name of the front-end scanner

(high-speed) field-replaceable unit foot generalized PIU trace generalized trace facility

Hardware Central Service

FRU name of the hard disk drive header hexadecimal high-level interrupt request high-performance parallel bus high-performance transmission subsystem high-speed buffer (cache) high-speed scanner hardware

Hertz internal box error identifier

Institute of Electrical and Electronics

Engineers internal function test initial microcode load inch intermediate network node input/output control input/output input/output halfword (instruction) input/output halfword immediate (instruction) initial program load interrupt request interrupt request removed

International Organization of Standardization

X-2

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

KB kbps

kg

kHz

LA

LCBB

LCBE

LCEB

LCEE

LCPB

LCPE

LED

LIB

LIB1

LIB2

LIB3

LIB4

LIC

LICx

LSS

LSSD

m

mA

MAC

MB

MCC

MCF

LID

LLIR

LPDA

LS

LSAR

LSR

MCT

MDOR

MES

MHz

Abbreviation

kilobyte (1024 bytes) kilobits per second kilogram kilohertz

1) load address (instruction)

2) line adapter line connection box base line connection box expansion line connection enclosure base line connection enclosure expansion line connection power base line connection power expansion light-emitting diode line interface coupler board

LIC board type 1 for LICs 1, 3, and 4

(models A and B)

LIC board type 2 for LICs 5 and 6

(models A and B)

LIC board type 3 for LICs 1, 2, and 3

(model C)

LIC board type 4 for LICs 5 and 6 (model

C) line interface coupler card

FRU name of line interface coupler card type x line interface display low-level interrupt request

Link Problem Determination Aid local storage local storage address register local storage register (CSP) low-speed scanner level-sensitive scan design meter milliampere

MOSS adapter card for 3745 model 17A megabyte; 1 048 576 bytes

FRU name of the MOSS control card microcode fix machine configuration table

MOSS data operand register miscellaneous equipment specification megahertz

NCCF

NCP

NCTE

NLDM

NMVT

NPDA

MPC

MSA

MSAU

MSC

MUX

mV

NAK

min

MIO

MIOC

MIP

MLA

mm

MMIO

MOSS

MOSS-E

PCF

PKD

PIO

PNLC

POR

PRC

PROM

NPSI

oc

OLT

ov

PANEL

PC

PCC

PS minute

MOSS input/output

MOSS I/O control bus

Maintenance Information Procedures

MOSS LAN adapter millimeter memory mapped input/output maintenance and operator subsystem maintenance and operator subsystem extended

FRU name of the MOSS processor card machine status area multistation access unit

FRU name of the MOSS storage card multiplex function millivolt negative acknowledgment character

(BSC)

Network Communications Control Facility

Network Control Program network communication terminal equipment

Network Logical Data Manager network management vector transport

Network Problem Determination Application network packet switching interface overcurrent online test overvoltage

FRU name of the control panel personal computer

FRU name of the power control card primary control field (storage) portable keyboard display program-initiated operation

FRU name of the panel card power-ON reset processor

FRU name of the programmable readonly memory module power supply

List of Abbreviations

X-3

Abbreviation

RIM

RNIO

ROS

RPO

RSF

RTS

R/W

SALC

SAR

SAT

SCTL

SDLC

SIM

SMUXA

SMUXB

SNA

SNRM

SPDn

SPS

SRC

STO

SVC

SWx

PCSS

PSTCE

PS1

PS2

PTCE

PTT

PUC

PV

RAC

RCV

RD

RETAIN

RFS

RI

power control subsystem product support trained CE

FRU name of power supply number 1

FRU name of power supply number 2 product-trained CE

Post, Telephone and Telegraph (agency)

FRU name of the CCU card parity valid (signal) repair action code receive receive data (signal)

Remote Technical Assistance Information

Network ready for sending (signal)

1) register to immediate operand

(instruction)

2) ring indicator (same as CI) request initialization mode (SDLC)

OS/VS VTAM IO trace read-only storage remote power-OFF remote support facility request to send (signal) read/write scanner ALC (Airline line control) storage address register specific assurance test

FRU name of the storage control card

Synchronous Data Link Control set initialization mode (SDLC)

FRU name of the single multiplex card for LIC board type 2

FRU name of the single multiplex card for LIC board type 2

Systems Network Architecture set normal response mode (SDLC) signal and power distribution card service and power support system reference code

FRU name of the storage (card) supervisor call

FRU name of switch number x

T

TA

TCM

TD

TERMC

TERMD

TERMI

TERMR

TI

TIC

TIC1

TIC2

TIC3

TPS

TRA

TRM

TRP

TRSS

TSS

T1

UA

UC

UEPO

URSF

V

VB

VAC

VDC

VH

VTAM

V.24

V.25

V.28

V.35

transmit (signal) tag address

1) thermally-controlled module

2) trellis coded modulation

1) tag data

2) transmitted data (signal)

FRU name of the terminator/channel signals card (IOC)

FRU name of the DMA terminator card

FRU name of the IOC terminator card

FRU name of the terminator/redrive card

(IOC) test indicator (signal) token-ring interface coupler

FRU name of the TIC card type 1 (4

Mbits only)

FRU name of the TIC card type 2 (4 and

16 Mbits)

FRU name of the TIC card type 3 (4 and

16 Mbits) two-processor switch token-ring adapter

FRU name of the token-ring multiplexer card that controls up to two TICs token-ring processor token-ring subsystem transmission subsystem

US service for very high speed transmissions at 1.5 million bps unnumbered acknowledgment (SDLC) universal controller unit emergency power-Off universal remote support facility volt valid byte (signal) volts, alternating current volts, direct current valid halfword (signal)

Virtual Telecommunications Access

Method

CCITT V.24 recommendation

CCITT V.25 recommendation

CCITT V.28 recommendation

CCITT V.35 recommendation

X-4

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

WLOB

XI

wire lobe (cable connecting token-ring adapters to token-ring access units)

X.25 SNA interconnection

XID

X.21

X.25

Abbreviation

exchange identification

CCITT X.21 recommendation

CCITT X.25 recommendation

List of Abbreviations

X-5

Abbreviation

X-6

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Glossary

Glossary

This glossary defines all new terms used in this manual.

It also includes terms and definitions from the

IBM Dictionary of Computing, GC20-1699.

adapter-initiated operation (AIO). A transfer of up to

256 bytes between an adapter (CA or LA) and the CCU storage. The transfer is initiated by an IOH/IOHI instruction, and is performed in cycle stealing via the

IOC bus.

alarm. A message sent to the MOSS console. In case of an error a reference code identifies the nature of the error.

alert. A message sent to the host console. In case of an error a reference code identifies the nature of the error.

autoBER. A program to automatically analyse a BER file.

automaint. A function that uses autoBER to isolate failing FRUs.

box event record (BER). Information about an event detected by the controller. It is recorded on the disk/diskette and can be displayed on the operator console for event analysis.

block multiplexer channel. A multiplexer channel that interleaves blocks of data. See also byte multiplexer channel. Contrast with selector channel.

byte multiplexer channel. A multiplexer channel that interleaves bytes of data. See also block multiplexer channel. Contrast with selector channel.

cache. A high-speed buffer storage that contains frequently accessed instructions and data; it is used to reduce access time.

central control unit (CCU). In the 3745, the controller hardware unit that contains the circuits and data flow paths needed to execute instructions and to control its storage and the attached adapters.

channel adapter (CA). A communication controller hardware unit used to attach the controller to a host processor.

clear channel. Mode of data transmission where the data passes through the DCE and network, and arrives at the receiving communication controller unchanged from the data transmitted. The DCE or network can modify the data during transmission because of certain network restrictions, but must ensure the received data stream is the same as the transmitted data stream.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997

communication controller. A communication control unit that is controlled by one or more programs stored and executed in the unit. Examples are the IBM 3705,

IBM 3725/3726, IBM 3720, and IBM 3745.

communication scanner processor (CSP). The processor of a scanner.

communication subsystem. The part of the controller that controls the data transfers over the transmission interface.

configuration data file (CDF). A MOSS file that contains a description of all the hardware features (presence, type, address, and characteristics).

control panel. A panel that contains switches and indicators for the use of the customer's operator and service personnel.

control program. A computer program designed to schedule and to supervise the execution of programs of the controller.

control subsystem (CSS). The part of the controller that stores and executes the control program, and monitors the data transfers over the channel and transmission interfaces.

data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE). The equipment installed at the user's premises that provides all the functions required to establish, maintain, and terminate a connection, and the signal conversion and coding between the data terminal equipment (DTE) and the line. For example, a modem is a DCE (see modem.)

Note: The DCE may be separate equipment or an integral part of other equipment.

data terminal equipment (DTE). That part of a data station that serves as a data source, data link, or both, and provides for the data communication control function according to protocols.

direct attachment. The attachment of a DTE to another DTE without a DCE.

high-performance transmission subsystem

(HPTSS). The part of the controller that controls the data transfers over the high-speed transmission interface (speed up to 2 million bps).

high-speed scanner. Line adapter for lines up to 2 million bps, composed of a communication scanner processor (CSP) and a front-end high-speed scanner

(FESH).

X-7

Glossary

initial microcode load (IML). The process of loading the microcode into a scanner or into MOSS.

initial program load (IPL). The initialization procedure that causes 3745 control program to commence operation.

input/output control (IOC). The circuit that controls the input/output from/to the channel adapters and scanners via the IOC bus.

internal clock function. A LIC function that provides a transmit clock for sending data, and retrieves a receive clock from received data, when the modem does not provide those timing signals. When the terminal is connected in direct-attach mode (without modem) the ICF also provides the transmit and receive clocks to the terminal, via the LIC card.

line adapter (LA). The part of the TSS, HPTSS, or

TRSS that scans and controls the transmission lines.

Also called scanner.

For the TSS the line adapters are low-speed scanners

(LSSs).

For the HPTSS the line adapters are high-speed scanners (HSSs).

For the TRSS the line adapters are token-ring adapters

(TRAs).

line interface coupler (LIC). A circuit that attaches up to four transmission cables to the controller.

low-speed scanner. Line adapter for lines up to 256 kbps, composed of a CSC card.

maintenance and operator subsystem (MOSS). The part of the controller that provides operating and servicing facilities to the customer's operator and the IBM service representative.

NetView

. An IBM licensed program used to monitor a network, manage it, and diagnose its problems.

Network Control Program (NCP). An IBM licensed program that provides communication controller support for single-domain, multiple-domain, and interconnected network capability.

operator console. The IBM Operator Console that is used to operate and service the communication controller (CC) through the MOSS. Optionally an alternate console may be installed up to 120 m from the CC, or a remote console may be connected to the (CC) through the switched network.

scanner. A device that scans and controls the transmission lines. Also called line adapter.

selector channel. An I/O channel designed to operate with only one I/O device at a time. Once the I/O device is selected, a complete record is transferred one byte at a time. Contrast with block multiplexer channel, multiplexer channel.

Systems Network Architecture (SNA). The description of the logical structure, formats, protocols, and operational sequences for transmitting information through a user application network. The structure of

SNA allows the users to be independent of specific telecommunication facilities.

token-ring subsystem (TRSS). The part of the controller that controls the data transfers over an IBM

Token-Ring Network.

The TRSS consists of one token-ring adapter (TRA).

token-ring adapter (TRA). Line adapter for an IBM

Token-Ring Network, composed of one token-ring multiplexer card (TRM), and two token-ring interface couplers (TICs).

transmission subsystem (TSS). The part of the controller that controls the data transfers over low- and medium-speed, switched and non switched transmission interfaces.

The TSS consists of up to six low-speed scanners

(LSSs) associated with the LICs units (LIUs), through serial links (SLs).

two-processor switch (TPS). A feature of the channel adapter that connects a second channel to the same channel adapter.

V.24. CCITT V.24 recommendation

V.25. CCITT V.25 recommendation

V.35. CCITT V.35 recommendation

X.20 bis. CCITT X.20 bis recommendation

X.21. CCITT X.21 recommendation

X.25. CCITT X.25 recommendation

YZxxx.. wiring diagram

X-8

3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP

Readers' Comments — We'd Like to Hear from You

IBM 3745 Communication Controller

Models 130 to 17A

Maintenance Information Procedures

Publication No. SY33-2070-09

Please send us your comments concerning this book. We will greatly appreciate them and will consider them for later releases of the present book.

If you prefer sending comments by FAX or electronically, use:

Ÿ FAX: 33 4 93 24 77 97

Ÿ

E-mail: FRIBMQF5 at IBMMAIL

Ÿ IBM Internal Use: LGERCF at LGEPROFS

Ÿ

Internet: [email protected]

In advance, thank you.

Your comments:

Name

Company or Organization

Phone No.

Address

Readers' Comments — We'd Like to Hear from You

SY33-2070-09

IBM

Cut or Fold

Along Line

Fold and Tape

Please do not staple

Fold and Tape

IBM France

Centre d'Etudes et Recherches

Service 0798 - BP 79

06610 La Gaude

France

Please do not staple

Fold and Tape

PLACE

POSTAGE

STAMP

HERE

Fold and Tape

Cut or Fold

Along Line

SY33-2070-09

IBM

Part Number: 03F5017

Printed in Denmark by IBM Danmark A/S

SY33-2ð7ð-ð9

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement